Home

Partner ACS R1 Programming and Use

1. B a K 5 TI a n o n o n a o o o o o a Bn El o a n a n o n o n o BCM SCN ECOG 8 5 a BC BLH BLT BEI K 8 BLA SLE BC acd BLE sce B E Ext Message Intercom Intercom PARTNER 18D 18 Phone N Q R 5 T B BLN aLO BCP all BCJ SLKJ all BLE ELE BLG LH LA iE s8LCl alo H H Ext Message Intercom Intercom PARTNER 6 Phone N n n uLC l oLD gLA sLB LH LH LH LH Intercom Intercom Ext Message Figure 2 4 Button Locations on PARTNER Model Phones 2 18 Programming Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program To move back to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press then System Program Remote Programming The system permits programming from a remote location using an auxiliary device called the Remote Administration Unit RAU Remote programming requires the installation of two RAUs one at your site and one at the location from which the programming is to be done For more information about remote pr
2. N PARTNER 34D Overlay LJ est Y 6G HH oM JJ FF Next Next Next X Procedure ltem V Data X Remove g pees r Ra rome Prev Prev Prev Procedure Item Data Enter eme CE CE Cee C u o H M N 0 P AA Z o M m N O H P m L Li m G H l J K L H I Oo J Oo K H L n n n n A B C D E F oE LF op GI a H rogram BUM fia Oa Org Oe rp E Message Intercom Intercom H H Ext Feature f i B E f Volume Speakerphone V A O Spkr ol Mic HFAI MLS 34D Phone Wild J a n O alU psv 2 X EE 5CFF im n n CQJ SER gC GET e gD o H H o o o SLM 1 SEN 1 BLO P AA BBB o Ei E m oO J oO K Li L Li Y Li Z oO o m m a E g F E G HB H ae Intercom o H H o o n oB gc D Figure E 1 Programming from a PARTNER 34D Phone E 2 Programming Mixed Phones PARTNER 6 Phone o mi m C a o o o o o o u a Intercom Intercom Ext Message MLS 34D Overlay PARTNER 18D 18 Phone Next Next A m Procedure m ltem m Data ra Remove N o Po poe EO pom 1 n LS LS LS LS LS B Prev Prev
3. a a FNight Svc LNR SNR VMMsgs VM Box Grp Page Ext 23 Ext 24 Ext 25 Ext 26 Ext 27 Ext 28 Ext 17 Ext 18 Ext 19 Ext 20 Ext 21 Ext 22 CE Ext 12 ExIS Ext 14 Ext 15 Ext 16 Line7 Line amp 8 MS Bill Fax 30 Sales ist Support Line1 Line 2 Line 5 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Figure 2 5 Button Programming for Receptionist s Phone Alternatively the receptionist can use an Intercom Autodialer for the extensions the receptionist dials most frequently This leaves buttons on the phone free for more features and phone numbers 2 22 Programming Using Telephone Programming There are two ways to program a telephone Centralized Telephone Programming from extension 10 or 11 see below and Extension Programming from a user s own extension see Using Extension Programming later in this section Telephone Models Figure 2 6 illustrates a PARTNER 18D and Figure 2 7 illustrates a PARTNER 6 phone As you program buttons mark their functions on the phone s labeling sheet see the examples in Figures 2 6 and 2 7 NOTE A PARTNER 6 phone only has four buttons available for lines If four lines are assigned it has no programmable buttons
4. TTT eat Extension Jacks Figure 2 1 PARTNER ACS Stand Alone 2 Slot and 5 Slot Systems Configured for Maximum Lines 3 7 or 15 2 2 Programming Stand Alone 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier ACS ACS ACS Processor Processor 206 Processor Module Module Module 206 Modules Module 206 Modules Line Jacks Line Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks Hr i Extension Jacks Figure 2 2 PARTNER ACS Stand Alone 2 Slot and 5 Slot Systems Configured for Maximum Extensions 8 14 or 32 Initial System Setup After the control unit is installed you set up the system using a combination of system and telephone programming procedures In this guide System Programming procedures are identified by a code and three digits Telephone Programming procedures are identified by the feature name only Use the System Planner as a guide when programming The following sections provide an overview of the procedures you use for initial system setup Blaine how to use the specific procedures Other programming procedures are opt
5. Contoluniti1 2 1T 8 defintion t 2 electricalrequirements A 3 sd environmental requirements llusraion t B y Copy Settings 399 Cordessphones 1 6 11 OO Coverage 5 188 5 189 5b 190 5 191 5 192 5 196 Creditcardscanners 4 13 1 1 OO Customer Self Service Center on the Intermet 6 1 Cycle programming method 2 17 D Date System 101 Day System H 02 Dial pulse signaling 5 153 Dial tone 13 5 13 9 5 103 BO intercom outside 3 5 3 9 recall 5 146 5 1347 1 standard phones 3 9 O system phones Dial code features Dialing restrictions and permissions disallowed phone SAU EA a SONEESENSE emergency po numbers 5 fax machine od lineaccess 2 9 5 108 5 109 Cd locking an exenson e ie Se long distance for 5 179 outgoing calls types of 5 137 5 138 outside lines controlling calls on overriding 2 11 5 171 5 175 5 176 i PBX Centrex services with 2 7 programming 2 7 Fa 2 8 5 10 5 61 5 62 5 175 P2100 star codes with summary of 2 9 1 2 10 Direct Department Calling see Hunt Groups Direct Facility Termination see Line Direct Line Pickup Active Line 5 57 5 58 Disallowed List Assignments 405 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Disconnect problems 5 97 6 15 6 24 Display 3 3 5 64 5 65 5 77
6. PARTNER 18D Phone n Recall SNR LNR Conf Drop o o n q n 3 Fax Shop Warehouse Sales B Oo Line s y Ig Programmable i MS Cover a DND E Priv F Home Buttons 2 z gl n ni Any unused L Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 line button is programmable Figure 2 6 Example of PARTNER 18D Phone PARTNER 6 Phone Line Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable a Privacy Linel Figure 2 7 Example of PARTNER 6 Phone Programming 2 23 Using Centralized Telephone Programming Use Centralized Telephone Programming to program features or store telephone numbers for individual extensions from extension 10 or 11 Most features also can be programmed on a system phone at the user s extension Keep in mind the following exceptions m Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing always must be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming m lfauser has a standard phone Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming m lfauser has a standard phone or a non display system phone Extension Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming During Centralized Telephone Programming the display phone at extension 10 or 11 takes on the characte
7. No ring Number of n 04 5 186 Numbering of lines and extensions 2 212 3 lt O One touch transfer see Auto Dialnumbers Optional equipment 1 8 2 10 4 114 2b Ordering equipment B 6 B 7 1 O reference materials and books B 4 B 5 sd Out of building extension requirements 4 3 A 3 Outgoing Call Restriction 4 401 5 137 45 1388 1 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 description 5 139 15 140 CS lightpattenms 3 A Outside Auto Dialnumbers 5 16 Outside call making EP Outside Conference Denial EIS _______ Outside line reserving an 5 5 120 S Outward restriction see Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Overlay see Programming overlays Overriding dialing restrictions 2 11 5 171 5 175 Owner line 5 113 1 5 114 P PAGE jack specifications A 2 Paging Calling Groups Loudspeaker 4 2 5 117 5 118 5 156 5 157 PARTNER model phone 5 87 5 89 1 Simultaneous 5 156 1 5 157 PARTNER ACS processor module PARTNER Advanced Communications System processor module see PARTNER ACS processor module PARTNER phones see System phones PARTNER Voice Messaging Systems see Voice messaging systems t7J2 22 PARTNER CAA8 Intercom Autodialer PARTNER 34D telephone buttons and indicators forreceptionist 2 21 Cid illustration
8. Special dialing functions 5 161 5 162 Specifications A 1JA 4 y Speed dialing 15 15 5 16 Auto Dial numbers Forms D 2 D 3 System Speed Dial numbers 5 175 p 177 Standard devices Personal Speed Dial numbers answeringmachines 4 4 4 7 SSS autoattendant 4 B Standard devices continued call reporting device 4 9 4 11 contactclosuredevice 4 2 ssid credit card scanners 4 13 fax machines limitations 1 7 J3 9 3 10_ modems 4 20 M 21 Cd problems with 4 3 6 15 Cd telephones 1 7 3 8 8 11 1 1 voice messaging system 4 24 Standard phones Automatic Line Selectionfor 5 20 5 21 sd call handling 3 14 Caller ID information connecting 1 8 dial tones dial code features display 3 10 feature buttons on feature phones limiations 1 8 S O O message waiting compatibility 1 7 5 125 5 127 oveview 1 7 2 8 0 0 O power failure for use during problems with 6 11 6 12 O ringing patterns 3 9 speakeron 3 0 Cd SO E EST system messages using 3 8 3 11 8 12 1 1 1 1 Star Code Dial oda description 2 8 5 10 5 61 5 1636 15 programming for PUR System Speed Dialing tation Lock 5 165 5 167 tation Message Detail Recording 4 9 4 11 5 158 5 160 Extension Name Displa 5 89 SY S S Station name see Station page 5 89 Station programming see Extension p
9. 7 Z 8 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Reset Save All When the reset is completed the system is no longer in Programming Mode and the date and time appear on the display 5 174 System Reset Programming Saved 728 System Speed Dial Numbers Description This feature lets you program a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers for the system Anyone on the system can dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a standard phone and the three digit code from 600 through 699 You can mark System Speed Dial numbers to override dialing restrictions Related Features System Speed Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing four buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing a single button For instructions on entering special characters such as Pause in a number see Special Dialing Functions Individuals can have up to 20 additional Personal Speed Dial Numbers for use on their own phones You can store account codes as System Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature A System Speed Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 470 setting To program enter a Pause followed by the star code and the phone number For example press EANA Considerations To program System Sp
10. n the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 26 Troubleshooting Specifications Autodialer Capacities System Module Extension Jack e 15 outside lines via line jacks on ACS Processor Module e Maximum two devices per one ACS processor module plus 3 outside lines extension jack total REN on jack two 206 modules plus two 400 e Bextensions not to exceed 2 0 System phone modules e 2touch tone receivers REN is 0 0 zero e 32 extensions via extension jacks e 2 power failure NOTE The two devices e da epus module transfer extensions combined on an extension jack p 1 loudspeaker paging system via 206 Module uris ds aae M PAGE jack on ACS processor a outside lines devices mod le e 6 extensions f e 1 audio source via MUSIC ON B d Mud we ed HOLD jack onACS processor e 1 power failure phones to the same extension transfer extension jack If a device lists two RENS module RCA phono plug use the higher number when required 400 Module adding up the RENs e 1 call reporting device viaSMDR 4 outside lines jack on ACS processor module e No extensions No more than one system phone 355 A F adapter required e 2touch tone receivers per jack e 1 Contact Closure Adjunct using For programming a system display CONTACT EE jack on ACS phone must be connected to processor moaye extension 10
11. M Maintenance B 1 O Makingacall 5 11915 122 ManualSignaling 5 123 15 124 Marked System Speed Dial numbers Message indicator 3 3 MessagelightOn Off 5 125 5 128 Message Waiting see Standard phones i Microphone 3 3 B 5 3 6 Microphone disable see Mute Microphone Mic buton 3 3 B 5 3 6 Modems sendonly 4 20 0 sendandreceive 4 231 O Modules capaciies 1 5 A 1 o o y description 1 4JA 1 oo At dimensions A 1 electrical specifications A 2 numbering order for extensions and lines PARTNER MAIL uL PARTNER ACS processor 1 3 1 4 2 2 A 1 A 2 B 6 qns A 1 200 200ET L mabes OSS 206 1 ee EO 2 206E 1 4JA 1JB 6 Cid 206EC 400 j 400E 1 A A 1 B 6 1 1 O 400EC 1 4 A 1 MOH se Monitoring call activity 2 21 5 15 5 108 Music On Hold 602 as background music description 4 2 5 129 licensing requirements 1 2 sd programming 5 130 Cd volume setting system wide 5 131 sd MUSIC ON HOLD jack specifications activating or deactivating 5 129 Music On Hold Volume 614 e N Name Display 5 76 5 77 Night Service auxiliary equipment with dialing restrictions with 2 40 programmingj5 133 5 135 using 5 133 5 134 with password 2 10 5 171 ooo Night Service Button 503 description 5 132 15 134 light patterns Night Service EET SEXISREIGRS 504 5 135
12. To program a Call Forwarding button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights At this point you can m Press I or m Press and the number of the originating extension or m Press CD the number of the originating extension and the number of the destination extension 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To forward calls manually 1 Press 1 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding manually 1 Press 1 2 Dial your extension number twice To forward calls using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no destination extension was programmed dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on 5 32 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX To remove Call Forwarding using the programmed button 1 Press
13. m To prevent an extension from using a line restrict the line even if it is not assigned to the extension so it cannot be accessed using Direct Line If an extension s access to a line is set to No Access or In Only the extension cannot place calls on that line either by pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup ldle Line Likewise if the extension s access to a line is set to No Access or Out Only the extension cannot receive calls on that line that are ringing at other extensions either by pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup Active Line m When a user has access to an outside line for outgoing calls dialing restrictions can be customized for the user s extension by using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 m Caller ID information does not display for ringing calls on lines programmed for Out Only or No Access Considerations If a line is assigned to a phone but is restricted to No Access the line button lights show calling activity but the line cannot be used to place or receive calls Valid Entries 1 No Restriction calls permitted on that line AW 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on that line 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on that line 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can join calls receive transferred calls or pick up calls on hold on that line 5 108 Line Acce
14. To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The first call is put on hold and you are connected to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again You can continue to press the switchhook to move between the two calls 5 96 Hold Hold Disconnect Time 203 Description This System Programming procedure lets you change the hold disconnect time for an outside line When a caller on hold hangs up the local telephone company may send a special signal to the system to free the line Different telephone companies use different length signals The length of the signal is called the hold disconnect time If you put a call on hold and the caller hangs up but the call does not disconnect within a minute after the caller hangs up the hold disconnect time is probably set too high or set at No Detection Considerations m If the telephone company does not send a signal keep the hold disconnect time set to 450 msec the default setting The user must disconnect a held call manually by retrieving the call then hanging it up m Shorten the hold disconnect time only if abandoned calls on hold do not disconnect m Lengthen the hold disconnect time only if calls are being disconnected prematurely Valid Entries 00 No Detection 01 50 msec 02 100 msec O3 150 msec 04 200msec 05 250msec 06 300msec 07 350msec 08 400
15. Use Touch Tone Enable only after a call is connected For example use this feature after dialing a bank by phone service that requires you to dial touch tone digits You can program a Touch Tone Enable button on a system phone to turn on Touch Tone Enable with one touch Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Touch Tone Enable button JE a fF N Using Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 0 8 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button or press Q when you need to enter touch tone digits Touch Tone Enable stays in effect until you hang up 5 180 Touch Tone Enable F08 Transfer Return Extension 306 Description By default transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered This System Programming procedure can be used to identify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call Related Features m You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to define the number of times all system extensions should ring with transferred calls before they return to their transfer return exte
16. When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press Central Tel Program then System Program To move back to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Ceniral Tel Program Using Extension Programming Users can program features or store numbers on buttons from their own phones using Extension Programming Keep in mind the following exceptions m Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing always must be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming m fa user has a standard phone Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming Programming 2 25 m fa user has a standard phone or a non display system phone Extension Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming To program at the extension use the following procedure 1 Tostart programming dial The green lights next to buttons on which lines are assigned for the extension show the current Line Ringing settings Remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 2 Toassign a name to the extension press left intercom then enter the character codes See Extension Name Display in Chapter 5 for the codes 3
17. m Touch Tone Enable Your system is connected to rotary lines but you want to call an answering machine at 555 3454 to retrieve messages Since the machine requires touch tones enter 5 5 2 3 4 4 fanst All digits pressed during the rest of the call are sent as touch tones m On Off Centrex Feature Button To include both the activation and deactivation codes for a Centrex feature on the same button press to include a stop between the two codes For instance if the code to activate a Centrex feature is 30 and the code to deactivate the feature is 81 store 3 Wic HFA X 3 7 on the Auto Dial button The first time you press the Auto Dial button only the number before the stop is dialed to activate the feature When you press the button again the rest of the stored number is dialed to deactivate the feature m Number Outside a PBX or Centrex System To store a number that dials out of a PBX or Centrex system include a dial out code in the Speed Dial number This entry to dial the number 201 555 4321 includes a dial out code a 1 5 second pause and a toll call prefix of 1 for direct dialing which may not be required for your dialing area 9 Hola 1 Z 0 1 amp amp 5 5 162 Special Dialing Functions Star Code Dial Delay 410 Description Central Offices of some phone companies support the use of star codes before the dialed phone number to obtain special
18. 3 A display similar to the following appears Emergency List 03 Da ta cueesseuecueeguue Enter the telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter At this point m Toenter other phone numbers press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m Tochange the phone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 74 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Exclusive Hold F02 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature prevents other extensions from picking up outside calls placed on hold at a specific extension with a system phone Related Features You can use the Hold button to put calls on regular hold any extension can pick up the held call Considerations m You can program an Exclusive Hold button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch m For system phones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program an Exclusive Hold button 1 Press
19. 502 5 47 Conference Calls Description This section explains how to set up conference calls using the button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator in a single call Users can connect both outside and inside parties in a conference call but the call cannot include more than two outside parties Related Features You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties During the conference call any inside party can exit the call at any time simply by hanging up However if an outside party hangs up during a conference call the callers that remain in the conference may hear a dial tone Use Conference Drop to remove the last added outside party from a conference call m Caller ID information does not display for extensions that are active on a conference call Considerations Users can use System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial or Auto Dial numbers to add parties to the conference Do not add a busy or ringing outside call to a conference if you do all callers hear the busy or ringing signal If you hear a busy signal or the party does not answer reconnect with the held party by pressing the line button Users cannot join a conference call the originator must add each party to the conference If the conference originator puts the call on hold other par
20. A display similar to the following appears AllowTo 27 List Number 3 Enter the list number 1 8 For example to select list 1 press 1 4 Toassign or unassign the list press until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis point m Toassign or unassign another list to this extension press or until the list number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m o program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Allowed List Assignments 408 5 9 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Description This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions as long as they have access to an outside line For example if you restrict an entire category of calls through Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 you can permit calls to a specific number in that category by placing that number on an Allowed Phone Number List Using this procedure you can create up to eight lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each Related Features m After completing this procedure you must use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign the Allowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions Allowed Phone Number Lists override but not Line Access or with a System Password 403 There are other ways of overriding restrictions see Marked System Speed Dial Numbers 406
21. Examples voice signal a Hunt Group with one touch If you have a voice messaging system you can program Hunt Group 7 Intercom 7 O Z on a button to retrieve messages with one touch Here are some useful applications for a Hunt Group m Place the extensions of employees who work in a department sharing calls such as a customer service group in a Hunt Group so that when a call comes in to the receptionist it can be transferred to the next available extension This alleviates the problem of one employee receiving most of the calls Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group Doing so lets outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using To program a Hunt Group button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a p
22. This equipment in the 5 Slot configuration and in the 2 Slot configuration with PARTNER MAIL VS has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will have to correct the interference at his or her own expense Class B Compliance The Stand Alone PARTNER ACS processor module configuration and the 2 Slot configuration using a 200 a 206 or a 400 module have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals may cause harmful interference to radio communications FCC and IC Information C 1l FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered wit
23. What to do Make sure the control units power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the on off switch is in the ON position O if you have a 5 Slot carrier m lf the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected m lf the green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the hotline m lf the green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 m f any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the hotline Possible Cause 2 The power outlet is faulty What to do Test the outlet by plugging in an appliance like a lamp or radio m If the appliance does not work the outlet is faulty If possible plug the control unit into a different outlet Then check the fuse box or call an electrician m lf the appliance works go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 A control unit fuse is blown What to do Call the hotline Multiple Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 The LED on one system module is out What to do If the green LED on the front of a module is out try reseating the module in the control unit m lf the LED lights the problem is corrected m lf the problem remains call the hotline Possible Cause 2 The green LEDs on several system modules are out What to do If the LEDs on the front of several system modules are out try reseating the leftmost module of the ones with the lights out see Repla
24. a fF ON Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 0 3 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 146 Recall F03 Using To access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting while active on an outside line System Phone 1 Press the programmed button or press Q 3 Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the programmed button or press 0 3 again Standard Phone 1 Press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature phone that has one You hear intercom dial tone Press 3 Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature phone again Recall F03 5 147 Recall Timer Duration 107 Description This System Programming procedure lets you change the length of the timed signal or switchhook flash generated by the system Recall feature as well as by the Recall option used in Auto Dial and Speed Dial numbers Recall sends this timed signal over the phone line to the local telephone company or PBX to which the system is connected Typically you use the Recall feature to access a PBX
25. and System Password 403 for more information m The entries you must make to permit or restrict long distance calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 40 This setting tells the system whether a O for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when users make long distance calls m f Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active after a valid star code is dialed the system resets the dialing restrictions to check the number beginning with the first digit after the star code Considerations m Each list entry can include up to 12 digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display m Ifyou are restricting an extension from placing long distance calls do not place numbers beginning with a O on an Allowed Phone Number List for the extension Once a user is active on an operator assisted call the user will be able to avoid dialing restrictions by asking the operator to dial restricted numbers m f you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone numbers in a list you must use Next Procedure or Prev Procedure to do so since entering and a three digit code will be considered data for the telephone number Valid Entries Up to 12 digits including 0 9 and any single digit 5 10 Allowed Phone Number Lists 44407
26. 107 to adjust the length of the Recall signal Your local phone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 You can press to insert a Recall signal in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number provided it is the first character in the stored number For examples see Special Dialing Functions Considerations m Using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call m Whenever your PBX or Centrex documentation tells you to press the switchhook when you are on an outside call use the Recall feature instead If you are already on a call most PBX or Centrex systems require that you press the switchhook to get a new dial tone then dial a feature access code to access a specific PBX or Centrex service On a system phone press a programmed button or press Q to use Recall On a standard phone first press and release the switchhook to get intercom dial tone then send a Recall signal by pressing 0 3 On a standard feature phone that has a Recall or Flash button first press the Recall or Flash button to get intercom dial tone then send a system Recall signal by pressing You can program a Recall button on a system phone to send a Recall signal with one touch Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Recall button 1
27. 5 intercom inside 5 121 5 122 outside 5 12015 121 sd Calling Group 5 46 5 87 15 89 Calling Group Extensions 502 5 46 15 47 Carrier dimensions andweightsJA 1 1 2 Slot 1 3 1 4 2 2 2 3 B 6 5 Slot 1 3 1 42 212 3 B 6 o Capabilities system 1 1 1 y Capacities system 1 5 A 1 Centralized telephone programming 2 1 2 2312 25 Changing system settings 2 3 2 6 2 7 Clock changing 5 178 CO Line Hunting see Group Call Distribution 4206 Combination extension problems with using 3 121 3 13 Components system batteries 1 5 _ PC Card slot 4 5 telephones 1 6 1 O Conference call making a 5 4815 49 Confbutton 3 2 5 4815 490 Dropj5 50 limit outside partici outside restriction 5 141 Configurations ji5l 3 0 1 extensions maximum 2 Slot 1 3 1 4 2 2423 5 Slt i 3 1 4 2 212 83 1 1 lines maximum oveview l 4 Cd Stand Alone 1 4 Cd Contact Closure Adjunct descriptionJ2 12 o y electrical and wiring specifications setting up 4 12 Contact Closure device 4 12 1 1 Contact Closure Group 612 CONTACT CLOSURE jack descrpion t 3 2 12 1 1 1 specifications A 2 Cid Contact Closure Operation Type 613 Contact Closures description power failure behavior during 5 51 lt IN 2 Index
28. Dial the number of the extension to which the call should return if it is not answered Transfer Return Extension 306 5 181 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 182 Transfer Return Extension 306 Transfer Return Rings 105 Description This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions defines the number of times a transferred call rings before it goes to the transfer return extension Related Features m By default transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to specify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call m f you program Hunt Group Extensions 505 make sure this setting is four or more rings This setting allows the call to continue hunting to other group extensions if it is not answered by the first group extension where it rings m If an extension has VMS Cover active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return extension Considerations m lf you have a fax machine or an answering machine connected to the system set Transfer Return Rings to a number greater than the number of rings at which these devices answer Doing so prevents a call transfer
29. Examples The examples below show how you would enter telephone numbers for an Allowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of Programming When an Allowed List is assigned to an extension users can dial numbers on that list even if the numbers would otherwise be restricted m Specific Telephone Numbers Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it For example to allow calls to the number 201 555 1111 make the following entries Toll Call Prefix required 12015551111 Toll Call Prefix not required 2015551111 m All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code The following list entries allow calls to the 800 area code Toll Call Prefix required 1800 Toll Call Prefix not required 800 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 0 7 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe List Number prompt enter a list number 1 8 For example to select the first list press 1 3 Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 For example to select the first entry press 0 1 4 AttheData prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter 6 Atthis point m Tochange the phone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5
30. Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the extension number to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 0 2 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode ak wh Using While active on an outside call on a system phone 1 Press the programmed button or press 2 to put the call on Exclusive Hold The green light next to the line or button flutters At all other extensions the line appears busy steady red 2 Toretrieve the call press the line or button on which the call is held and lift the handset or press Sekn You can pick up a call on Exclusive Hold only at the extension at which it was put on Exclusive Hold Exclusive Hold F02 5 75 Extension Name Display Description Users can assign a name to their extension up to 20 characters long on PARTNER model phones up to 12 characters long on MLS model phones Then when that extension is used to make an intercom group or transferred call the name appears on the system display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Related Features Display Language 303 has no effect on this feature This means that the extension name displays exactly as it is programmed Considerations m Anyextension regardless of th
31. Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode a fF ON Using System Phone Press the programmed button or press 0 The last added outside party is dropped from the conference Standard Phone Press the switchhook down once rapidly The last added party inside or outside is dropped from the conference 5 50 Conference Drop F06 Contact Closure F41 and F42 Description The system can drive an optional Contact Closure Adjunct with two Contact Closures to operate auxiliary devices such as electronic door locks You can assign one or more extensions to a Contact Closure Group for each of these Contact Closures Only these extensions can control the activation of the Contact Closures by using for Contact Closure 1 and for Contact Closure 2 or by programming these dial codes onto buttons on their phones See Appendix A Specifications ffor information about electrical requirements for the Contact Closure Adjunct Related Features m Before a user can activate a Contact Closure you must assign the user s extension to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure m Use Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to specify how long the Contact Closure remai
32. For example to copy to extension 22 press 2 4 Atthis point m Tocopy the same settings to another extension enter the new extension number m o copy another extension s settings press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Copy Settings 399 5 55 Dial Mode 201 Description This System Programming procedure identifies individual lines as touch tone or rotary You should check with your local phone company if you are not sure which type of line is being provided to you Related Features If you are having difficulty using touch tone phones on rotary lines you may need to adjust the Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 If the system has rotary lines you can use Touch Tone Enable to send touch tone signals over a rotary line for example to access bank by phone services If Dial Mode 201 is set to Rotary star codes are entered by dialing 11 instead of If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call Restriction 01 set to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the Dial Mode 201 set to Rotary you should add 11 to an Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 and assign the list to these extensions Otherwise when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code the system interprets this as an attempt to place a long distance call the call is blocked and
33. It is recommended that you leave the Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 Slot 2 is recommended for the Backup Restore PC Card however either slot can be used If the system detects Backup Restore PC Cards in both slots when a backup begins the first slot is used and the second is ignored The same Backup Restore PC Card can be used for both automatic and manual backups since the data is recorded in two separate files An automatic backup replaces the AUTO mmadyy file only where mmddyy represents the date of the backup in month day year format and a manual backup replaces the MAN mmadyy file only asks you to specify which backup file you want to use To save your previous system and telephone programming settings as well as the current ones use another Backup Restore PC Card for the second backup By alternating the cards you can keep the most recent two backups Remember to power down the system before removing or inserting the Backup Restore PC Card Calls will continue to be handled normally during a manual backup Backup Programming Manual 124 5 29 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To begin a manual backup of system settings 1 Verify that only one Backup Restore Card is in the processor module if not use the procedure in Inserting or Removing a PC Card before continuing 2 P
34. The following display appears 5551001 At this point m o program another System Speed Dial number start from Step 2 m o program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the three digit code m Toremove a System Speed Dial number enter the number s three digit code and press once Press to exit programming mode 5 176 System Speed Dial Numbers Using System Phone You can lift the handset or press before dialing 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and the two digit line number Press Feature Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 If you did not specify an outside line the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display phone unless it is a Marked System Speed Dial number Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number System Speed Dial Numbers 5 177 System Time 103 Description This System Programming procedure sets the time that appears on system display phones Related Features m Backup Programming Automatic 123 uses the System Time to schedule the automatic backups m Backup Programming Automatic 123 and B
35. The phone at the extension from which calls are being forwarded beeps once each time a call is forwarded unless Do Not Disturb is active Do not forward your calls to any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system At an extension that has Call Forwarding activated if multiple calls are ringing the system forwards them one at a time This means that each subsequent call is not forwarded until the previous call is finished If you press the Call Forwarding button after a call starts to ring that call will not be forwarded You can program Call Forwarding on a button on a system phone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are forwarded When the green light is on your calls are forwarded when the green light is off calls ring at your extension If the Call Forwarding feature code and optional originating and destination extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Forwarding on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Forwarding is on even if calls are forwarded to a different extension than the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Forwarding off Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 5 31 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones
36. hotline You can identify several extensions as external hotlines Do not assign an external hotline to the first two extensions on each module 10 11 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 or 37 which are reserved as power failure extensions 5 78 External Hotline 311 Valid Entries Extensions 12 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify an external hotline extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 3 1 1 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the external hotline extension number see Valid Entries above For example to program extension 30 as the external hotline press 3 3 Toassign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev ttem until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode To program the external hotline phone number as Personal Speed Dial code 80 1 Press Feature O Q System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Dial the extension number of the external hotline 3 Press 4 Enter the external hotline phone number exactly as you would dial it 5
37. office closest to you call 1 800 247 7000 A representative will place your order including Lucent Technologies installation if you need it m Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealers You can also buy most items from one of Lucent Technologies authorized dealers Check your local telephone directory s yellow pages for the Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer nearest you m Lucent Technologies National Parts Sales Center This national sales center located in Denver stocks replacement parts Telephone orders can be placed by calling 1 800 222 7278 In Canada order these items from Lucent Technologies Canada Eastern Canada and Ottawa 1514 335 7200 Ontario 1 416 756 5236 Central and Western Canada 1 800 561 5165 Maintenance B 5 To use Table B 1 first locate the item you want A triangle 4 indicates where you can obtain it Table B 1 Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacement Parts U S SOURCE U S Lucent Lucent Lucent Lucent Direct Technologies Technologies Technologies Catalog Sales Authorized National Parts Sales Sales Office Dealer Center System Modules and Wiring 800 451 2100 800 247 7000 800 222 7278 PARTNER ACS Processor module Includes module three 7 ft line cords and installation A A A A instructions Line Extension module 206E Includes module two 7 ft line cords and installation instructions Line module 400E 200E Includes module four 7 ft line cords and instal
38. or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 22 press 2 3 Toactivate or deactivate Distinctive Ring for the extension press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev ttem until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Distinctive Ring 308 5 67 Do Not Disturb F01 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from audibly alerting lights still flash When Do Not Disturb is on outside callers hear ringing while inside callers hear a busy signal This feature is recommended only if someone answers outside calls for your extension when you do not answer them Related Features Caller ID information for incoming calls displays only when a call is audibly alerting at an extension This means that extensions with Do Not Disturb activated do not receive Caller ID information unless the call is answered Users with Automatic VMS Cover 310 Assigned or with VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox Considerations This feature requires a button with lights When the Do Not Disturb feature is on the light is also
39. pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two digit line number Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left 8 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Or seco dq Using System Phone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button and dial the two digit line number 01 15 of the idle line you want to access or press and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 8 and the two digit line number 01 15 of the idle line you want to access Direct Line Pickup ldle Line IBLL 5 59 Disallowed List Assignments 405 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to eight Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specified extensions Related Features You must use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of disallowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure Considerations When a Disallowed Phone Number List i
40. ringing patterns are not passed to phones Phones use the ringing patterns described here instead Dial Tones You will encounter two different dial tones when calling with a system phone m Outside dial tone is generated by your local phone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two types of dial tones on a system phone press a line button The dial tone you hear is an outside dial tone To hear an intercom dial tone press Intercom Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone Every PARTNER model and MLS model system phone except the MLS 6 has a speaker and a microphone which you can turn on by pressing Sex In addition you can turn just the microphone on and off by pressing vic rFA When the green light next to is on the microphone is on If you prefer to dial and conduct calls without lifting the handset you can use the speaker and the microphone instead Use these techniques to make calls with the speaker and the microphone m Tomake a call without lifting the handset press to get a dial tone then dial the number and you will hear the call ringing When the other party answers you can talk without lifting the handset m If you are already on a call you can switch from the handset to
41. subscribe to Caller ID service Caller ID information is the caller s telephone number or name if available When active on a call a user automatically receives Caller ID information for the duration of the call When an extension is idle a user receives Caller ID information for the call the user will be connected to when the handset is lifted This feature requires no special programming however you must subscribe to Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules Related Features Any users who have access to Caller ID line s will receive Caller ID information on their system display phones You can restrict users from viewing Caller ID information using the following procedures For ringing calls you can block Caller ID from displaying at specific extensions by restricting access to the Caller ID lines Uselline Access Restriction 302 For active calls you can activate Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your calls and from accessing the Caller ID information displayed at your extension For held calls use Exclusive Hold rather than Hold to prevent other users from picking up your held call and from accessing the Caller ID information associated with the held call There are two ways to inspect Caller ID lines Ifyou are active on a call you automatically get Caller ID
42. then speak to a user who is active on a call m You can use the Manual Signaling button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Follow Me Message Light On Message Light Off Station Lock and m To transfer a call to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press before pressing the Manual Signaling button See Transferring Calls Considerations m APARTNER or MLS model phone is required at both extensions to use this feature m You must program the Manual Signaling feature code and the target extension number on a button Use a button with lights if you want to view the status of the target extension similar to an Auto Dial button m You can have only one button per extension either on the system phone or on the Intercom Autodialer for a target extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button The lights next to the button show calling activity see Lights in Chapter 3 for more information m f you signal an extension that has an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button programmed for your extension the green light next to that button flutters to identify your extension as the signaling extension m You can signal the target extension while you are on an outside call This does not initiate a one touch transfer m A Manual Signaling button does not initiate an intercom call unless you lift the handset or press
43. 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v PRESS to assign another extension DIAL 505 p 5 101 DIAL a group number 1 6 7 for VMS DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v PRESS to assign another extension VMS HUNT DELAY DIAL 506 DIAL 1 Immediate v 2 Delayed p 5 191 DIAL 507 DIAL 1 Always v 2 Day Only 3 Night Only p 5 192 Auxiliary Equipment FAXMACHINE EXTENSIONS DIAL 601 p 5 80 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to identify another extension MUSIC ON HOLD p 5 129 DIAL 602 DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active HOTLINE DIAL 603 DIAL the hotline extension number 12 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 or 38 41 DIAL the alerted extension number not the hotline or to paging system To remove the hotline and alert PRESS p 5 99 DOORPHONE 1 EXTENSION DIAL 604 p 5 71 DIAL an extension number 12 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 or 38 41 To remove the doorphone extension PRESS DIAL 605 p 5 71 DIAL an extension number 12 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 or 38 41 To remove the doorphone extension PRESS DOORPHONE ALERT EXTENSIONS DIAL 606 p 5 70 DIAL an extension number except a doorphone extension 1 Not an alert v 2 Doorphone 1 alert 3 Doorphone 2 alert 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 PRESS to identify another extension up to 32 alert extensions
44. 11 instead of If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call Restriction 407 sct to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the Dial Mode 201 set to Rotary you should add 11 to an Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 and assign the list to these extensions Otherwise when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code the system interprets this as an attempt to place a long distance call the call is blocked and the user hears the reorder tone 7 System Speed Dial Numbers can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting To program enter a Pause followed by the star code and the phone number For example press Hola X 6 Z 8 8 6 CD 0 0 CD A Marked System Speed Dial number can also begin with a star code To enter it press X followed by the star code and the phone number For example press K G9 6 2 6 2 C C 0 0 CD Considerations m The Star Code Dial Delay is not inserted in manually dialed numbers m f your Central Office provides the second dial tone immediately you do not need the delay provided by Star Code Dial Delay In this case choose the O setting to enable restriction checking but avoid the delay Valid Entries 0 0 Seconds Delay W 4 4 Seconds Delay 1 21 Second Delay 5 5 Seconds Delay 2 2 Seconds Delay 6 Not Active 3 3 Seconds Delay Prog
45. 2 Settings that Restrict an Extension s Dialing Once It Gets an Outside Line Type of Setting for Setting for Setting for Setting for Restrictions or ine Line Access Outgoing Call isallowed Permissions for E eas Restriction Restriction Phone Number the Extension 301 302 Lists 404 Can place Outside line No restriction Local only Any local intercom and may be numbers the local calls only assigned extension should and can answer not dial any call Can place Outside line No restriction No restriction Any local and intercom local may be long distance and long assigned numbers the distance calls extension should and can answer not dial any call If a line is not assigned to the extension a user can use Direct Line Pickup to access the line Emergency numbers Marke d System Speed Dial numbers Allowed Phone numbers and numbers dialed using the System Password override all dialing restrictions if a user has access to an outside line to place the call If Forced Account Code Entry is programmed for an extension the user must enter an account code before accessing an outside line If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List the entered account code must match an entry on that list The Disallowed List then must be assigned to the extension using Disallowed List Assignment 405 2 10 Programming Overriding Dialing Res
46. 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Calling Group button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button If you want calls to ring the group press left 2 If you want calls to page the group press left Note that buttons programmed for paging a Calling Group cannot be used to transfer a call to that Calling Group Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 6 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To use when programmed on a button m To ring or page the Calling Group press the programmed button first then lift the handset Ifyou ring the group all available extensions in the Calling Group ring Ifyou page the group start talking after the beep Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are idle or have Do Not Disturb turned off in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page m To transfer a call to the Calling Group while on a call press the button programmed for ringing a Calling Group You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling
47. 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m If Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work m f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Phone is faulty What to do Unplug the problem phone Plug in a standard phone that you know rings properly m f the replacement phone rings properly the problem phone is defective Replace it m f the replacement phone does not ring properly call the hotline nthe continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 11 Standard Phone Rings Back After Intercom Call with No One at Other End Possible Cause 1 The switchhook is accidentally pressed and released causing a call to ring back What to do Be sure that the handset is always replaced carefully If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Automatic Line Selection is programmed incorrectly What to do If one of the phones involved is a standard single line rotary or touch tone telephone set its Automatic Line Selec
48. 4 without lights Line Programmable Buttons ns oo oo oo oo oo oo ag oo oo oo oo su oo oo oo 1 ff io oo oo oo ag nu oo oo oo nu oo oo oo oo oo oo ag c q 5 16 with lights c q 5 Intercom Buttons 9 r d n 8 g Ext Message g g Ext Message NI E c L Message Light iu Eee ame Hfi a arh M a A ur F4 QG a CG m4 QG Came a Pa RR RE 69 e 2 I 6 Feature O 4 ir exe TW fex l o exe WA em B Transtr 7 8 9 l HEAL Transtr 7 8 9 R Ej OQ 0 o EcL e EE ae B d I d Transfr 7 Tess l E BS I Ss re I Spkr Hold Saa Spkr Press to turn on and off the speaker and microphone if available so you can dial and have a conversation without lifting the handset The light next to this button shows when the speaker is turned on Mic HFAI Press to turn the microphone on and off The light next to this button shows when the microphone is turned on Leave on to use the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature Message In
49. 5 Atthis point m To program another line for this extension press Next item or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 112 Line Assignment 301 Line Coverage Extension 208 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure identifies an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate VMS Cover for that line Related Features m Anextension s owned line is eligible for coverage only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction 302 is set to No Restriction or In Only m Use VMS Coverjor Automatic VMS Cover 310 to redirect the extension s calls on owned lines to the voice messaging system m Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to specify the number of times a call rings at the owner s extension before it is sent to the voice messaging system m Users with VMS Cover turned on can Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox by activating Do Not Disturb Considerations m Only one owner can be assigned to a specific line However multiple lines can be owned by the same extension m This feature provides an alternative method of routing outside calls to the voice me
50. 503 801 161 contains basic information for using the MDW 9030P pocketphone MLC 6 Cordless Telephone Installation 999 506 143 explains how to install the MLC 6 cordless telephone MLC 6 Cordless Telephone Quick Reference 999 506 146 contains basic information for using the MLC 6 cordless telephone PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 3 Installation and Programming 518 322 105 provides instructions for installing programming and maintaining your PARTNER MAIL VS system PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 3 Planning Forms 585 322 504 provides the forms needed to plan and record how your PARTNER MAIL VS system is to be programmed Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 3 518 322 106 contains instructions for using the PARTNER MAIL VS system PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Release 3 Planning Installation and Use 585 322 516 provides instructions for planning installing programming and maintaining your PARTNER MAIL system B 4 Maintenance m PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Release 3 Planning Forms 585 322 517 provides the forms needed to plan and record how your PARTNER MAIL system is to be programmed m PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System Release 3 User s Guide 585 322 518 contains instructions for using the PARTNER MAIL system Some of these materials also are available in Spanish and French For more information or to order materials contact the Lucent Tech
51. A call you transferred to the fax machine was not answered and is returning to you 4 14 Using Auxiliary Equipment See Chapter 5 for details Then Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine There are two situations in which you would want to transfer a call to your fax machine m You answer an outside call and hear a fax machine signaling A fax signal is a single beep sequence beep beep beep If you hear this you should transfer the call immediately to the fax machine extension m You are on a call with a person who wants to send you a fax using the fax machine that is connected to his or her phone You can receive the fax by transferring the call to your fax extension Tell the other party to wait until he or she hears the fax signal before pressing the Start button on the sending fax machine In addition if you have a PARTNER MAIL system and a fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system its Automated Attendant Service can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or if you have multiple fax machines to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines There are four ways to transfer the call to the fax extension m If you have a Fax Management button simply press the button When the fax machine answers hang up m f you do not have a Fax Management button press plus the fax machine s extension number When the fax machine answers hang up m Onastandard
52. All Calls Description You can use the VMS Cover or Do Not Disturb buttons to send intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on owned lines immediately to your voice mailbox Related Features m Use Line Coverage Extension 2208 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line m IfiVMS Cover is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice mailbox This allows callers to leave a message without having to wait for the number of rings specified with VMS Cover Rings 117 117 Using To send a call immediately to the voice messaging system m f VMS Cover is not turned on while the call is ringing press the VMS Cover button The ringing call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox subsequent calls go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings m If VMS Cover is already turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All covered calls are sent immediately to the voice messaging system until you turn off Do Not Disturb Send All Calls 5 155 Simultaneous Paging I 70 Description This feature accesses the loudspeaker paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the primary processor module and all of the idle systems phones with speakers assigned to Calling Group 1 Related Features m You must use Calling Gro
53. Backup and Restore Features 2 14 m Hospitality Features 2 14 2 1 Contents Using System Programming The Programming Overlays Button Locations Programming Mode Changing Programming Type Remote Programming Telephone Programming Options Automatic Line Selection Extension Name on Display Line Ringing Personal Speed Dialing Programming Telephone Buttons Programming a Receptionist s Extension Call Handling Options Button Programming Using Telephone Programming Telephone Models Using Centralized Telephone Programming Changing Programming Type Using Extension Programming Programming Overview After the system hardware is installed you can customize the system and individual telephones This chapter explains how to use programming to accomplish that There are two types of programming m System Programming pllows you to customize the system to meet the needs of your business When the system is first installed it uses factory settings that reflect the most commonly used options You can change System settings as needed You can perform System Programming from either extension 10 or 11 Because an extension cannot be in programming mode and handle calls at the same time consider using extension 11 for programming Doing so gives you the ability to program without disrupting call handling by the receptionist at extension 10 m Telephone Programming Bllows telephones to be customized to
54. Ca Caller ID Inspect 5 descr Light patterns iption illustration 2 18 E 2 Buttons Auto Dial intercom systemphone 1 6 3 2 39 3 Cd line programming 3 2 i2 14 5 26 j5 28 6 1816 19 5 26 6 6 e 1816 19 214 5 28 5 150 0000 0000 0 Batteries 1 5 6 316 5 1 2 14 139 5 140 i2 14 5 197 5 199 A 3IB 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Busy extension indication see Busy Lamp Fields BLF feature see Button locations for programming at extension 10 11 a Light patterns accounting see Assistant Intercom Autodialer Follow Me Forwarding description SA light patterns 3 4 handling featur Interc Park report 4 Restri timer Waitin ler ID Call Waiting with descri es ept t feature 4 4 ction Outgoing 401 g 316 Station Message Detail Recording description light patterns 3 4 0000000000000 O 31400 options for receptionist s extension 4g fepouing re 3 p 13715 3188 ption device 43 00 information viewing 5 39 5 43 O modules required for printing information SMDR wps SS SUS Index IN 1 Caller ID Name Displa description 5 438 ligntpatterns 8 4 1 1 Caller ID Type 4122 5 4415 45 1 1 Calling extensions simultaneously
55. Card Slot 2 m Slot 2 is recommended for the Backup Restore PC Card however either slot can be used If the system detects Backup Restore PC Cards in both slots when a backup begins the first slot is used and the second is ignored m The same Backup Restore PC Card can be used for both automatic and manual backups since the data is recorded in two separate files An automatic backup replaces the AUTO mmahdyy file only where mmddyy represents the date of the backup in month day year format and a manual backup replaces the MAN mmadyy file only Restore Programming 125 asks you to specify which backup file you want to use m Calls will continue to be handled normally during an automatic backup Valid Entries 1 Active 2 Not Active v 3 Backup Alarm Cleared Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Changing the Setting To change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program H 1 A 3 at extension 10 or 11 The current setting is displayed 2 Press Nex Data or Prev Data to change the setting or press to return the setting to the default 3 Exit programming mode If you chose Option 1 Active The system will be backed up to the PC Card at 2 00 a m and thereafter at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month provided th
56. Closure The Contact Closures can control devices such as electronic door locks Related Features m Use Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to specify how long each Contact Closure remains active when activated m f a Contact Closure is used to control a door lock and a doorphone is installed at that door you may want to assign the extensions in the Contact Closure Group to also be the Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 for that doorphone m When a users extension is included in the appropriate Contact Closure Group the user can then uas Contact Clas re io activate the contact closure device Valid Entries 1 Assigned to the Contact Closure Group 2 Not Assigned to the Contact Closure Group W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign extensions to a Contact Closure Group 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Contact Number prompt enter the number for the Contact Closure 1 or 2 For example to assign extensions to Contact Closure 1 press 7 3 Atthe Extension prompt enter the two digit extension number that you want to assign to this Contact Closure Group For example to assign extension 14 to this group press a 4 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis po
57. Description The backup of system and telephone programming is optional but recommended especially if you are changing the processor module or upgrading the system or before and after any major programming changes This System Programming procedure manually backs up all the programming except the system date day and time to a Backup Restore PC Card Related Features m Verify that the System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 are set correctly These settings are not backed up You can use Backup Programming Automatic 2123 if you prefer If so backups are done automatically at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month You can also use both methods performing manual backups between the scheduled monthly backups Once the system and telephone programming settings have been backed up to a PC Card you can use thal Restore Programing F 28 orocscrs to restore the settings if they become corrupted You can also use Restore Programming 125 to verify the date on a backup file Considerations To perform either manual or automatic backups purchase a Backup Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies Before inserting the Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 power down the system After inserting the PC Card power up the system again For instructions see Inserting or Removing a PC Card in this section You must have a Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot before a backup can take place
58. Failed SystemBusy in System Programming Mode Possible Cause Changes were being made to system programming or central telephone programming while a backup was in progress What to do Try Backup Programming Manual 124 later when the system is idle or during nonbusiness hours nthe continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 21 Problems with System Restore Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card when you tried to do a restore using Restore Programming 125 What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system Restart the procedure Display Shows Bad File Try Again in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You attempted a restore and the file was corrupted What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again with a different backup file Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards Display Shows Empty File in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You selected a file named AUTO or MAN for the restore The file is empty no backups have been stored in it yet What to do Try Restore Programming 125
59. Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 0 1 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 30 press Q 3 Tochange the type of call restriction press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 138 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to change the current Outgoing Call Restriction setting for an extension This button is useful for quickly changing an extension s restriction For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of the room phone from No Restriction to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out Conversely a receptionist can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of a conference room phone from Local Only which prevents users from making long distance calls to No Restriction so a client can dial long distance Related Features m Rather than using an Outgoing Call Restriction button you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to change an extension
60. Numerical Listing of Procedure Codes and Dial Codes 5 2 System Programming Procedures 5 2 Dial Code Features 5 3 Intercom Dial Code Features 5 3 AA Extensions 607 5 4 Abbreviated Ringing 305 5 5 Account Code Entry F12 5 6 Allowed List Assignments 408 5 9 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 5 10 Answering Calls 5 12 Auto Dialing 5 15 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 18 Automatic Line Selection 5 20 Automatic VMS Cover 310 5 22 Background Music F19 5 24 Backup Programming Automatic 123 5 26 Backup Programming Manual 124 5 29 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 X X X X 5 31 Call Park 5 34 Call Pickup I6X X 5 36 Call Waiting 316 5 37 Caller ID 5 39 Caller ID Inspect F17 5 41 Caller ID Name Display F16 5 43 Caller ID Type 4122 5 44 5 i Contents Calling Group Extensions 502 Conference Calls Conference Drop F06 Contact Closure F41 and F42 Contact Closure Group 612 Contact Closure Operation Type 613 Copy Settings 399 Dial Mode 201 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I8LL Disallowed List Assignments 405 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Display Display Language 303 Distinctive Ring 308 Do Not Disturb F01 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Exclusive Hold F02 Extension Name Display External Hotline 311 Fax Machine Extensions 601
61. Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each PARTNER model phone The letters on the PARTNER 34D Overlay in are printed on the Overlay To help you program from an MLS 34D phone you may want to write the letters shown on the MLS 34D Overlay in Figure E 2 on your Overlay If you want to program features on specific buttons at target phones it is recommended that you 1 Lookat the figure with the overlay that matches the phone at your programming extension 2 Find the location of the button in the picture of the target phone 3 Note the letter associated with that particular button 4 Find the letter in the picture of the Programming Overlay 5 Press that button on the programming extension For example if you are using a PARTNER 34D phone at extension 10 and you want to program Do Not Disturb on the top leftmost button of an MLS 18D phone refer to Figure E 1 find the top leftmost button on the MLS 18D phone then press the button labeled M on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay Programming Mixed Phones E 1 MLS 6 Phone H H o o o A o B H C o D Intercom Intercom H H Ext oO oO Volume Vv A D Spkr MLS 18D 12D 12 Phone
62. PARTNER Advanced Communications System Your suggestions will help us improve the quality of our reference materials and products Thank you for taking the time to give us your comments Programming and Use book when commenting on specific items please give page numbers Other comments Please use other side if necessary Submitted by optional Name Return to Company Publications Manager Address Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W 226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 Telephone FAX 908 953 6912 Date Please be advised that Lucent Technologies reserves the right to use your suggestions without any obligation to compensate you for those suggestions Centralized Telephone Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO PRESS 0 AT THE SAME EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON i ith PRESS the programmed button PRESS System Program System Program Central Tel Program After you program one feature continue with prog the instructions in the box for the next feature DIAL the extension number to be programmed TO CHANGE SETTING FOR PRESS Buttons on which lines are assigned for the extension light ANOTHER EXTENSION TO END GG MODE up to show the current Line Ringing se
63. Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers Auto Dial numbers or system features as described in Chapter 5 To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press Wic HFAl 4 To exit programming mode you can press or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle 2 26 Programming Learning About Telephones Contents System Telephones 3 1 m Buttons and Indicators 3 2 m Lights 3 4 m Ringing Patterns 3 5 m Dial Tones 3 5 m Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone 3 5 Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI 3 6 Voice Interrupt on Busy Calls 3 6 Speakerphone Performance Tips 3 7 Standard Telephones 3 8 m Ringing Patterns 3 9 m Dial Tones 3 9 m Using the Switchhook 3 9 m limitations 3 9 m Feature Phones 3 11 Combination Extensions 3 12 Using Telephones 3 14 m Basic Call Handling Features 3 14 m Dial Code Features 3 14 3 i Learning About Telephones This chapter explains how system and standard phones work with the system as well as combination extensions where more than one phone or standard device is installed In addition basic call handling features and dial code features are listed at the end of this chapter See the feature name in Chapter 5 for details about a specific feature System Telephones PARTNER model phones have several buttons and indicators in common The following pages explain where they are and how they work For information about an MLC 6 MLS model
64. Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing the Backup Failure Alarm Jearlier in this chapter nthe continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 19 Problems with Manual Backup Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card when you tried to do a manual backup using Backup Programming Manual 124 What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system Restart the procedure Display Shows Card is Write Protected in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You tried to do a manual backup using Backup Programming Manual 124 but the Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is write protected What to do Using the end of a paperclip or another pointed object gently push the write protect tab upward to the nonprotected position see Figure 6 7 and try the procedure again You do not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the ti write protect tab up Slide the switch on the PC card l up to the nonprotected position N NS Figure 6 7 Write Protect Tab on a Backup Restore P
65. Remove the auxiliary device from the extension Then plug in an auxiliary device that you know works properly m Ifthe phone works properly the problem is the auxiliary device Replace the auxiliary device m Ifthe phone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Phone is plugged into the wrong jack of the system phone or the bridging adapter What to do Plug the phone into the correct jack see the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for instructions m Ifthe phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Wrong bridging adapter is used in combination extension What to do First unplug the bridging adapter from the wall jack Then unplug the phone from the adapter and plug the phone directly into the wall jack m Ifthe phone works there is a problem with the bridging adapter Replace the bridging adapter use only a Lucent Technologies 267F2 bridging adapter If the problem persists call the hotline m Ifthe phone still does not work properly call the hotline n the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 16 Troubleshooting Problems with Standard Devices Standard Device Does Not Answer Possible Cause A standard device such as a fax machine or answering machine
66. Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection Jand for existing lines back to factor settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings useine Assignment 301 Considerations m You can use this feature to tell the system how many lines are actually connected at the control unit For example if some line jacks do not have lines connected use this procedure to indicate the number of jacks that actually have lines connected otherwise the line numbers associated with empty jacks would be assigned to phones as though there were actually lines connected m You can use this procedure to limit the number of lines that are automatically assigned to all extensions For example if there are ten lines connected to the control unit you can use this procedure to set the number of lines to eight so that only the first eight lines are assigned to all system extensions You can then use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 9 and 10 to specific extensions Valid Entries 3 lines for the PARTNER ACS processor module plus 2 lines per 206 or 200 module plus 4 lines per 400 module v Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign lines to the system at initial system setup 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 1 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter two digits for
67. SJoquinw eiq peeds wajshs euo erp ui09J9jui Buina e luw 9po sseJd euoud psepue s e uo 9p02 amp ieej ssoid auoyd uiejs s e UO PIG OL wa sAs suoneoiunuiuio paoueApy wHaNLYVWd JequinN euoydeayjea Auedwo9 awen e2uaJ8Jau YANG BU ees siequinw e q peeds jeuossdg WesBoid OL JequinN euoudajo uoisua x3 euo eip u109J9jul Bula 8 luw opo sseJd euoud piepueis e uo wa sAs suoneoiunuiuo peoueApy sH3N LHVd Auedwo9 awey SJOqUINN eig peeds jeuosaag 9p02 amp meej ssoid auoyd uiejs s e UDO PIG OL Programming Mixed Telephone Types Overview This appendix provides information about programming from a PARTNER 34D phone to MLS model phones and from an MLS 34D phone to PARTNER model phones In these situations you should be aware that the button that you press at extension 10 or 11 the programming extension is likely to be in a different location than the button on the phone to which the programming applies the target phone If you are programming from a PARTNER 18D or MLS 18D phone the button locations are the same You can use the illustrations in this appendix to facilitate programming from one telephone type to the other Figure E T shows the buttons on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each MLS model phone Figure E 2lshows the buttons on the MLS 34D Programming
68. The button can be used to call the extension or to transfer a call to the extension with one touch the lights next to the button also show calling activity for the extension See also Manual Signaling Intercom call A call that is made to another system extension Internal call See Intercom call L Line The transmission path between your control unit and the local phone company s Central Office used for incoming and outgoing calls Line button A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific line for making calls Line hunting See Group Call Distribution Line jack The location on a PARTNER ACS processor module and 206 and 400 modules that allows you to connect outside lines to the control unit Line number The number assigned to each line jack on a PARTNER ACS processor module a 206 module or a 400 module Line numbers run consecutively from 01 through 15 Line Reserve A system feature that lets you reserve a busy line by pressing the busy line button without lifting the handset so your phone beeps when the line becomes free Loudspeaker paging system Equipment that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker from a system extension Any Lucent Technologies paging system can be connected to the PAGE jack on the processor module in the control unit See aa GL 4 Glossary M Mailbox See Voice mailbox Manual Signaling A feature that lets a user signal an extens
69. The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Standard Phone To ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press and a group number 1 6 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone that is not busy Ifno one answers the call does not keep hunting To transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension 5 92 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G Group Pickup 166G Description This featu
70. The system can have one of three basic configurations all of which must be wall mounted m Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module This configuration does not use a Carrier m 2 Slot carrier which can hold up to two modules The PARTNER ACS processor module resides in the leftmost slot m 5 Slot carrier which can hold up to five modules The PARTNER ACS processor module resides in the center slot This carrier includes a cover In either carrier one and only one of the modules must be a PARTNER ACS processor module The modules slide into the carrier which channels power to the system System Modules The following system modules can be installed in your system m PARTNER ACS Processor Module provides the software intelligence that controls the system s features It has jacks for three outside lines eight extensions a music on hold audio source a loudspeaker paging system a Contact Closure Adjunct and a call reporting SMDR device Such as a printer It also has two PC Card slots a bicolor red and green light emitting diode LED and two AAA user replaceable batteries The module also provides support for Caller ID information on system display phones The system requires one PARTNER ACS processor module m 206E Module has jacks to connect a maximum of two outside telephone lines and six extensions to the system You can connect telephones and other telecommunications devices such as fax machines and modems to the extensi
71. Total 7 lines 8 extensions Total 14 extensions 5 lines 5 Slot Carrier One PARTNER ACS processor module One PARTNER ACS processor module Two 206 modules Four 206 modules Two 400 modules Total 15 lines 20 extensions Total 32 extensions 11 lines NOTE If you want to install a PARTNER MAIL VS module keep in mind that it will require one of the slots in the carrier Overview 1 5 Telephones System Telephones This guide refers to Lucent Technologies telephones specifically designed to work with the system as system phones These include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 and PARTNER 6 telephones You can also use MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 and the TransTalk M 9000 series wireless phones including MDW 9000 MDW 9010 and MDW 9030P Pocketphone although they are not discussed in this guide For information about an MLS model MLC model or TransTalk 9000 series phone refer to the documentation that came with the phone System phones have several buttons in common volume control buttons and the Feature Conf Transit Hold Mic HFAI and buttons In addition each phone has programmable buttons that can be used for outside lines extension numbers outside phone numbers or system features Outside lines as well as some system features require buttons with status lights Programmable buttons without lines assigned to them can be programmed with numbers or features so you can u
72. Volume setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 1 4 at extension 10 or 11 The display shows the current setting 2 Tochange the setting press the number of the setting on the dialpad or press Next Data or Prev Data until the correct setting is displayed 3 If you want to return the volume to the default setting press Remove Music On Hold Volume 614 5 131 Night Service Button 503 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is on all lines assigned to the phones of the users in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of their normal Line Ringing settings Night Service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours Related Features Night Service affects only the extensions identified using Night Service Group Extensions 504 If you program a System Password 403 the password must be entered when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Jand Markec without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Pas
73. When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the system Recall feature instead On a system phone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring BEEP until the originator hangs up then it changes to a transfer ring ring BEEP BEEP On a standard phone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring ring until the originator hangs up then it changes to a transfer ring ring ring ring How to Transfer a Call System Phone To pass a call to another extension 1 While active on the call press Tansir The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone The green light next to the line button winks 2 Dial the extension number or and a Hunt Group number or 7 and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred 3 When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing after Step 2 above If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller Transferring Calls 5 185 m Tomake a voice signaled transfer to a system phone in Step 2 of the procedure on the previous page press x plus the two digit extension number Th
74. X the fax machine extension To send a fax transmission simply lift the handset on the fax machine an outside line will be automatically selected To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension X Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to line A B C 2 3 Set Line Ringing for all lines on extension X to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned 5 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 Tomonitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 17 Send and Receive Fax Machines If your business has high volume fax traffic you can set up two fax machines one that only sends and the other that only receives For example in Figure 4 10 fax 1 is the send machine fax 2 is the receive machine Line A is the fax line the number of which is published as the fax number If fax 2 doesnt answer line A fax 1 will Fax Line A Figure 4 10 Send and Receive Fax Machines To Use When you send a fax an outside line will be automatically selected Incoming fax calls on the fax line are an
75. a 5 Slot carrier move the On Off switch to the On position I m If you have a Stand Alone PARTNER ACS processor module configuration or a 2 Slot carrier plug the power cord into the power jack Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 2 at extension 10 or 11 The top line of the display shows Sys Set Restore orSystem Settings Restore If no PC Cara is present in the PARTNER ACS processor module the error message Insert Valid Card is displayed Repeat this procedure from Step 1 inserting a Backup Hestore PC Card at Step 2 You must power down the system before removing or inserting a Backup Restore PC Card You are prompted to choose the backup file you want to use for the restore The bottom line of the display shows 1 MAN mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the manual backup on this card To change to the file created by an automatic backup press 2 The bottom line of the display shows 2 AUTO mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the automatic backup on this card NOTE If the date of the file AUTO mmadyy or MAN mmddyy indicates that this is not the file you intended to use repeat this procedure from Step 1 and insert a different Backup Restore PC Card in Step 2 You must power down the system before removing or inserting a Backup Restore PC Card If the Backup Restore PC Card is fresh from the factory and no backups have been recorded on it yet the filenam
76. a call m Press the line button next to the steady red light and lift the handset or m Lift the handset and press 6 8 and the two digit line number The red and green lights alternately flash You are now joined with the call Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 8 and the number of the line on which the call is being conducted Joining Calls 5 105 Last Number Redial F05 Description This feature redials the last outside number dialed maximum 28 digits It is useful for immediately redialing a busy number Related Features m You can use Save Number Redial to temporarily save the last number dialed The difference between Last Number Redial and Save Number Redial is that Save Number Redial allows you to make other outside calls before redialing the saved number m System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be redialed with this feature m A Last Number Redial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting Considerations m This feature redials all digits dialed on the last outside call except account codes m You can program a Last Number Redial button on a system phone to redial a number with one touch Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Last Number Redial
77. adjusting contrast extension name 5 76 5 77 features 5 64 5 65 Display Language 303 for programming for receptionist 2 21 Distinctive Ring amp 308 5 67 1 1 1 Do Not Disturb description 5 68 lightpatterms 3 4 Doorphones descripion 4 1 1 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 5 70 lt Doorphone Extensions 604 605 5 7145 72 programming for 5 72 Drop Conference 5 50 Dropping parties from a conference call DSS see Aulo Dial buttonslana Display phone poi o e E Electrical specifications A 2 sd Electromagnetic Interference filter 4 3B 6 lt lt Emergency Phone Number List 406 5 EMI see Electromagnetic Interference filter Environmental requirements A 3 AS Exclusive Hold 5 75 Extension adding a6 E38 combination programming 2 4 2 5 5 55 from 2 pi bee par programming receptionist 2 21 restricting access to a line restricting outside dialing 2 10 sss swapping 2 6 1 1 1 transfer return 5 181 5 182 1 1 1 Extension 10 11 button locations for programming 2 17 E button location illustrations 2 18 E 2 1 E 3 programming from 2 1 2 24 programming overlays using with programming overlays illustration Extension Name Display 5 7615 77 Extension Programming 2 1 2 2512 26 Extension Transfer Return 306 5 18145 182 Externa
78. also Programmable button Auto Attendant An optional device that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement Automated Attendant Service A voice messaging system feature that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement See also Auto Attendant and Voice Auxiliary equipment Telecommunications equipment other than system phones that can be connected to the control unit Auxiliary equipment includes industry standard devices that can connect directly to the public telephone network such as standard phones or fax machines as well as devices that require the interface provided by the control unit such as a loudspeaker paging system Background Music A feature that provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user s work area Background Music plays the pre recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source Backup The system and telephone programming settings can be saved on a Backup Restore PC Card using either of two features Backup Programming Automatic 123 or Backup Programming Manual 4124 Backup Restore PC Card A Lucent Technologies proprietary PC Card that is used like a floppy disk to back up system and telephone programming settings and to restore these settings if they become corrupted This card must be inserted in the PARTNER
79. and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove m To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2 Select another procedure using Wext Procedure or Prev Procedure or exit programming mode Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 5 63 Display Description PARTNER model display phones have a 2 line 24 character per line adjustable display area for calling and programming feedback Specifically the display shows Current date excluding year day and time when the phone is idle Account code as it is entered Number dialed when making a call Duration of call call timer Number and name if programmed of the extension calling when receiving an intercom call or transferred call Number and name if programmed of the extension returning a transferred call when no one answers at the destination extension Automated Attendant Or Voice Messaging System when a call is transferred from an auto attendant or the voice messaging system Transfer from Auto Att or Transfer from VMS if a callis returning to your extension after an unsuccessful transfer by an auto attendant or the voice messaging system Caller ID number or name of calling party if applicable Forward xx xxon the display of users forwarding their calls the first xx represents the number of the user s extension the second xx represents the number of the destin
80. and labor on covered repairs Both Business Day and Around the Clock coverages of varying lengths are available To order a post warranty service contract call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you leased your system under a Term Plan from Lucent Technologies Business Day service is included in your lease To upgrade to Around the Clock service call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Lucent Technologies warrants to you the customer that your system will be in good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Date If you notify Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good working order Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis If Lucent Technologies determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced Lucent Technologies will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the
81. answer calls before they go to the Automated Attendant Service Related Features m You must use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign lines to Hunt Group 7 m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 Valid Entries 12 Immediate v 2 Delayed Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant service 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 5 0 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS Hunt Delay 506 5 191 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure determines whether the outside lines assigned to Hunt Group 7 hunt through the VMS Hunt Group all the time only during Day operation Night Service is off or only during Night operation Night Service is on This feature affects only the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system Related Features m You must use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign lines to Hunt Group 7 m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions asso
82. at an extension are reset to the default settings For example if an extension has calls forwarded to another extension resetting the system turns off Call Forwarding if the feature is programmed on a button with lights the reset also turns off the light for the Call Forwarding button m A successful use of Restore Programming 41125 causes a System Reset Programming Saved 728 to occur m The information stored in the Save Number Redial F04 and the Last Number Redial F05 buffers is lost when a System Reset Programming Saved 728 occurs Considerations Resetting the system disconnects all active calls This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly The system reset begins immediately and takes only a few seconds You cannot interrupt the reset process or use any telephones in the system during the reset process All of the system and telephone programming settings that were in effect before the power failure or down period are retained except those mentioned in the Related Features section above they do not revert to the default settings System Reset Programming Saved 728 5 173 Using See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To reset the system press Feature 0 O System Program System Program
83. auto attendant Make sure that the unit is in backup call answering mode When callers call the main number for your company the receptionist normally picks up the call If the receptionist is busy the auto attendant answers and plays a recorded message such as Please hold for the receptionist or dial an extension number now To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the auto attendant to cover Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Delayed Ring Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Use AA Extensions 607 to identify extension X as the auto attendant Set Transfer Return Extension 306 for extension X to extension 10 oa fF WwW DN Set the auto attendant to pick up within a specific number of rings so if the receptionist does not pick up a call the auto attendant will 4 8 Using Auxiliary Equipment Call Reporting Devices SMDR SMDR Station Message Detail Recording is a call reporting feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting information provides you with the ability to m Detect any unauthorized calls m Bill clients or projects m Bill back by department m Reduce telephone costs by identifying the need to change telecommunications services like adding a WATS line for calls to a particular area code m Print Caller ID information Call reporting information is recorded aft
84. before it is sent to a user s voice mailbox Related Features m VMS Cover also applies to lines that have been designated an owner with Line Coverage Extension 208 m lf an extension has VMS Cover jor Automatic VMS Cover 310 active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings Valid Entries 1 9 3 vo Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the number of times calls ring before being sent to the voice messaging system t Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 1 1 7 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter a setting 1 9 For example to set VMS Cover Rings to 4 press Next Data or Prev Data until a display similar to the following appears VMS Cover Rings 4 Rings 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 190 VMS Cover Rings 117 VMS Hunt Delay 506 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure determines when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system You can set the system for either immediate call handling after the second ring or delayed call handling after the fourth ring Delayed call handling gives the receptionist an opportunity to
85. both try to pick up the same call For example set answering machine 1 to 4 rings and answering machine 2 to 6 rings If you cannot adjust the two answering machines to answer on a different number of rings assign some lines to Immediate Ring at extension X and other lines to Immediate Ring at extension Y 4 6 Using Auxiliary Equipment Personal Answering Machine A personal answering machine is used to answer all the calls that ring ata certain extension Figure 4 3 It is useful for the following situations When you do not want to dedicate an extension to an answering machine When the extension receives a lot of intercom calls When outside calls come through a receptionist and are transferred to the extension When an extension has a private line Figure 4 3 Personal Answering Machine To Use Go to the machine to manually retrieve messages From any system extension make an intercom call to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code From outside the system call in and have someone transfer you to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code Or call in when no one will answer before the answering machine does To Program 1 Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to the desired ring Immediate Delayed or No Ring If the lines assigned to extension X are also assigned to other extensions adjust the answering m
86. comes in on a line that is assigned to that user s phone Line assignments for extensions in the Night Service group can vary from one extension to another Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group AW Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change a Night Service Group assignment 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 13 press 1 3 3 Toassign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays 4 To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev ttem until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Night Service Group Extensions 504 5 135 Number of Lines 104 Description This feature should be used only for initial system setup This System Programming procedure determines the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions This number does not have to match the actual number of lines connected at the control unit Related Features Do not use this procedure if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access
87. dialing restrictions if a user has access to an outside line to place the call If Forced Account Code Entry is programmed for an extension the user must enter an account code before accessing an outside line If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List the entered account code must match an entry on that list Programming 2 9 Controlling Calls on Outside Lines When an extension is allowed access to an outside line you can use the following procedures to control calling Outgoing Call Restriction 401 defines the type of calls inside only local only or inside local and long distance that users can make from Outgoing Call Restriction Button all lines available at an extension 114 allows the receptionist at extension 10 to quickly change an extension s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 creates up to eight lists of numbers that cannot be dialed After creating Disallowed Phone Number Lists use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more lists to a specific extension Night Service with System Password 403 restricts users at extensions in the Night Service group from dialing outside phone numbers except Emergency numbers and Marked System Speed Dial numbers unless the password is entered first Table 2 2 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extensi on s dialing once it gets an outside line Table 2
88. does not answer intercom calls or transferred calls because it does not recognize the distinctive ringing pattern used by the system What to do Change the extension s setting for Distinctive Ring 308 to Not Active so the extension uses the same ringing for intercom and transferred calls as it does for outside calls m f the device works properly the problem is solved m lf the problem remains call the hotline Standard Device Does Not Dial Out Properly Possible Cause A standard device with autodialing such as a modem does not recognize the intercom dial tone generated by the system What to do Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone 309 for the extension to Machine so the system generates outside line dial tone for the extension m lf the device works properly the problem is solved m lf the problem remains call the hotline nthe continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 17 Problems with Automatic Backup Display Shows Backup Failed Insert Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card while trying to do an automatic backup What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system The bac
89. extension number and listen for one of the following responses m If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply m f you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response m If you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers 5 122 Making Calls Manual Signaling F13X X or F13 X X Description This feature applies only to PARTNER and MLS model phones This feature lets you program a button on your PARTNER or MLS model phone that you can use to signal a predetermined co worker s extension It typically is used by a receptionist to alert a user when the user is busy on another call You can use a Manual Signaling button to beep ring or voice signal the user at the target extension Related Features m Voice Interrupt on Busy 312 is an alternative feature that lets a user signal
90. extensions To cancel a scheduled wake up call 1 5 3 4 Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Press Repeat Steps 1 3 to cancel a scheduled wake up call for another extension Wake Up Service Button 115 5 199 Troubleshooting Contents Customer Self Service Center on the Internet When You Need Help Power Failure Operation Battery Replacement Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm Problems with System Phones m System Phone Does Not Ring m System Phone Does Not Work m Display Shows Only 16 Characters Per Line m Display Is Incorrect m Display Shows ReplaceSysBat W Power On or ChgBat W PowerOn at Extensions 10 and 11 m Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number m Priv Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information MECLLLLL LL Le Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information m Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display m Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly Problems with Standard Phones m Standard Phone Does Not Ring m Standard Phone Rings Back After Intercom Call with No One at Other End m Standard Phone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light Other Problems with Phones m Trouble Making Outside Calls m Calls are Answered Automatically m Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer Automatically Dialed Calls Beginning with Star Codes Are Misrouted Contents 6 ii Using the Re
91. for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Contact Closure button 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To activate a Contact Closure 1 Press the programmed button or press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 The green light is on steady 2 Ifthe Contact Closure Operation Type for that Contact Closure is set to Toggle repeat Step 1 to deactivate the Contact Closure The green light goes off Standard Phone To activate a Contact Closure 1 Pickup the handset to get an intercom dial tone Press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 If the Contact Closure Operation Type for that Contact Closure is set to Toggle repeat Steps 1 and 2 to deactivate the Contact Closure 5 52 Contact Closure F41 and F42 Contact Closure Group 612 Description The PARTNER ACS processor module has a jack to connect a Contact Closure Adjunct that has two Contact Closures This System Programming procedure allows you to specify which user extensions can activate each Contact
92. from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 3 Press System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering System Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 4 4 Press again A display similar to the following appears SYSTEM PROGRAM 5 Specify a programming procedure in one of two ways m Direct Method Dial the code for that procedure System Programming procedures in this guide are identified by a and a three digit code for example System Date is 101 This method is best when you are using only a few procedures during a programming session and you know the codes m Cycle Method Cycle through the procedures in numerical order Press Next Procedure and Prev Procedure to cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures This method is best when you are using multiple procedures during a programming session or if you do not know the codes 6 Toexit programming mode you can press or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle NOTE You can talk on the phone while you program This is useful if you call for support while programming However you must call before you enter programming mode and you must use the handset to talk not the speaker and microphone Programming 2 17 PARTNER 34D Phone
93. have a standard phone connected to any of these extensions During a power failure standard phones can only make and receive calls other system features are not available The system can stay programmed for a minimum of 45 days and a maximum of six months after it stops receiving power depending on the freshness of the batteries When the batteries are drained all of the system s programmed settings return to the factory settings It is recommended that you install fresh batteries every year See Battery Replacement in this chapter for more information 6 2 Troubleshooting Battery Replacement IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power or remove the processor module before replacing the batteries If you do all settings for system and telephone programming will revert to the default settings If you have a Backup Restore PC Card it is highly recommended that you do a backup before changing the batteries The PARTNER ACS processor module uses two user replaceable AAA alkaline batteries These batteries provide enough power to retain the system programming settings during a power failure for 45 days to six months depending on the freshness of the batteries When battery power is getting low the system displays a ChgBat W PowerOn or ReplaceSysBat W Power On message on the top line of display phones at extensions 10 and 11 in place of the default day date time message Users at these extensions should be instructed to notify you wh
94. in the Automatic Line Selection sequence If you want to change the order use Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming IMPORTANT Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing lines back to factory settings To add a new line without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 Adding New Extensions If you add an extension to your system you can probably use Copy Settings 399 to copy the settings of an existing extension If you wish to further adjust a new extension s settings see Customizing Extensions earlier in this chapter Swapping Extensions If a user changes location but wants to keep the same extension number you can make the change easily by changing the connection at the control unit For example if the users at extensions 29 and 32 switch offices you can disconnect the modular plugs from those extension jacks in the control unit Then reconnect the plug from 32 into extension jack 29 and the plug from 29 into extension jack 32 Now the users can take their respective phones to their new locations keep the same extension numbers and retain the phones programmed settings 2 6 Programming Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services This section applies only if you use PBX or Centrex servic
95. information for that call However If you want to view Caller ID information for a second call without ending the active call or putting it on hold use DJ If you are not active on a call you can press line buttons to view Caller ID information for those lines however keep in mind that if you pick up the handset you will join or answer the call shown on the display In some regions users will have the option to subscribe to the name service for Caller ID This service allows the user to have a name and or number associated with Caller ID information If you want access to the name you can program Caller ID Name Display onto a button with lights This allows users to toggle between the Name and Number for an incoming call Caller ID information does not display for extensions active on Conference If users receive a call routed to their extension by a PARTNER voice messaging system or an auto attendant the Caller ID information is passed to their extensions when they answer the call If users Transfer a call the Caller ID information is passed to the destination extension Caller ID 5 39 Caller ID information is displayed if you Joinja call however you cannot join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated Caller ID information is displayed if users pick up calls with Pickup Active Line Call Pickup or Group Pickup but the restrictions stated previously apply For incoming calls Caller ID info
96. inside and local calls only allowing calls within the PBX or Centrex system and local calls outside the PBX or Centrex system However if users in your system use a dial out code 9 on most PBX or Centrex systems before dialing numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system the equipment will not be able to prevent toll calls for extensions restricted to inside and local calls only unless you use Disallowed Phone Number Lists to prevent dialing to specific classes of numbers If your PBX or Centrex system includes dialing restrictions use those instead of the equipment restrictions If you have PBX or Centrex dialing restrictions on a line and also program equipment restrictions both the PBX or Centrex system and equipment restrictions apply However equipment dialing permissions will not override PBX or Centrex system restrictions Speed Dial and Auto Dial Numbers When you program numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system as Speed Dial and Auto Dial numbers include the PBX or Centrex system dial out code 9 on most systems followed by one or more pauses in the stored number Programming 2 7 System Programming Options This section discusses programming options that involve multiple procedures such as dialing restrictions and auxiliary equipment settings as well as features that can be used throughout your system such as Speed Dialing You can use a combination of programming procedures to set up your system to operate
97. instead Dial Tones Standard phones have two different dial tones m Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line m Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two dial tones lift the handset The dial tone you hear assuming the phone is set to select intercom first as recommended in this guide is an intercom dial tone To hear an outside dial tone press 9 Using the Switchhook Some of the call handling instructions in this guide direct you to rapidly press and release the switchhook Pressing the switchhook for 1 4 to 1 second sends a signal over the line called a switchhook flash However do not press the switchhook too quickly If you press the switchhook and nothing happens try again and press it a ittle longer NOTE If your feature phone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use the button instead of pressing the switchhook If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines your PBX or Centrex documentation may tell you to press the switchhook to access PBX or Centrex features Use the Recall feature instead see Recall in Chapter 5 Limitations Each standard device requires one touch tone receiver to be available in order to dial a call intercom or outside or
98. intercom and local Only PRESS to program another extension TOLL CALL PREFIX DIAL 402 DIAL 1 0 1 plus Area Code and Number 2 Area Code and Number Only p 5 179 SYSTEM PASSWORD DIAL 403 DIAL four digits to set the password p 5 171 PRESS to enter programming mode PRESS DISALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS p 5 61 DIAL 404 DIAL a list number 1 8 DIAL a list entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS PRESS to remove a list entry PRESS to program another list entry To program another list PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new list number and repeat above steps DISALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS DIAL 405 p 5 60 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL a list number 1 8 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to assign another list To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS 0 TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE DIAL and three digit procedure code Example for System Date Dialing Restrictions and Permissions TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESS Next Proce
99. it either two standard devices or a system phone and a standard device but not two system phones For instructions on how to install a combination extension see the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide The following are examples of useful combination extensions m System phone plus standard telephone for power failure backup on extensions 10 11 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 and 37 m System phone plus answering machine m System phone plus fax machine m System phone plus headset m System phone plus an external alert such as a bell or chime The telephones in a combination extension share a single extension in the same way several home telephones share a single line A system telephone works as it always does and a standard telephone works as it always does when connected to the system Only one phone or device can be used at a time unless you want to join the two on a single call the same way two people can pick up the same call on different telephones at home For example m Both phones share the same extension number m Both phones share the same voice path that is when either phone is busy the extension is busy m Calls ring at both phones m Asecond call can ring at the system phone while the standard phone is busy but do not use the system phone to answer the second call until the standard phone is idle or the first call will be disconnected m f you make a voice signaled intercom call t
100. m Chapter 4 provides information about using auto attendants with the system m On system display phones AA or Automated Attendant displays when a call is being transferred from an auto attendant Transfer from AA Or Transfer from Auto Att displays when a call transferred by an auto attendant was not answered and is being returned to your extension Valid Entries 1 2 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify an extension where an auto attendant is installed 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 6 O 7 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the extension number to which the auto attendant is connected For example to select extension 27 press 2 3 Toassign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays 4 Toassign or unassign a second auto attendant extension press or until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 4 AA Extensions 607 Abbreviated Ringing 305 Description This feature applies only to system phones This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates Abbreviated Ringing at the system phone at a specific extension When a user is on a call and Abbreviated Ringing is Active any incoming call rings only
101. m To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove m To add other phone numbers to this list press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m To create another list press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and go to Step 2 7 Select another procedure using Wext Procedure or Prev Procedure or exit programming mode Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 5 11 Answering Calls Description This section describes how users can answer calls ringing at their own extensions Additional features enable users to pick up calls at other extensions see Related Features below Related Features m A user can join a call in progress at another extension as long as Privacylis not on for that extension see Joining Calls m A user can answer a call ringing at another specific extension or at an extension in a group For more information see Call Pickup and Group m A user can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to answer calls on lines not assigned to the user s phone m A user can program the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back feature on a button with lights to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call Also see Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 m You can use Call Waiting 316 to specify standard phone extensions that can receive a call waiting tone and a second incoming call Considerations m There are several ways to access a line for answering calls On either a system phone or a standard phone lift
102. m Voice Messaging Systems 4 24 5 Feature Reference 5 i 64 m Problems with Standard Phones 6 11 m Other Problems with Phones 6 13 6 Troubleshooting m Problems with Combination Extensions 6 16 ii Contents A Specifications A 1 B Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information B 1 eo Q FCC and IC Information Speed Dial Form D E Programming Mixed Telephone Types L Glossary GL 1 md 1 mer N Index N Programming Quick References iii About This Guide Purpose This guide is intended for the System Manager It explains what the PARTNER Advanced Communications System ACS can do provides instructions for programming and using the system and tells how to get the most out of the system s many features and capabilities Terminology Throughout this guide the PARTNER Advanced Communications System is referred to simply as the system and Lucent Technologies telephones specifically designed to work with the system are called system phones You can also use industry standard telephones with the system which are referred to as standard phones in this guide Finally the PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER MAILS Voice Messaging System which you may have connected to the system is referred to as the voice messaging system How to Use This Guide For information about the following topics refer to the appropriate chapter m Getting Acquainted
103. meet individual users needs Individual telephones can be programmed either from extension 10 or 11 Centralized Telephone Programming or from a user s extension using a system phone Extension Programming A system display phone is required for System and Centralized Telephone Programming If you have any 34 button phones in the system you must use a 34 button display phone to program since an18 button phone cannot be used to program a 34 button phone Also if your system has both PARTNER model and MLS model phones it is recommended that you use a PARTNER model display phone at the programming extension The system permits programming from a remote location using a Remote Administration Unit see later in this chapter This chapter provides general information about programming procedures When a specific feature name is used it is printed in bold type For detailed descriptions and step by step instructions refer to that name in Chapter 5 A Programming Quick Referencelis provided at the end of this book Programming 2 1 Hardware Considerations Programming procedures use line and extension numbers The line number represents the line jack on a 206 or 400 module or an ACS processor module to which the outside line is connected Similarly the extension number represents the extension jack on a 206 module or an ACS processor module to which the system phone or standard device is connected For each 206 module th
104. msec 09 450msec wv 10 500 msec 11 550 msec 12 600 msec Hold Disconnect Time 203 5 97 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the hold disconnect time 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 2 3 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Line prompt enter the two digit number of the line or which you are adjusting the hold disconnect time For example to adjust line 1 press 0 1 The current hold disconnect time for the line number you specified is displayed For example if line 1 is set to the default setting 09 450 msec shows in the display 3 Tochange the hold disconnect time press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program the next line press Next item then repeat Step 3 Repeat Step 4 for each line in the system Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 98 Hold Disconnect Time 203 Hotline 603 Description This System Programming procedure identifies an internal hotline extension and its alert extension When a user lifts the handset of the hotline phone the alert extension rings You can set up several hotline and alert extension pairs The alert extension can be the same or different for multiple hotline extensions We recommend using a standard phone as the hotline phone since this featu
105. on indicating that the phone will not ring Use this feature when you do not want the auto attendant or the voice messaging system to transfer calls to you Use this feature if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so calls to the Hunt Group will skip your extension and ring immediately at the next available extension in the group To avoid missing calls when this feature is not needed turn it off If Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not Disturb active will ring at that extension if they transfer return Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Do Not Disturb button 1 a fF wn Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press 0 1 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 68 Do Not Disturb FO1 Using From a system phone press the programmed button to turn Do Not Disturb on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Do Not Disturb is on Do Not Dis
106. only be retrieved from your extension Caller ID Inspect is on a Wake Up Service call is being scheduled from extension 10 A call transferred to the extension programmed on the button is now returning to your phone or you are being manually signaled by the extension Red Broken Flutter ee EH IH 0138 mm short on off long off Fax Management only the fax extension is not answering calls may be out of paper Applies to Caller ID Name Display Do Not Disturb Night Service Outgoing Call Restriction Button Privacy Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back and VMS Cover all of which require Tie EUM on a button with lights Can also apply to Account Code Entry Background Music and Call Forwarding Call Follow Me if any of them are programmed on a button with lights For more information about programming these features see Chapter 5 3 4 Learning About Telephones Ringing Patterns System phones have these ringing patterns m An outside call will ring ring ring m An intercom call will ring BEEP ring BEEP ring BEEP If you have a system display phone the caller s extension number and name if programmed will show on the display m Atransferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back at your extension will ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive
107. only from their own extension Placing a call on Exclusive Hold also prevents other users from accessing Caller ID information for the held call m Use Call Park to put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any phone in the system This type of hold allows the user to retrieve a call without having to know which line the call is on m Callers on hold hear Music On Hold 602 jonly if it is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module m Standard phone users can put a call on hold to retrieve a second call provided Call Waiting 316 is programmed for their extensions Considerations m For system phones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up m Only one party on an intercom call can put the call on hold If both parties try to put the call on hold the call is disconnected m f you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call hold feature that lets you place a call on hold and place another call on the same line For more information see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead m Hold acts differently on feature phones standard pho
108. or 11 e 2 doorphones using two extension jacks e 1 voice messaging system PARTNER MAIL VS which uses a slot in the 2 or 5 Slot carrier or PARTNER MAIL which connects to either 3 or 5 extension jacks Dimensions Processor Module 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 4 5 Ibs or 2 kgs and Weights e 206 module 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 4 5 lbs or 2 0 kgs approx e 400 module 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 4 0 lbs or 1 8 kgs e 2 Slot carrier 2 D x 9 75 H x 5 5 W or 5 1 x 24 8 x 14 cm 1 0 Ibs or 46 kgs e 5 Slot carrier pr x 19 H x 11 W or 30 5 x 48 3 x 27 9 cm 5 5 Ibs or 2 5 kgs e PARTNER 34D phone 8 D x 3 75 H x 9 3 W or 24 9x 9 5 x 23 6cm 27 lbs or 1 2 kgs e PARTNER 18D phone 8 D x 3 75 H x 7 9 W or 24 9x 89 5 x20 1cm 2 4lbs or 1 1 kgs e PARTNER 18 phone 8 D x 3 75 H x 7 9 W or 24 9x 9 5 x20 1cm 2 3 lbs or 1 0 kgs e PARTNER 6 phone 8 D x 3 75 H x 6 1 W or 24 9x9 5x15 5cm 1 9 lbs or 0 9 kgs e PARTNER CA48 8 D x 3 75 H x 6 1 W or 24 9x9 5x15 5cm 1 5 lbs or 0 7 kgs Specifications A 1 Switch Fabric e Full digital nonblocking Electrical e 45 Watts 154 BTUs hr per ACS processor module during normal power consumption Specifications e 85 Watts 290 BTUs hr per ACS processor module during maximum power consumption e 10 Watts 35 BTUs hr per 400 module normal and maximum power consumption e 35 Watts 120 BTUs hr per 20
109. originator s voice This feature typically is used by the receptionist to alert the boss to an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call Related Features m Making Callsjand Transferring Calls provide more instructions for making and transferring voice interrupt on busy calls m The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back button to respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The recipient s response will not be heard by the third party m Users cannot receive voice interrupt on busy calls if Do Not Disturb is active at their extension They are part of a joined call Joining Calls They are part of a Conference Call Considerations m The voice interrupt on busy tone two beeps is unique to distinguish it from a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep m lf a voice interrupt on busy call is made to an idle extension the originator and the recipient hear a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep instead m f you receive a voice interrupt on busy call and press Hold the third party is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have ended the voice interrupt on busy call At this point To talk to the originator if the green light next to the button is flashing press Intercom You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button once a voice interrupt on busy call has ended Toresume your conversation
110. per doorphone DIAL AA EXTENSIONS DIAL 607 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to assign another extension SMDR RECORD TYPE p 5 159 DIAL 608 DIAL 1 All calls v 2 Outgoing calls only SMDR OUTPUT FORMAT DIAL 610 p 5 158 DIAL 1 15 digits V 2 24 digits DIAL 612 p 5 53 DIAL a group number 1 or 2 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v CONTACT CLOSURE OPERATION TYPE DIAL 613 DIAL aContact Closure 1 or 2 DIAL 1 1 Second On 2 3 Seconds On V 3 5 Seconds On MUSIC ON HOLD VOLUME DIAL 614 p 5 131 DIAL a mm ERBEN EERE EEHEHE EEHEEHE EEEEEEE V Nooukhon
111. phone rapidly press and release the switchhook to place the call on hold then dial the fax extension number and hang up m If you have multiple fax machines in an extension Hunt Group press rranst then plus the fax extension Hunt Group number When a fax machine answers hang up Setting Up Fax Machines There are many ways to set up fax machines The following configurations are basic and easy to use m Single fax machine Good for light or moderate fax traffic This basic setup uses a published fax number n Good for light fax traffic with no need for a published fax number m Send and receive fax machines Good for high volume fax traffic One machine sends the other receives You can install both a telephone and a fax machine on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide This lets you receive both voice and fax calls on the same line but not at the same time If you pick up the phone and hear a fax signal push the Start button on your fax machine and then hang up If you are using the PARTNER MAIL system s Automated Attendant Service you can program PARTNER MAIL to transfer fax calls to the fax extension or a group of fax extensions automatically Use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 15 fax extensions If you have multiple fax machines put all of the fax extensions into a single Hun
112. press 3 A display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Wake Up Service to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Using To schedule a wake up call for a specific extension 1 Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 The green light next to the Wake Up Service button flutters Wake Up Service is activated and the display reads Wake Up Call 2 Dialthe two digit extension number of the desired extension or use an Auto Dial button For example to schedule a wake up call for extension 32 press 3 2 A display similar to the following appears Wake Up Call 32 5 198 Wake Up Service Button 115 Enter the wake up time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press When you have finished entering the time the display reads Wake Up Call 32 14 15 The wake up call is scheduled and the green light next to the Wake Up Service button turns off To review a scheduled wake up time for a specific extension 1 Ow ap NS Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Review the displayed wake up time and target extension number Press the Wake Up Service button to exit Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to review wake up times for other
113. press Intercom x The display reads Intercom 20 Feature Code Enter the appropriate code For example to program a button to turn on the message light at extension 20 press 0 9 When you press the programmed button the Message Light at extension 20 turns on Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program an Auto Dial button 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button Enter an outside phone number feature code account code or PBX Centrex feature access code or press left and enter an extension number Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to program additional Auto Dial buttons or exit programming mode 5 16 Auto Dialing Using From a system phone to dial an outside number or extension number you can lift the handset or press Sp but you do not have to do so 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and dial the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the lights next to Sekr and Mic HFAI go on and you are active on the speakerphone 2 Pressthe Auto Dial button on which the outside number or extension number is programmed The system automatically selects a line if you did not
114. s Outgoing Call Restriction setting through System Programming if you prefer m You must use an Auto Dial button with lights to designate the extension you want to change after you press the Outgoing Call Restriction button It is recommended that you use an Auto Dial button on the PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer However you can use an intercom Auto Dial button on the system phone at extension 10 provided the button has lights For information about programming Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing Considerations m An Outgoing Call Restriction button must be programmed on the system phone at extension 10 m Outgoing Call Restriction must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not work if it is programmed on a button without lights m The system considers extension 10 busy while you are using the Outgoing Call Restriction button and the phone acts as if it is in System Programming mode You cannot use other features or handle calls at extension 10 until you are through using the feature m You cannot use the Outgoing Call Restriction button to change an extension s setting while extension 11 is in System Programming mode Valid Entries 1 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select button then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 5 139 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapte
115. services for example in some areas you can dial 67 to prevent Caller ID information from being sent to the called party Rotary phones use 11 in place of the Star Code Dial Delay 410 is designed to help prevent misdialing when star codes are used For information about the star codes that your Central Office supports contact your local phone company Restriction Resetting If Star Code Dial Delay is Not Active the system uses the normal processing of restricted numbers it checks digit by digit to see whether the number is restricted If the first digit dialed is a and is not restricted the call goes through without further checking since it can no longer match any number on the list If Star Code Dial Delay is Active the system permits star codes that meet the Bellcore standard m 2 digit codes where the first digit is O 1 or 4 9 and the second digit is 0 9 for example 67 70 m 3 digit codes where the first digit is 2 or 3 the second digit is 0 9 and the third digit is 0 9 for example 210 Therefore when Star Code Dial Delay is Active the system resets dialing restrictions after leading star codes The system checks the first two digits dialed If the first digit is a or the first two digits are 11 the system then checks whether the following two or three digits are a star code The digits that follow the star code are then compared again to the restrictions More than one star code can be dialed at th
116. settings changing 2 61 2 19 System Speed Dial numbers description 5 175 5 177 marking to override dial restrictions 2 11 b 175 star codes using with marked numbers 5 175 System Time 103 T Talk Back Technicalspecifications A 11A 4 Telephone company notification ea 2 Telephone programming atextension 2 25 12 26 Cd AutoDialbuttons 2 20 5 15 15 17 centrally at extension 100r 11 2 24 2 25 methods options 2 2042 22 Cid overview 2 1 2 20 S receptionist extension 2 21 2 22 111 speeddialing 2 19 Telephone usage reports Telephones see System phones and Standard phones Time System 4103 5 178 Timed flash Timer calll3 2 5 64 Toll Call Prefix 402 3 ee Toll restrictions see Dialing restrictions and permissions Touch onedial b 56 5 180 Touch Tone Enable programming feature on a button 5 180 programming function in phone number 5 161 using 5 161 5 180 IN 8 Index Touch tonereceiver3 9 3 10 A 1 Transfer button 3 2 5 184 5 186 Transfer return display message 5 185 1 Transfer Return Extension 306 f Transfer Return Rings 105 j 5 183 Transfer ringing 3 5 3 9 5 185 Cd Transfer one touch see Auto Dial numbers Transferring a call to a Calling Group 5 88 5 B9 toanotherextension 5 18415 186 1 111 tofaxmachine 4
117. settings are shown as the default display You can use Display Language 303 to identify the language in which messages appear if the extension has a system display phone Users can assign a name to their extension Then when that extension is used to make an intercom call group call or transferred call the name and extension number appear on the system display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call See Extension Name Display for more information Considerations The call timer records the time a user is active on a call It begins when the handset is lifted out of the cradle and ends when either the handset is placed back in the cradle or the call is placed on hold This is not the call duration reported to SMDR SMDR records the total time the call is in progress including the time a call is placed on hold For more information refer tof Call Reporting Devices SMDRn Chapter 4 When a call is transferred the timer restarts when the call is answered The call timer is displayed along with the default display Most messages other than the default display and Caller ID display for approximately 15 seconds Marked System Speed Dial numbers do not display when they are dialed The display contrast can be adjusted by pressing x then using the up volume control button to i
118. side of the control unit IC CS03 Issues 6 amp 7 Load Number 7 Loop start lines A 4 Specifications Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information Maintenance Your system is designed to provide trouble free performance without any special maintenance procedures To reduce the risk of accidental damage Keep the system modules in an area free of dust smoke and moisture and do not block the air vents by placing objects on top of the control unit Do not place telephones near a heating duct radiator or other heat source and do not drop or expose them to excessive shock or vibration Unplug the telephone if its cord is damaged if liquid is spilled into it or if its housing becomes cracked or otherwise damaged To clean your telephone wipe the outside housing with a soft dust free cloth If absolutely necessary you may use a cloth slightly dampened with a mild soap and water solution Dry quickly with a soft cloth CAUTION Your telephone contains sensitive electronic parts Never submerge it in any kind of liquid and never use detergents alcohols solvents abrasive cleaners or an excessive amount of water when cleaning the housing and faceplate To do so could result in irreparable damage Repair Information Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer for warranty and repair information applicable to your system Maintenance B
119. software upgrades System Components Modular hardware design makes the system easy to install and expand The basic system consists of a PARTNER ACS processor module which supports three lines and eight extensions Using these lines and extensions you can add various optional devices and telephones to configure your system to meet your needs To expand the system to include more lines and extensions simply attach additional modules and a carrier to contain them The term control unit is used to refer to the stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module or to the carrier and the modules it contains since this is the heart of the system 1 1 shows an example of system components A WARNING There are no customer serviceable components inside the system modules or carrier There are hazardous voltages within that can cause severe or fatal personal injury DO NOT OPEN THE MODULES The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Accordingly in order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives One way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP BMI and or similar performing rights organizations to obtain a license Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually Sample System Components 1 2 Overv
120. specify one turns on the speaker if you did not lift the handset and dials the Auto Dial number The number being dialed will show on a display phone To use an Auto Dial button programmed with a feature code or account code follow the directions for the feature you want to use Auto Dialing 5 17 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Description This System Programming procedure lets you prevent a user from joining an active call at an extension When Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned for an extension other users cannot join active calls at that extension This feature is typically used for standard phones and extensions connected to fax machines modems and credit card scanners which make and receive data calls that should not be interrupted This feature can provide the Privacy function for standard phones Related Features m To manually change an extension s Privacy state system phone users can program the Privacy feature on a button with lights Users can then press the Privacy button to activate the feature green light on or deactivate the feature green light off when they want someone to join a call at their extension If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the Privacy button to indicate that Privacy is currently active If this is the case and the Privacy button is pressed the feature is deactivated To activate Privacy again you
121. status 2 21 3 4 Internal Hotline see Internet Customer Self Service Center 6 1 ss IROB see In Range Out of Building protectors IN 4 Index J Jacks specifications A 2 O types per module 2 2 2 3 Joining a call 5 104 5 105 O L Labeling line and extension Eua system phones 2 Language Display 303 5 66 5 Last Number Redial 5 106 zZ Light patterns description of 3 4 Fax Management button 4 44 Intercom Auto Dial Button 2 21 3 4 Line adapter addingtosystem 2 6 1 O assigning to extensions 2 4 5 110 5 112 5 136 buttons 1 6 3 2 5 110 reserving 5 120 restricting use at individual extension 5 108 5 109 type 5 56 Line Access Restriction 302 Line Assignment 301 description 5 11015 112 _ _ O default on PARTNER phones Line Coverage Extension 208 5 113 5 114 lt Line ownership 5 113 Line pickup Line Ringina description 5 115 1 5 116 Caller ID information effect on display of 5 115 Line Selection Automatic 5 2015 21 Lines Number of 4 104 5 136 Lists allowed phone numbers 5 10 5 11 disallowed phone numbers 5 6115 63 emergency phone numbers 5 73 5 74 sd forced account codes 5 8315 84 sd Locking an extension Loudspeaker Paging 5 11715 118 5 156 5 157 4 2 Cs Loudspeaker Paging system 4 2
122. support Caller ID A privacy message Priv displays if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information If you use SMDR telephone numbers of incoming calls print on call reports after the call is completed Private and out of area numbers are reported as IN on call reports 5 40 Caller ID Caller ID Inspect F17 Description This feature allows a user who is active on a call to view Caller ID information for a second call without disconnecting the current call or putting it on hold Users can inspect ringing active or held calls Related Features m f you program a Caller ID Name Display button you can toggle between Caller ID name and Caller ID number while inspecting lines m Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information Considerations m This feature must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone m The user should make sure the green light next to the Caller ID Inspect button is fluttering before pressing a line button or else the call the user is active on is disconnected and the user is connected to the call on the line button that was pressed m The user can inspect outside calls that appear on intercom buttons If the call is an intercom call the default display is shown m lf users are not active on a call they can press line and intercom buttons to view Caller ID information for those lines however if they pick up the handset they will join or a
123. that extension Users can program the Auto Dial buttons for either intercom ringing voice signaling or manual signaling Note that each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system phone or on the autodialer for another extension in the system The Auto Dial buttons allow the user to dial signal or transfer calls to system extensions with one touch For more information about Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing Jin Chapter 5 Standard Telephones You can also use industry standard single line rotary or touch tone telephones including feature phones with built in feature buttons and lights with the system This guide refers to such telephones as standard phones Lucent Technologies certified standard phones are recommended The following Lucent Technologies phones can make use of the system s message waiting capability m 2500 YMGL Single Line Analog Telephone Set m 8101 Analog Telephone m 8101M Analog Telephone This model is recommended m 8102 Analog Telephone m 8110 Analog Telephone m 7102 Plus Analog Voice Terminal Check with your local Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out whether other standard phones with message waiting lights will work NOTE For message waiting capability you must connect standard phones with LED compatible message waiting lights to a PARTNER ACS processor module or to Release 3 1 R3 1 or later 206 modules This message waiting
124. the copyright owners or their representatives such as ASCAP or BMI The Magic on Hold system includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually m Background Music stops when a user makes or answers a call but resumes when the phone becomes idle again m fa system phone and a standard phone with a message waiting light are connected in a combination extension the standard phone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system phone m You an program a Background Music button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch A button with lights is recommended Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Background Music button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode a fF ON 5 24 Background Music F19 Using To turn Background Music on 1 Froma system phone with a speaker press the programmed button or press 9 If the phone is idle you hear Background Music If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns on 2 To adju
125. the speaker and microphone by pressing and hanging up the handset Conversely if you are using the speaker and microphone and want to switch to the handset lift the handset and the speaker and microphone will turn off Learning About Telephones 3 5 m To turn off the microphone when you are using the speaker press Mic HFA This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you m Use the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature to answer voice signaled calls without lifting the handset see below Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI When you receive a voice signaled intercom call your phone beeps once to indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically and you hear the caller s voice over your phone s speaker If you leave your microphone on all the time you can start talking when you hear the caller without lifting the handset This feature is called Hands Free Answer on Intercom Any user in the system can make a voice signaled call to an idle system phone by pressing then dialing an extension number or pressing an Auto Dial button programmed for voice signaling You can make a voice signaled call from either a system phone or a standard phone However if you try to make a voice signaled call to a standard phone or an MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone it will ring NOTES 1 The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your phone is idle Muting your voice while you are on a call on
126. the handset to answer a ringing call if more than one call is ringing at a system phone you get the call that has been ringing for the longest time On a system phone press a specific line or button You can also use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call by dialing 6 8 and the two digit line number Onastandard phone you can use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call on a specific line at intercom dial tone dial 6 8 and the two digit line number m For system phones and most standard phones the user can identify the type of call by the system s ringing patterns System display phones can also show in the display the type of call that is ringing at the extension See Ringing Patterns in Chapter 3 Note that there are no unique ringing patterns for forwarded calls 5 12 Answering Calls How to Answer Calls Ringing at Your Extension System Phone You can answer a call on any line that is ringing or select a specific line if more than one is ringing m When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call If more than one line is ringing you are connected to the line that has been ringing for the longest time If the call is an intercom call and you have a display phone the caller s extension number and name if programmed appear on your display until you pick up the handset or press Sek
127. the message light see Message Light Off You may be able to use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension See Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Considerations This feature turns on the message light on system phones and standard phones that have message lights See Standard Telephones jin Chapter 1 for a list of standard phones that have message lights For message waiting capability standard phones with LED compatible message waiting lights must be connected to a PARTNER ACS processor module or to an R3 1 or later 206 module in a system equipped with a PARTNER ACS processor module On a standard phone the message light flashes only when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns on the message light at a subscribers extension when a message is left in the mailbox If you use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use Message Light Off to turn the light off You can program a Message Light On button on a system phone to turn the message light on at a specific extension with one touch Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Message Light On button 1 Or dm o Oe Press Feature
128. the number of outside lines in the system that you want to assign to all extensions For example pressing 0 6 means that all extensions are assigned lines 1 through 6 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 136 Number of Lines 104 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension See Dialing Restrictions and in Chapter 2 for a summary of calling restrictions Related Features m This restriction also applies to lines that a user has access to with Direct Line Pickup ldle Line To override this feature users can dial Marked System Speed Dial and numbers from an Allowed Phone Number List 407 and Emergency Phone Number List 406 Also if a JSystem Password is defined MLS model system phone users can enter it to override restrictions the m You can program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to quickly change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting See Outgoing Call Restriction Button f 14 for information m You can use Line Access Restriction 302 to restrict extensions from making or receiving calls on specific lines and Disallowed Phone Number ists 4404 to specify telephone numbers that users cannot dial m f you program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 307 the user at that extension must ente
129. to the service if it is available from your local phone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules Caller ID Inspect A feature that allows you to view incoming Caller ID information on other lines while active on a call without placing the call on hold or hanging up Caller ID Name Number A feature that allows you to toggle between a caller s Caller ID name and Caller ID number Caller ID service A subscription service available from some local telephone companies providing the telephone number and or name of the caller on lines that have the service Calling Group A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously by dialing a group calling code See also Hunt Group Calling restriction A feature that lets you control telephone use at specific extensions Centralized Telephone Programming A method of telephone programming that lets you program individual extensions in the system from a system display phone at extension 10 or extension 11 Centralized Telephone Programming is an alternative to Extension Programming CO Line SeelLine Combination extension An extension that has two devices connected to it Combination extensions can connect two standard devices or a standard device and a system phone but not two system phones Contact Closure button A phone button that is programmed to activate one of the two Contact Closures on the Contact Closure Adjunct to control an auxiliar
130. unauthorized party for example persons other than your company s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services You are responsible for the security of your system There may bea risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system You are responsible for programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use Your system manager should read all documents provided with this product to fully understand the features that can introduce the risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance call the BCS National Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 Trademarks Magic on Hold MERLIN MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 PARTNER PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS PassageWay and SYSTIMAX are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies is a trademark of Lucent Technologies Bellcore is a registered trademark of Bell Communications Research Microsoft is a registered trademark and Windo
131. use Copy Settings 399 to program other phones of the same type For example you can program one PARTNER 18D phone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have PARTNER 18D or PARTNER 18 phones See Copy Settings 44399 in Chapter 5 for a list of the programmed settings that are copied Programming 2 5 Changing Settings after Installation As your business grows or changes you will probably need to change the way your system was originally programmed This section provides some examples and lists the procedures you would use to change settings after installation For specific details on a procedure refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5 Changing the System Clock You may need to change the system clock for daylight saving time after a prolonged power failure or after a system reset Use System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 to set the current date day and time Adding New Lines If you add an outside line to your system you may need to adjust some line settings In particular use Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line Line Assignment 301 to assign the line to specific extensions Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when the line will start ringing at each extension that has the line and Line Access Restriction 302 to limit an extension s access to the line Additionally the system automatically assigns the new line as the last line
132. with the third party press the line button next to the winking green light m Any party involved in a voice interrupt on busy call cannot be involved in a second voice interrupt on busy call until the first is finished Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 5 193 Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 NotAssigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Voice Interrupt On Busy setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 1 A at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature To assign or unassign Voice Interrupt On Busy press until the appropriate value displays 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Using To initiate a voice interrupt on busy call 1 From a system phone press Intercom Press x plus a two digit extension number or use an Auto Dial button Listen for one of the following responses m f you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply m f you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaki
133. 0 6 20 6 20 6 21 6 21 6 22 6 22 6 22 6 22 6 22 6 22 6 23 6 23 Contents System Problems 6 24 m Calls on Hold Are Disconnected 6 24 m Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect 6 24 m All Calls Disconnected 6 24 m All Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights 6 25 m Multiple Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights 6 25 m Poor Transmission Quality on Modem 6 26 Other Problems with System 6 26 6 iii Troubleshooting The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur possible causes for the difficulty and procedures you can follow to try to solve the problem Programming procedure names are shown in boldface type for more information about a specific procedure refer to the procedure name in Customer Self Service Center on the Internet If you can access the Internet you can use the Customer Self Service Center to get on line information such as m Answers to frequently asked questions m 800 number directory If you have a service agreement active lease or warranty you also can get on line information such as W Feature programming tips m Notification of changes to products m Product documentation m Chatservice The Internet address for the Customer Self Service Center is http www lucent com enterprise selfservice Troubleshooting 6 1 When You Need Help If you have a problem with your system you may be able to solve it by following the appropriate trou
134. 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 0 9 Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Message Light On FO9XX 5 127 Using System Phone To turn on the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press Q 9 If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes on Skip Step 2 2 If no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn on or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Standard Phone To turn on the message light 1 Lift the handset You hear the intercom dial tone 2 Press 9 3 Dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn on 5 128 Message Light On FO9XX Music On Hold 602 Description This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates the MUSIC ON HOLD jack on the processor module The jack must be active and an audio source must be connected to the jack in order to provide recorded music or messages to callers on hold Related Features m You can a
135. 1 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Pickup Group button 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button Press left 6 6 Group Pickup I66G 5 93 5 Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 6 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To use Group Pickup when programmed on a button press the programmed button To use manually 1 Liftthe handset and press Intercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Standard Phone To use Group Pickup 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group 5 94 Group Pickup 166G Hold Description This section explains how to place and retrieve calls on hold using either the button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone The user can make and receive other calls on another line while a call is on hold Related Features m System phone users can use Exclusive Hold to put calls on hold that can be retrieved
136. 10 Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning DO NOT use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning This product should be serviced by or taken to a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required DO NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement location DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart stand or table Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak The product is provided with a three wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the power supply cord to building surfaces CAUTION DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots and openings They prevent the produci from overheating DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided DO NOT place the product flat on a surface The control unit must be wall mounted SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Overview Fe
137. 15 sd Troubleshooting 6 116 26 1 1 2 Slot carrier configuration overview 1 4 maximum lines configuration illustration 2 2 lt maximum extensions configuration illustration 2 3 orderinginformation B 8 200module 1 4 B 6 1 1 O 200Emodule 1 4 B 6 206 module 1 3 1 4 2 2 A 1 B 6 1 206E module 1 4JA 1JB 6 i 206EC module 1T 4 A 1 B 6 i O 267F2 bridgingadapter A 3 B O EEE U Usage reports 4 10 4 4 11 5 158 5 160 V VMS seelVoice messagingsystem 1 description light patterns 3 4 15 190 VMS Hunt Delay 506 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Voice interrupt on busy call description 3 6 5 193 5 194 responding to aj 3 6 5 195 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back VMS Cover 5 113 1 5 114 5 188 1 5 189 3 4 VMS Cover Rings 117 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 5 193 5 194 description 5 195 example 4 24 4 25 overview 4 24 O Voice signaling 3 6 5 87 15 92 B30 Volume controls 3 3 W Wake Up Service Button 115 Warranty information B 2 B 4 Cd Wildcardcharacter b 61 5 83 Z o Z o Z o Wirngspecificatons A 3 1 Z Z300A see Electromagnetic Interference filter Index IN 9 FEEDBACK FORM System PARTNER Advanced Communications System Document Programming and Use Issue 1 Note to readers We welcome your feedback on this book and the
138. 2 22 O programming overlay 2 1512 16 Cd Password System 403 b 171 Pause programming function in phone number PC Cards 1 5 2 14 5 26 1 5 31 5 149 1 5 151 Index IN 5 PCMCIA card see PC Cards Permissions dialiIng 2 8 Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA card see PC Cards Personal Speed Dial numbers 2 20 5 142 5 143 Phones see Feature phones Standard phones and System phones Pickingupaheldcalll5 20 1 Pickup Call 5 Group 5 93 5 94 5 144 Cd Line 5 57 5 58 5 59 O Pickup Group Extensions 501 Placing a call Powercord B 6 Power failureJ3 8 6 2 Cd Printer see Station Message Detail Recording Privacy 5 18 5 145 description light patterns 3 4 Privacy Automatic Extension 304 5 18 Problems solving 6 1 6 26 Processor module descripion 1 3 t 4 2 2 ordering information B 6 specificationsJA 1 A 4 Cd Programmable buttons2 20 3 2 Programming see also and after installation auxiliary equipment 2 12 O pa 0S 2 20 2 21 sd call reporting 2 13 centralized telephone 2 1 2 24 2 25 sd changing typeJ2 19 J2 25 1 1 1 1 soa C ETETA e groups initial setup lines 2 Appeoa methods direct or cycle b 7 mixed telephonetypesJE 14E 3 mode 2 17 1 overlays 2 15 2 46 Csr oveview 2 1 0 PBX Centrex support for 2 7
139. 5 Slot carrier or the leftmost slot of the 2 Slot carrier PARTNER Model Telephones See System phones PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer See Intercom Autodialer Password A four digit code assigned by the System Manager that users can enter from a PARTNER or MLS model phone to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off See also Night PC Card A computer card that can be inserted in either of two PCMCIA slots on the PARTNER ACS processor module See also Backup Restore PC Card Pickup Group A group of extensions for which calls to any extension in the group can be picked up from any extension in the system by dialing a group pickup code Programmable button A telephone button that does not have a line assigned it can be set up to dial a number or access a feature Programming See Centralized Telephone Programming Extension Programming and System Programming Programming extension An extension from which you can program the System this can be either extension 10 or 11 Proprietary device A telephone or other device that is designed to work with a specific system and requires a special interface to connect to the public telephone network For example system phones are proprietary devices that can only be used with the control unit described in this guide See also Industry standard device R RAU Remote Administration Unit An auxiliary device that lets you perform syste
140. 6 module during normal power consumption e 75 Watts 256 BTUs hr per 206 module during maximum power consumption e U S Canada and other 110V countries ACS processor module and one 206 module 2 Slot carrier 2 3 Amps max current full system capacity ACS processor module and four 206 modules 5 Slot carrier 4 Amps max current full System capacity e Countries using 220 V ACS processor module and one 206 module 2 Slot carrier 2 1 2 Amps max current full system capacity ACS processor module and four 206 modules 5 Slot carrier 2 Amps max current full System capacity e 45 days to 6 months memory backup with 2 AAA size standard alkaline batteries IEC LRO3 Processor Module 68306 16 Mhz processor Specifications e 256Kbyte RAM e 512Kbyte FLASH ROM e Custom VLSI DSP ASIC 16 bit 52 Mhz VLSI Very Large Scale Integration DSP Digital Signal Processor ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit Extension Jack e Ringing voltage 5VDC 140 VDC peak to peak trapezoidal wave shaping Specifications e 35 to 38 Volt talk battery e Ringing frequency 20 Hz PAGE Jack e Draws current on inner wire pair Specifications e Provides paging contact closure on outer wire pair e 600 Ohm impedance MUSIC ON e Accepts 2 Volts at 50 Kohms maximum input HOLD Jack e 0 18 dB attenuation Specifications CONTACT e Operates up to 150 feet 45 72 meters from control unit using 24 gauge solid condu
141. 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 12 Troubleshooting Other Problems with Phones Trouble Making Outside Calls Trouble making outside calls could be one of the following m You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial m You hear a dial tone which cuts off when you dial but the line does not ring m You hear a busy signal as you dial m You hear nothing at all Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to the extension If itis enter a valid account code m f you can make a call the problem is solved m f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 8201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate m f you can make a call the problem is solved m If the Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting for the extension What to do If calls could be made without trouble before find out if someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction 401 for the extension m f someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m f no one
142. ACS processor module before you use the system s backup or restore features Backup Programming Automatic 123 Backup Programming Manual 124 or Restore Programming 125 See also PC Card C Call Answer Service A voice messaging system feature that lets callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or transfer themselves to another extension Call Assistant See Intercom Autodialer Call Park A feature that lets a user put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any extension in the system Call record A line of information on a call report that includes data fields such as call type date time called caller number and call duration See also Account code and Call report Call report A page of information that begins with a header and lists incoming and outgoing calls to and from your business on a call by call basis See also Call record and Call reporting Call reporting A feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting also is referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR Glossary GL 1 Call Waiting A feature that lets standard phone users receive notification of a second incoming call when they are busy on a call The user can press the switchhook to put the first call on hold and answer the second call Caller ID A feature that displays an incoming callers number or name on a system display phone To get Caller ID you must subscribe
143. ACS processor module Unplug the power cord from the power jack 2 Insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module 3 Turn on the system power by doing one of the following 5 Slot carrier Move the On Off switch to the On position I 2 Slot carrier or Stand Alone PARTNER ACS processor module Plug the power cord into the power jack 5 30 Backup Programming Manual 124 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX Description This feature forwards all intercom transferred and outside calls from a user s extension to another system extension where XX is an extension number from 10 41 Users can activate this feature from their own extension Call Forwarding or from any other extension in the system Call Follow Me Related Features If an extension in a Hunt Group 2505 Jactivates Call Forwarding the system considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt Group If an extension has VMS Coverjand Call Forwarding active calls ring at the Call Forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system Call Forwarding does not apply to parked calls See Call Park Considerations You can forward outside intercom and transferred calls You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt on Busy calls or transfer return calls Calls cannot be forwarded outside the system
144. C Card Display Shows System Busy in System Programming Mode Possible Cause An automatic or manual backup was in progress at the time you requested a manual backup What to do Exit the procedure and retry the manual backup after a few minutes 6 20 Troubleshooting Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the backup was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the PC Card and reapply power to the system Restart the Backup Programming Manual 124 procedure Possible Cause 2 The Backup Restore PC Card or the PARTNER ACS processor module is corrupted What to do Try the backup again using the backup procedure Backup Programming Manual 124 m lf the backup completes successfully the problem is solved m lf the backup fails again try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two different Backup Restore PC Cards Ifthe system will not write to either PC Card the processor module is probably corrupted call the hotline Ifthe system writes to one of the PC Cards the original PC Card is corrupted See Table B 1 in Appendix B for the information about ordering a new Backup Restore PC Card Display Shows Backup
145. Chapter 1 provides an overview of system features and hardware components m Programming the System You can change your system s settings easily to accommodate new or expanding needs Chapter 2 provides general programming information while Chapter 5 provides detailed instructions for programming specific system features m Training Co Workers Chapter 3 explains how system and standard phones work with the system To help train co workers on telephone basics you can share this information with them About This Guide v m Using Auxiliary Equipment The system supports a wide variety of auxiliary equipment including fax machines modems voice messaging systems and call reporting devices Chapter 4 provides advice on setting up these devices to work effectively with the system m Daily Operation Depending on how your system is set up you may need to oversee some of the system s daily operations For example you may need to turn on Night Service at the end of each day before leaving the office Reference information about all features including seal and instructions for using each feature is provided in Chapter 5 m Solving Problems Chapter 6 provides information about solving problems if your system or telephones malfunction Once you are experienced with the system use the Table of Contents or Index to locate the information you need Throughout this guide feature names are printed in bold for example Syst
146. Continue programming or exit programming mode Using 1 Lift the handset of the external hotline After approximately three seconds the programmed phone number is dialed automatically 2 Ifyou do not hear dial tone or dialing noises hang up for about 20 seconds and try again 3 When the call is answered speak into the handset External Hotline 311 5 79 Fax Machine Extensions 601 Description This System Programming procedure identifies extensions to which fax machines are connected Related Features m f you want to monitor fax machine status and make one touch transfers to the fax machine see Auto Dialing to program a Fax Management button and Fax Management Feature in Chapter 4 to use the button m To prevent other extensions from interrupting a fax call program the fax extension for Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Considerations m Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from fax machine extensions m If an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system the Automated Attendant Service of that system can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines if you have multiple fax machines See the PARTNER MAIL documentation for instructions Valid Entries 1 2 Assigned 2 Not Assigned W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Prog
147. Date 101 Description This System Programming procedure sets the month day and year The system displays only the month and day on display phones when the phone is idle the month day and year print on SMDR call reports Related Features m The System Date is used to date stamp the backup files when you use Backup Programming Automatic 123 BndiBsckup Programming Manual 124 m Backup Programming Automatic 2123 uses the System Date to schedule the automatic backups m Backup Programming Automatic 123 and Backup Programming Manual 124 do not backup the System Date m Restore Programming 125 does not restore the System Date Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the System Date 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 O 1 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter today s date in the form mmadyy month day and year including leading zeros for single digit months or days For example to enter April 26 1997 press 4 2 9 A display similar to the following appears System Date Data 042697 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode System Date 101 5 169 System Day 102 Description This System Programming procedure sets the day of the week that appears on system display phones R
148. Devices ontact Closure Devices redit Card Scanners Fax Machines lt Z e D 3 n oice Messaging Systems In addition you can connect the following devices to your system Doorphones allow visitors to signal extensions by pressing a button on the doorphone the person who answers a doorphone call can then speak with the visitor at the doorphone A doorphone is especially useful for providing access to offices or departments after hours For example you can install a doorphone outside your building entrance to allow visitors to ring telephones inside the building when the receptionist is not there and the front door is locked Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 1 The system supports up to two Lucent Technologies PARTNER Doorphones or any number of Lucent Technologies Universal Doorphones Universal Doorphones offer a door unlock feature and can be installed in addition to PARTNER Doorphones m Loudspeaker paging systems allow you to broadcast a message over a large area by connecting the paging system directly to the PAGE jack on the processor module The system supports all Lucent Technologies paging systems including the entire PagePac line The system also supports most paging systems from other manufacturers when the paging systems are connected using a paging interface device For information about how to use duet ea system with the system see Chapter 5 m PARTNER PassageWay Solution allows you to combine your
149. ER DURATION DIAL 107 p 5 148 DIAL two digits 01 80 to set the length of a switchhook flash v 18 450 msec ROTARY DIALING TIMEOUT DIAL 108 p 5 153 DIAL 1 4sec 2 8secv 3 12 sec OUTSIDE CONFERENCE DENIAL DIAL 109 p 5 141 DIAL 1 AllowedY 2 Disallowed OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION p 5 139 BUTTON DIAL 114 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select Button then press a programmable button WAKE UP SERVICE BUTTON p 5 197 DIAL 115 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select Button then press a programmable button VMS COVER RINGS DIAL 117 DIAL one digit 1 9 for the number of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging system v 3 rings p 5 190 RING ON TRANSFER p 5 152 DIAL 119 DIAL 1 Active V 2 Not Active CALLER ID TYPE DIAL 122 DIAL 1 USA v 2 Singapore p 5 44 AUTOMATIC DIAL 123 DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active v 3 Backup Alarm Cleared BACKUP PROGRAMMING MANUAL p 5 29 DIAL 124 PRESS to begin the backup RESTORE PROGRAMMING DIAL 125 p 5 149 DIAL 1 MAN mmddyy v 2 AUTO mmddyy PRESS to begin the restore IMPORTANT The Number of Lines procedure changes Line Assign ment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 PRE
150. Forced Account Code Entry 307 Forced Account Code List 409 Group Call Distribution 206 Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G I 77G Group Pickup 166G Hold Hold Disconnect Time 203 Hotline 603 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Intercom Dial Tone 309 5 46 5 48 5 50 5 51 5 53 5 54 5 55 5 56 5 57 5 59 5 60 5 61 5 64 5 66 5 67 5 68 5 70 5 71 5 73 5 75 5 76 5 78 5 80 5 81 5 83 5 85 5 87 5 90 5 93 5 95 5 97 5 99 5 101 5 103 Contents Joining Calls Last Number Redial F05 Line Access Restriction 302 Line Assignment 301 Line Coverage Extension 208 Line Ringing Loudspeaker Paging 170 Making Calls Manual Signaling F13X X or F13 X X Message Light Off F10X X Message Light On F09X X Music On Hold 602 Music On Hold Volume 614 Night Service Button 503 Night Service Group Extensions 504 Number of Lines 104 Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Outside Conference Denial 109 Personal Speed Dial Numbers Pickup Group Extensions 501 Privacy F07 Recall F03 Recall Timer Duration 107 Restore Programming 125 Ring on Transfer 119 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Save Number Redial F04 Send All Calls Simultaneous Paging I 70 SMDR Output Format 610 SMDR Record Type 608 SMDR Top Of Page 609 Special Dialing Functions 104 106 re re re re re oO
151. Group ring 5 88 Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G To manually ring or page a Calling Group 1 Lift the handset and press Intercom You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring To make a paging call press and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To manually transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press rransr 2 Dial and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Standard Phone To ring or page a Calling Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring To make a paging call press and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to a Calling Group T While on a call press the swi
152. Loudspeaker Paging 170 Description This feature accesses the loudspeaker paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the processor module Related Features m Users can make Simultaneous Paging announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones assigned to Calling Group 1 Sce Calling Group Extensions 502 t0 program Calling Group 1 m You can specify the loudspeaker paging system as a hotline alert extension so that the hotline phone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker For more information see Hotline 603 Considerations m You can program a Loudspeaker Paging button on a system phone to access the loudspeaker with one touch m lf the loudspeaker paging system is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Loudspeaker Paging button 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press left Q 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system 1 Press the programmed button o
153. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 Programming and Use 518 456 054 Comcode 107916835 Issue 1 January 1997 Copyright 1997 Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies 518 456 054 All Rights Reserved Issue 1 Printed in U S A January 1997 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A or a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules For additional FCC information see Appendix C of this book Canadian Emissions Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A or the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Industry Canada IC For additional IC information see Appendix C of this book Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A ou de la classe B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Industrie Canada Vous trouverez des renseignements compl mitaires la annexe C de ce manuel Security Toll fraud the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an
154. NER MAIL VS system answers To Program The following list summarizes the PARTNER Advanced Communications System programming procedures you use to implement the previous example 1 Use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign all outside lines to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group to provide Automated Attendant Service on these lines 2 Use Transfer Return Extension 306 for extensions Z1 and Z2 to ensure that calls transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system return to extension 10 if they are not answered 3 Use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions Z1 and Z2 to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group 4 Set the VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Delayed Set the VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Always Make sure that a Night Service Button 4503 is assigned at extension 10 the receptionist s extension When Night Service is on callers hear the night menu when no one is available to answer their calls 7 Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button at extension 10 to enable the receptionist to transfer calls directly to extension X s and Y s mailboxes without first ringing their phones This is useful when the receptionist knows that the users at extensions X and Y are away from their desks 8 Program an Auto Dial button for the VMS hunt group ntercom 7 at extensions X and Y to allow the subscribers to call in for their messages with one touch Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 25 Feature Reference Contents Overview 5 1 m
155. Personal Computer PC running Microsoft Windows 3 1 or later Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Version 3 11 or later or Windows 95 with your phone You can then use your PC for tasks such as dialing out from an electronic phone list and logging phone calls m Music on hold systems allow you to play recorded music or messages to callers while they are on hold by connecting the audio source to the processor module The system supports the Lucent Technologies Magic on Hold system and most models from other manufacturers The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Accordingly in order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives The Magic on Hold system includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually m Remote Administration Units RAUS allow you to perform System and Centralized Telephone Programming from a remote location m Extra alerts help make users aware of incoming calls For example you can use an audible alert chime horn or bell to replace a phone ring in a noisy area such as a factory Similarly you can use a visual alert strobe or light to replace a phone ring in a quiet area such as a library Lucent Technologies offers several compatible alerts m Speakerphones provide hands free two way operation of a phone without lifti
156. Prev Possum ltem Data i Enter Tl oa ee aa ae E System Central B Program PARTNER 34D Message ro PARTNER 18D Figure 2 3 Programming Overlays for PARTNER Model Phones 2 16 Programming Button Locations When programming from a PARTNER model phone at extension 10 or 11 keep in mind that the button you press at the programming extension may be ina different location on the phone to which the programming applies Figure 2 4 on page 2 18 shows the relative location of buttons on each PARTNER model phone For example the button labeled E on the PARTNER 34D phone in Figure alis in the bottom row The equivalent button on the PARTNER 18D phone is in the leftmost position of the second row from the bottom If your system has a mix of PARTNER and MLS model phones refer tolAppendix Elfor information about programming from a PARTNER model phone to an MLS model phone or from an MLS model phone to a PARTNER model phone Programming Mode 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 see The Programming Overlays Jearlier in this chapter for more information 2 Toenter programming mode press A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming
157. Prev A mm Procedure m_ ltem m_ Data ri Enter A o peep PEP pr Ls LS LS LS LS LS M m mM pi mM M N Oo P AA BB U LS LS LS LS LS m m m m m 1 ELM ELN LO gL E J K L Y Z 5 i 7 LS LS LS LS LS LS alt gLJ l aK aCe m a F X 5 mM H E System Central BLE BLE ECG BELH z LS Program Tel Program 5 E z z gt a m Ban jns PCA SCE Sco HDD A B C D LS LS LS LS B B Ext Message Intercom Intercom Feature I 1 PARTNER 34D Phone oLY GG HH TI JJ amp BLFE BLU BCV BEWJ SLX 3E BLDD cQ oR L6 elt SLCC glee ELM SCN BLOJ SCP SAA BLZ oG aH SLT CJ alk al ELA aB ale aP G oL F B B Ext Message Intercom Intercom Figure E 2 Programming from an MLS 34D Phone Programming Mixed Phones E 3 Glossary A Account code A code of up to 16 digits that is associated with incoming or outgoing telephone calls Entry of an account code may be optional or forced If entered an account code appears on the call record for a call See also Call report Forced cest Lees EE CREE Auto Dial button A programmable telephone button that lets you dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button An Auto Dial button can be used to store a feature code a phone number or an account code so that it can be dialed with one touch See
158. RCE U S Lucent Direct Catalog Sales 800 451 2100 Lucent Technologies Sales Office 800 247 7000 Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer Lucent Technologies National Parts Sales Center 800 222 7278 A PARTNER 18D corded telephone PARTNER 18 corded telephone PARTNER 6 corded telephone Backup Restore PC Card Contact Closure Adjunct PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Button label package specify telephone model Button label package PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer gt gt i gt gt gt i b rx gt gt ii gt ete ee Handset AB1A Standard for PARTNER model phones gt gt Amplified handset K6S Optional for hard of hearing users with PARTNER model phones Handset cord 9 ft coiled Connects handset to telephone Telephone mounting cord D4BU Connects phone to wall jack jack panel or 206E module ext jack Specify length 2 7 or 14 ft Modular telephone extension cord 8 connector Extends the D4BU mounting cords Specify length 14 25 50 75 or 100 ft A A To locate the nearest Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer check your local telephone directory s yellow pages Maintenance B 7 FCC and IC Information Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Information References to FCC regulations are not applicable outside of the U S Class A Compliance
159. S Cover state users can program the VMS Cover teature on a button with lights Users can then press the VMS Cover button to activate the feature green light on or deactivate the feature green light off If Automatic VMS Cover is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the VMS Cover button to indicate that VMS Cover is currently active If this is the case and the VMS Cover button is pressed the feature is deactivated To activate VMS Cover again you must press the button m Automatic VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 m Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at all system extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system m Users with Automatic VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox m f an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the forwarding destination they are not covered by the voice messaging system Considerations Standard phones and system phones without a programmed VMS Cover button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension Valid Entries 1 2 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 5 22 Automatic VMS Cover 310 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of sp
160. SS DIAL MODE DIAL 201 DIAL a line number 01 15 DIAL 1 Touch Tone V 2 Rotary PRESS to program another line p 5 56 HOLD DISCONNECT TIME DIAL 203 p 5 97 DIAL a line number 01 15 DIAL 00 No Detection 01 50 msec 02 100 msec 03 150 msec 04 200 msec 05 250 msec 06 300 msec 07 350 msec 08 400 msec 09 450 msec v 10 500 msec 11 550 msec 12 600 msec PRESS to program another line GROUPCALL DISTRIBUTION DIAL 206 p 5 85 DIAL a group number 1 6 7 for VMS DIAL a line number 01 15 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 3 VMS Line Cover only for hunt group 7 PRESS to program another line LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION DIAL 208 p 5 113 DIAL a line number 01 15 DIAL an extension number 10 41 PRESS to program another ine PRESS to unassign ownership B ForCentralized Telephone Programming see previous pages IMPORTANT Using this procedure disconnects any active calls but retains system settings Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period DIAL 728 L Extensions LINE ASSIGNMENT DIAL 301 DIAL an extension number 10 41 To remove all existing line assignments press before selecting a line DIAL a line number 01 15 DIAL 1 Assigned v 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a programmable button to assign the line tothat butto
161. Sekr press Intercom and then press the Manual Signaling button m o respond to a signal the target extension must place an intercom call to the person signaling Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX 5 123 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Manual Signaling button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 3 Dial the two digit extension number of the target extension For example to identify extension 22 as the target extension press 2 Enter before the extension number if you want to use the button for voice signaling a fF ON 6 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using m To beep the target extension 1 While the handset is in the cradle press the programmed button The extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed m Toring or voice signal the target extension 1 Lift the handset or press Sekr 2 Press Intercom 3 Press the programmed button m To transfer a call to the target extension 1 While active on the call press franstr 2 Press the programmed button 5 124 Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX Message Light Off F10XX De
162. Telephone Programming procedure determines the line a user is connected to after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker to make a call The system looks for lines in the order specified by this procedure and selects the first available line For example if you specify outside lines first for an extension but all outside lines are busy the user will hear the intercom dial tone after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker Related Features To copy the Automatic Line Selection setting as well as other system settings to other extensions you can use Copy Settings 399 If Forced Account Code Entry 2307 is assigned to an extension Automatic Line Selection for that extension does not apply This means the user must manually select a line after entering a required account code For an extension identified as an Hotline 2603 or Doorphone Extension 2604 2605 program the extension to select only the intercom with no outside lines in the selection sequence For an extension identified as an External Hotline 27311 program the extension to select outside lines first Considerations This feature must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 only using Centralized Telephone Programming Individual users cannot program this feature directly You should program Automatic Line Selection when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features However if you want to program both Au
163. achine outside line dial tone Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 22 press 2 3 To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Intercom Dial Tone 309 5 103 Joining Calls Description Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress the same way you do on a home telephone by picking up an extension This is different from conferencing in which the originator pulls you into the call Up to three system extensions can join a call on an outside line for a total of one outside and four inside parties Related Features You can use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions from joining calls on a specific extension This is especially useful for answering machines fax machines modems and credit card scanners because trying to join one of these devices could inte
164. achine to answer on the third or fourth ring so that it does not answer calls before someone else can If the answering machine is to cover transferred calls make sure the number of rings is less than the amount of transfer return rings set for the extension This assures that the answering machine will pick up transferred calls before they return to the transfer return extension If you intercept a call from the answering machine you will hear a click to notify you that the answering machine has turned off Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 7 Auto Attendant An auto attendant answers calls and directs them to a specified extension Calling Group or Hunt Group based on the digits a caller dials after listening to a list of choices in a recorded greeting For example the auto attendant could answer calls and tell callers to press 1 for Sales 2 for Parts 3 for Service and so on An auto attendant can be set up for immediate call handling or delayed call handling Backup for Receptionist A common use of an auto attendant is as a backup for the receptionist If the receptionist cannot pick up a call within a specified number of rings the auto attendant handles it This prevents calls from going unanswered Figure 4 4 shows how the auto attendant would be connected to your system Auto Attendant Lines Receptionist s Desk Figure 4 4 Backup for Receptionist To Use Follow the instructions packaged with the
165. ack a specific customer or item number For example The following entries are valid 123 123999 The following entries are invalid 1 12 Forced Account Code List 409 5 83 m Wildcard Characters You can use wildcard characters in list entries For example your company s Sales Department has a three digit account code the first digit represents the department and the second and third digits represent the individuals in the department You enter 4 as the list entry The following entries are valid 401 410 499 455555 The following entries are invalid 4 44 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To create a Forced Account Code List 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 O 9 at extension 10 or 11 Select a list entry 01 99 For example to select the third entry press 0 3 A display similar to the following appears Forced Act Code List 03 Enter up to six digits for the list entry If the account code is five digits or less you must press to save the account code in memory At this point m Toenter other account codes press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m Tochange the account code you just entered press and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To delete the account code you just entered press Remov
166. ackground Music is playing through the system phone s speaker m If you have Caller ID only system display phones show the Caller ID information m The ringer equivalence number REN of a standard device or the combined REN of two devices cannot be greater than 2 0 The REN of a system phone is 0 0 Learning About Telephones 3 13 Using Telephones Your system provides intuitive operation of basic call handling features plus dial code features that make it easy for users to handle calls flexibly and efficiently from both system and standard phones For more information about a specific feature refer to the feature name in Chapter 5 Basic Call Handling Features The following features are available from both system and standard phones Making Calls m j Answering Calls E i E Q T o Q all Park ransferring Calls m m cy I4 onference Calls E c oining Calls Dial Code Features Dial code features are features that you access by dialing a feature code at the telephone dialpad From a system phone you can dial Feature or Intercom followed by the two or three digit code or press a programmed Auto Dial button from a standard phone you typically dial followed by the two or three digit code when you have intercom dial tone Some dial code features are not available on standard phones as noted by an asterisk in the following list ccount Code Entry ackground Mu
167. ackup Programming Manual 124 do not backup the System Time m Restore Programming 125 does not restore the System Time Considerations m Be sure that the System Time is set correctly before using backup or restore procedures m Enterthe time in 24 hour notation In this scheme the hours of the day are 0000 12 midnight to 2359 11 59 p m Since each time must have four digits use leading zeros when necessary For example to set the time to 9 00 a m enter 9 For 4 45 p m enter m The time appears on system display phones as a m or p m not in 24 hour notation Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the System Time ill Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 O 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter a new time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press A display similar to the following appears System Time Data 1415 This time appears on system display phones as 2 15 p 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 178 System Time 103 Toll Call Prefix 402 Description This System Programming procedure indicates whether users must dial a O or 1 before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number This feature should be set to reflect the dialing patt
168. again using a file created during a backup procedure Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards Display Shows Incompatible Versions in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You attempted to restore a file that was created with an incompatible software release What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again using a backup file that was created with the current software release Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode NOTE This display indicates that all system and telephone programming has reverted to the default settings Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the restore was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the Backup Restore PC Card reapply power to the system and restart the Restore Programming 125 procedure 6 22 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 2 The backup file is corrupted What to do Retry the Restore Programming 125 procedure If you get the same result try again using a different backup file from the same Backup Restore PC Card or a file from a different Backup Restore PC Card Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards System Programming Settings Reverted to Default Settings Possible Cause You ran the Restore Progra
169. al number See Auto Dialing System Speed Dial Numbers and Numbers for programming instructions Considerations When an account code is entered during a call the caller on the other end does not hear the touch tone digits dialed If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports See Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 for more information about call reporting If an account code is entered for an outgoing call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the originating extension as the owner of the call Conversely if an account code is entered for an incoming call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the destination extension as the owner of the call Account codes can be changed during a call However only the person who entered the original account code can enter a different account code SMDR prints changed account codes as follows For optional or forced account code entry without a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last account code entered For forced account code entry with a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last valid account code entered If the changed account code is not valid the report prints the original account code 5 6 Account Code Entry F12 If a Forced Account Code List exists you can check to see if an account code is valid when enter
170. aling or manual signaling When programming emergency numbers for Auto Dialing and or making test calls to those numbers you should 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Auto Dial buttons do not override dialing restrictions for an extension PARTNER 6 phones have only four buttons available for lines and or Auto Dial numbers A combined total of 576 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial numbers can be programmed Auto Dialing 5 15 m For PBX or Centrex systems that require a dial out code to make calls Examples outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code followed by one or more pauses if available on an Auto Dial button for a number outside the PBX or Centrex system See Changing Settings to Support IPBX or Centrex Services in Chapter 2 for more information The examples below show some possible entries for an Auto Dial number in Step 4 of Programming m Outside Phone Number Enter the phone number up to 28 digits exactly as you would dial it For example to program 555 2398 press 9 8 Extension Number Press the left button and enter the two digit extension number Press X before the extension number to program the Auto Dial button to voice signal an extension For example to program extension 20 for voice signaling
171. all and an inside caller will hear a busy tone if a standard phone is in use If Call Waiting is assigned the user hears a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in for the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated The user can use the switchhook to put the first call on hold and speak to the party on the second call and to switch back and forth between the two parties Users can make a voice signaled call from a standard phone but if users try to make a voice signaled call to a standard phone it will ring because the standard phone does not have a system speaker Users cannot use the System Password Users cannot access the following system features Entry Background Music Caller ID Name Display Caller ID Inspect Privacy Save on Busy Talk Back or Voice Mailbox Transfer Users can however use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 and Privacy Do not use Forced Account Code Entry with a standard phone because the phone will not be able to get dial tone and make calls A display on a standard phone will not show Caller ID information or system messages A speaker on a standard phone is not a system integrated speaker therefore it cannot receive voice type calls such as a group page 3 10 Learning About Telephones Feature Phones A feature phone is a standard telephone that has feature buttons in addition to the regular 12 key dial pad For example there are feature phones t
172. all calls ring like outside calls at that extension If an autodialing device such as a modem has trouble autodialing use Intercom Dial Tone 309 to change the intercom dial tone for the extension to Machine outside line dial tone Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 3 Answering Machines You can use an answering machine to answer calls at night when no one is around or during business hours when no one can get to the phone If you have a Lucent Technologies answering machine with the Call Intercept feature you can pick up a call that has been answered by the answering machine by joining the call from any system phone When you do so the system sends the answering machine a signal that makes it hang up You can connect answering machines to your system in the following ways m Single answering machine This basic setup can cover all the lines in the system Anyone on the system can call the machine to retrieve messages m Multiple answering machines f you get too many calls for one machine to cover connect two or more machines to cover all calls m Personal answering machine An answering machine can share an extension with a phone in order to answer calls to that extension NOTE If you have an answering machine and a system phone on the same extension the answering machine will be able to answer calls only when the phone is idle 4 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment Single Answering Machine The single ans
173. aller ID information for a second call while active on a call users can program Caller ID Inspectjonto a button m Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information Considerations m This feature must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone When Caller ID Name Display is on the green light is on indicating that the Caller ID name will be displayed rather than the Caller ID number m SMDR reports print only Caller ID number where available If a number is not available it is reported as IN on the call report Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Caller ID Name Display button 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode g e wD Using Press the programmed button to turn Caller ID Name Display on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Caller ID Name Display is on Caller ID Name Display F16 5 43 Caller ID Type 122 Description This System Programming procedure can be set for Singapore or USA operation USA Operation Caller ID normally displ
174. ance To prevent international calls enter the international prefix number 011 m AllStar Codes To prevent the use of all star codes enter for touch tone phones and 11 equivalent to a on rotary phones m Specific Star Codes To prevent the use of a specific star code for example 67 to block Caller ID information enter the plus the 2 or 3 digit code for touch tone phones and 11 equivalent to a on rotary phones plus the 2 or 3 digit code Fortouch tone phones 67 Prevents use of 67 to block Caller ID information Forrotary phones 1167 Prevents use of 1167 to block Caller ID information Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 0 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe List Number prompt enter a list number 1 8 For example to select the first list press 1 5 62 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 E NE Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 Atthe Data prompt enter the first telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter At this point m Toadd other phone numbers to this list press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 4 and 5 m Tochange the phone number you just entered press
175. and answering machines to receive calls automatically after hours When Night Service is on calls ring immediately at the appropriate extensions so that no human intervention is required to transfer calls to the fax modem or answering machine When Night Service is off you can use the auxiliary equipment lines for normal business purposes so that lines are dedicated to auxiliary equipment only after hours By putting auxiliary equipment in the Night Service Group as described in this section auxiliary equipment can start ringing and answering calls whenever you turn Night Service on In other words the Night Service button at extension 10 acts like a switch turning auxiliary equipment on and off as well as putting the system into Night Service NOTE If you have a voice messaging system turning Night Service on also activates Night Service operation of the voice messaging system Figure 4 13 shows a system with a fax machine and a modem connected to separate extensions Line A is published as the fax line and line B is published as the modem line Lines Figure 4 13 Night Service with Fax Machine and Modem Using Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment During the day lines A and B do not ring at extensions X and Y When you turn Night Service on calls on line A ring immediately at the fax extension X Since that line is not assigned to any other extension in the Night Service Group only extension X receives fa
176. andard telephone and try to make a call m Ifthe trouble occurs on the standard phone try another line cord if the trouble persists report it to your local phone company m Ifthe trouble does not occur on the standard phone the trouble is with your control unit Call the hotline Calls Are Answered Automatically A call rings once then disappears as if it were answered Possible Cause An auxiliary device answers when it should not this could occur with a fax machine voice messaging system answering machine or modem What to do Be sure the device is set to answer correctly If the device answers before it should adjust it to answer on a later ring If the device should not answer calls at all turn off its auto answer feature Refer to the device s user manual m For every auxiliary device connected to your system either set the device itself to answer on a later ring when the Line Ringing for the device s extension is set to Immediate Ring or set the extension s Line Ringing to Delayed Ring For a voice messaging system check all of the settings associated with it ease z3r a summary of procedures associated with the voice messaging system and Chapter 5 for complete details on each feature If the auxiliary device no longer answers calls automatically the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains call the hotline n the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call y
177. andling topics or Telephone Programming procedures Each feature includes the following information if applicable Description m Examples Related Features m Programming Considerations m Using Valid Entries factory setting This chapter gives step by step instructions using the following conventions All of the instructions in this chapter assume that system phones select outside lines first and standard phones select intercom first as determined by each extension s setting for Automatic Line Selection See Chapter 2 for a review of the methods and buttons you can use while in programming mode Programming instructions tell you to use the button to change values for specific settings You can however enter a value using the dialpad if you prefer Similarly there are different ways to exit programming mode as described in use the method with which you are most comfortable For Telephone Programming this chapter provides only the instructions for Centralized Telephone Programming To program from individual extensions users should refer to their User Instruction Cards Display prompts in the chapter are shown as they appear on PARTNER model phones If you are using an MLS model phone some of these prompts may be abbreviated Overview 5 1 If you have trouble finding a feature name in this chapter consult the index Perhaps you know the feature by a different name Or if you know the feature by its System Program
178. anges to on steady On a display phone the display shows x If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code entered in Step 2 the extension remains unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off Repeat the locking procedure on the previous pece To unlock a locked extension Ti Press the Station Lock button or press 1 On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension If the code entered in Step 2 matches the code used to lock the extension the extension is unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off If the code entered in Step 2 does not match the code used to lock the extension the extension remains locked On a button with lights the green light remains on steady Repeat the unlocking procedure above Standard Phone To lock a standard touch tone phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press 1 You hear intercom dial tone again Enter a four digit code using digits 0 9 You hear intercom dial tone again Re enter the four digit code If the code entered in Step 4 matches the code entered in Step 3 you hear silence The extension is locked If the code entered in Step 4 does not match the code entered in Step 3 you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains unlocked Repeat the locking procedure above 5 166 Station Lock F21 To unlock a standard touch to
179. arties Standard Phone 1 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call You are connected with the first party Press the switchhook down once rapidly The first party is now on hold You hear intercom dial tone To add an outside party dial 9 plus the outside number If the number is busy or does not answer hang up and the first party rings back To add an inside party dial the two digit extension number If the extension is busy or does not answer press the switchhook down once rapidly and you are reconnected with the first party When the second party answers press the switchhook down once rapidly You are now connected with both parties Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add more parties Conference Calls 5 49 Conference Drop F06 Description This feature drops the last outside party added to a conference call without disconnecting the other parties Related Features m For instructions on setting up conference calls see m You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties Considerations You can program a Conference Drop button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Conference Drop button 1 Press
180. ason for the call before hanging up You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number to dial the Account Code Entry feature code and another Speed Dial number to dial the account code Valid Entries Any phone number up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Pause Stop Recall and Touch Tone Enable assigned to codes 600 through 699 No number assigned to any code W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program System Speed Dial numbers 1 5 Press at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 Select a three digit code by pressing and dialing three digits between 600 and 699 For example to select code 600 press 6 If anumber is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code the display reads Blank Enter the number For example to program 555 4757 press The following display appears 5554757 To mark the System Speed Dial number to override dialing restrictions precede the number by a X For example to mark the number 555 1001 press X 5 5 D 0 0 1
181. assignment Table 3 1 Light Patterns for System Phones Intercom Auto Dial long on long off Green flash means a call is ringing at your extension Red flash means a call is ringing on the line but not at your extension a four digit code to lock or unlock his or her extension Light Pattern Line Button Feature Button Button Steady On Line is in use Green means Green means Red means the extension you are using the line red feature is on programmed on the means someone at another button is busy making or extension is using the line answering a call Off Line is idle not being used Feature is off Extension programmed on i the button is idle not steady off being used Flash A call is ringing on the line A user is entering Green flash means someone at the extension programmed on the button is calling you Alternating Red Green Flash Ll red on green on red on green on Alternating green and red flash appears at both extensions in a joined call and at any extension connected in a conference call Wink long on short off A call on the line is either on hold or parked Green wink means the call is on hold or parked at your extension Red wink means the call is on hold or parked at another extension Anyone who has the line can retrieve the held call Green Flutter short on short off A Call is on exclusive hold at your extension and can
182. at a valid Backup Restore PC Card is in the PC Card slot See the next procedure Dicono Heung 4 BC Cao pelola inserting a PC Card The old AUTO mmadyy file on the PC Card is replaced by the new one The MAN mmadyy file is unaffected You can use the Restore Programming 125 feature to check the date on the AUTO mmdayy file to verify that the backup was successful If you chose Option 2 Not Active no automatic backups will be performed Backup Programming Automatic 123 5 27 For information about using Option 3 Backup Alarm Cleared see Clearing al Backup Failure Alarm in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Inserting or Removing a PC Card 1 Ifthe system has power do one of the following to turn off the power 5 Slot carrier Move the On Off switch to the Off position O 2 Slot carrier or Stand Alone PARTNER ACS processor module Unplug the power cord from the power jack 2 Insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module 3 Turn on the system power by doing one of the following 5 Slot carrier Move the On Off switch to the On position I 2 Slot carrier or Stand Alone PARTNER ACS processor module Plug the power cord into the power jack Using Use Option 3 to clear Backup Failure Alarms See Clearing a Backup Failure larm in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 5 28 Backup Programming Automatic 123 Backup Programming Manual 124
183. ation extension Wake Up Call on the display of users receiving a wake up call Volume or display contrast level bars as volume or display contrast is adjusted Programming messages and prompts when in programming mode When you are in Telephone Programming mode the current line assignment feature code or Speed Dial number if any assigned to a button displays when the button is pressed Blank displays if nothing is programmed At idle extensions 10 and 11 only specific messages appear on the top line of the display instead of the usual day date message in the following circumstances Users at these two extensions should be instructed to notify the System Manager when such a message appears ChgBat W PowerOn Or ReplaceSysBat W Power On appears when PARTNER ACS processor module batteries need to be replaced The message may flicker on and off as the batteries near the low power threshhold These batteries are used to retain system programming settings during a power failure See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for instructions for replacing the batteries 5 64 Display Backup Failure Alarm messages appear if an automatic backup is unsuccessful The message is displayed until you clear the alarm or until the next successful automatic backup or system restart See Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm Jin Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Related Features The System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103
184. atures and Capabilities The following list provides an overview of the system s features Full line of system phones some with displays showing date time and programming and feedback messages All system phones provide access to multiple outside lines and system features Programmable buttons on system phones providing one touch access to system features simply by pressing the button Intuitive operation of basic call handling capabilities including transfer conference and hold Intercom inside calling to other system extensions using an Intercom button and the two digit number assigned to the extension Users can either ring or voice signal an idle system phone use Voice Interrupt On Busy to signal another user who is active on a call or manually signal to audibly alert another predetermined extension Grouping of extensions for flexibility in directing and answering calls Integrated voice messaging support with the PARTNER MAIL VS system or PARTNER MAIL system so callers can reach a desired extension or group without operator assistance and leave messages at unanswered or busy extensions Caller ID support on system display phones if Caller ID service is available from your local telephone company and you subscribe to it Power failure operation with standard phones allowing you to make and receive calls during a power failure while retaining programmed equipment settings for up to four days An optional Uninterrupt
185. available line intercom or outside when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses to make a call without first selecting a specific line button For extensions with standard phones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables standard phones to access system features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on standard phones they hear intercom dial tone To access an outside line they must dial 9 Customizing Extensions In addition to line assignments the following procedures can be used to customize an extension m Display Language 303 to specify the language English French or Spanish for messages that appear on a system display phone m Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a call at the extension This feature is also useful for extensions connected to a modem fax or any device whose function can be disrupted by someone trying to join it m Forced Account Code Entry 307 to prevent the extension from making an outside call until a required account code is entered You can also use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes this ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Call Waiting 316 to identify standard phone extensions that can receive the system not the local telephone company call waiting tone for a second incoming call wh
186. ay Language 303 Distinctive Ring 308 Description This System Programming procedure determines whether calls should ring at a standard device using the system s distinctive ringing patterns different patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls or whether all calls to the standard device should ring like outside calls Considerations m Change the setting to Not Active if a standard device such as a modem or answering machine does not pick up intercom or transferred calls m f distinctive ring is set to Not Active for an extension where both a system phone and a standard device are installed the system phone continues to use the system s distinctive ringing patterns but all calls ring at the standard device using a single ring burst m he system does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PBX or central office through to extensions regardless of the setting for this feature Valid Entries 1 Active outside intercom and transferred calls ring differently using the system s distinctive ringing patterns v 2 Not Active outside intercom and transferred calls all ring using a single ring burst Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Distinctive Ring setting 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 O 8 at extension 10
187. ays the number from which the incoming call is coming replacing the system date and time display on system phones for the duration of the call An out of area message displays if a call is being dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A privacy message Priv displays if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information Singapore Operation Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming When there is no incoming number the system detects a P or an O in the reason for DN Directory Number absence field and substitutes the information sent by the local telephone company Central Office in the Name parameter field m lf the name is supplied the system displays it m If the name is not supplied either Priv or is displayed Related Features m The Caller ID Name Display feature affects whether the callers name is displayed if available instead of the caller s number m Caller ID Inspect enables you to view Caller ID information for a second line while remaining active on the first call m Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information Considerations m The Caller ID Type you set applies to the entire system m Achangeto the Caller ID Type setting takes effect when the next Caller ID call comes into the system Valid Entries 1 USA Y 2 Singapore 5 44 Caller ID Type 122 Programming See Figu
188. beeps is not repeated m Use Call Waiting only for standard phone extensions Do not Assign Call Waiting to extensions that have fax machines credit card scanners modems or auto attendants because the call waiting tone will interrupt the data connection m You cannot transfer either party connected using Call Waiting conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active m Transfer return group call distribution hunt group and wake up calls are not considered incoming calls for this feature Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Call Waiting setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 3 1 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to receive Call Waiting For example to program extension 11 press 1 7 3 Toassign or unassign Call Waiting press until the appropriate value displays Call Waiting 316 5 37 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 38 Call Waiting 316 Caller ID Description Caller ID is available on system display phones on all lines for which you
189. bers and or making test calls to emergency numbers you should 1 remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Valid Entries Up to 12 digits 0 9 Examples The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for the Emergency Phone Number List in Step 3 of Programming m 911 Toallow 911 calls from any extension that has an outside line create the following entry for the Emergency List 911 m Overriding Number on a Disallowed List You can use Emergency List entries to override numbers that would otherwise be disallowed For example if you created Disallowed List entries to prevent calls to area code 201 but you want to allow calls to a specific number in that area code such as the number of a manager who is on call after hours put the number in the Emergency List Toll Call Prefix required 12015556666 and 02015556666 Toll Call Prefix not required 2015556666 Emergency Phone Number List 406 5 73 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To create an Emergency Phone Number List 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 4 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Selecta list entry 01 10 For example to select the third entry press
190. bleshooting procedures described in this chapter If not you can call for help In the continental U S Lucent Technologies provides a toll free customer hotline 24 hours a day Call the hotline at 1 800 628 2888 or your Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system Consultation charges may apply Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer If you call have the following information ready so that the representative can better help you m The kind of system you have for example PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 To determine the release number press 9 at any display phone or look at the processor module m The number of lines and extensions in your system m The type of phone system or standard and the model number if applicable System phone model numbers are located either on the upper right hand corner of the phone or on the dialpad overlay m f you followed a troubleshooting procedure and need more help tell the representative what you did Power Failure Operation When power to the system is cut off the first two lines on the PARTNER Advanced Communications System module automatically connect to the first two extensions on the module and the first line on each 206 module connects to its first extension This enables you to make and answer calls during a power outage provided you
191. button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 0 amp Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode a fF N Using System Phone To use Last Number Redial 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press 5 Digits are displayed on system display phones as they are dialed 5 106 Last Number Redial F05 Standard Phone To use Last Number Redial 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 8 Last Number Redial F05 5 107 Line Access Restriction 302 Description This System Programming procedure restricts an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on a specific line For example you may want a secretary to answer calls on a manager s line but not to make any outgoing calls on the line in this case you can assign the managers line to the secretary s extension and restrict it to In Only Related Features m This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension with a line set to In Only or No Access cannot select the line to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions in Chapter 2 for a summary of all dialing restrictions
192. buttons on which lines are assigned show the current Line Ringing settings remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 4 At this point you can Use Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the telephone selects a line when the user picks up the handset If you want to hangelAulomatic Line Selection an extension you must do so immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number m Use Extension Name Display to assign a user s name to the extension See Chapter 5 for the character codes Like Automatic Line Selection this procedure must be done immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number If you want to change both Automatic Line Selection and Extension Name Display first change Automatic Line Selection then press Central Te Program redial the extension number then use Extension Name Display 7 Use Line Ringing to change the ringing for an individual line 5 Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers Auto Dial numbers or system features as described in Chapter 5 To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press Wic HFAl 6 To change the settings for another extension press Central Tel Program then dial the new extension number 7 To exit programming mode you can press or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle Changing Programming Type
193. call Feature Has No Effect Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly Problems with Standard Devices Standard Device Does Not Answer Standard Device Does Not Dial Out Properly Problems with Automatic Backup Display Shows Backup Failed Insert Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Display Shows Backup Failed Write Prot at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Display Shows Backup Failed System Busy at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Problems with Manual Backup Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Display Shows Card is Write Protected in System Programming Mode Display Shows System Busy in System Programming Mode Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card in System Programming Mode Display Shows Backup Failed System Busy in System Programming Mode Problems with System Restore Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Display Shows Bad File Try Again in System Programming Mode Display Shows Empty File in System Programming Mode Display Shows Incompatible Versions in System Programming Mode Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode System Programming Settings Reverted to Default Settings Display Shows Restore Complete but All Calls Were Disconnected 6 19 6 20 6 2
194. canners 4 13 m Using Credit Card Scanners 4 13 m Programming Credit Card Scanners 4 13 Fax Machines 4 14 m Using the Fax Management Feature 4 14 Programming for Fax Management 4 14 Using the Fax Management Button 4 14 m Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine 4 15 4 i Contents 44i m Setting Up Fax Machines Restricting Dialing from a Fax Machine Single Fax Machine Fax Line Saver Send and Receive Fax Machines Modems m Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only m Send and Receive Modem Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment m Using Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment m Programming Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment Voice Messaging Systems m Delayed Call Handling 4 15 4 16 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 20 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 24 Using Auxiliary Equipment Overview There are many ways to set up auxiliary equipment the setup you choose depends upon your needs and the number of devices you have This chapter presents some common setups It does not cover how to physically connect the equipment or how to program the features See the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for installation instructions Chapter 5 for programming instructions and the equipment manufacturer s documentation for complete details on the device you connect This chapter shows various applications for the following types of equipment Answering Machines Automated Attendants O all Reporting
195. capability does not work with standard phones with neon type message waiting lights Overview 1 7 Auxiliary Equipment You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system without expensive adapters or additional phone lines for example answering machines credit card scanners and fax machines Many industry standard single line devices will work with the system regardless of the manufacturer For more information refer to the list in Chapter 4Jor contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Also see Chapter 4 for advice on setting up auxiliary equipment to work effectively with the system Requirements An industry standard device must meet the following conditions m t must be nonproprietary That is it cannot be made specifically for use on a particular telephone system For example you cannot connect a Lucent Technologies MERLING system phone because it is specifically designed for use on a MERLIN system m its Ringer Equivalence Number REN cannot be greater than 2 0 The REN is shown on a label on the device usually on the bottom m You can connect a standard two line device to the system but for best results it should be installed and used as if it were a single line device Connecting Standard Devices You can connect a standard device so that it is on an extension by itself or so that it shares an extension with another piece of equipment either anot
196. central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Your local phone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 Considerations You should change the factory setting only under two conditions If using the system Recall feature has no effect lengthen the time If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and Recall drops calls shorten the time Valid Entries 01 through 80 25 to 2000 msec in 25 msec increments 18 450 msec v Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the duration of the Recall Timer signal 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 1 7 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 18 450 msec Enter a different Recall Timer setting by pressing Next Data or Prev Data For example to increase the Recall Timer setting to 750 msec press until a display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 30 750 msec Alternatively you can enter the setting number directly For example to set the Recall timer to 750 msec press 3 0 Select another procedure or exit programming mode If you are using Recall to access PBX or Centrex features test the new Recall Timer setting m fa callis disconne
197. ch and for transferring calls to the fax machine extension Using the Fax Management Feature On any system phone you can program a button with lights to serve as a Fax Management button The lights next to this button tell you when the fax machine is in use available or not answering for example when it is out of paper You can also use the button to transfer calls from your extension to the fax machine with a single touch Programming for Fax Management To program a Fax Management button first assign the fax machine extension using Fax Machine Extensions 601 program the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button For more information see Auto Dialing in Chapter 5 Using the Fax Management Button The lights next to the Fax Management button show what is happening at the fax machine see Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Fax Management Button Light Patterns Light Pattern Indicates Red broken flutter Fax trouble The fax machine is not answering If broken flutter occurs because the fax machine is out of paper refill the paper The light clears the next time the machine transmits or receives a call If the machine takes longer than four rings to answer the light shows fax trouble when the machine does answer the light changes to fax busy red steady Red steady Fax busy The fax machine is busy transmitting or receiving a call Green flutter Fax transfer return
198. changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Station Lock was used to lock the extension What to do Use Station Unlock from extension 10 to unlock the extension m lf you can make a call the problem is solved m If the extension was not locked go to Possible Cause 5 Troubleshooting 6 13 Possible Cause 5 Local phone company is not accurately receiving the dialing signals What to do Isolate the problem Use the telephone to make calls on different lines Then make calls on different phones using the same line m If you cannot make calls from one phone on all lines follow the procedure for System Phone Does Not Work Possible Cause 2 m If you cannot make calls using different phones go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 Too many standard devices are trying to dial simultaneously If the problem is on a system phone go to Possible Cause 7 What to do Stay on the line and wait for dial tone or try to call later m If you can make a call you may want to increase the number of touch tone receivers by adding 206 1 receiver or 400 2 receivers modules to avoid future problems Call the hotline m f you wait 30 seconds and still do not hear a dial tone go to Possible Cause 7 Possible Cause 7 Local phone company line is faulty What to do One at a time unplug each outside line from each 206 400 and 200 module in the control unit Then plug each line into a st
199. chines 4 4 4 7 Attendants automated se Authorization Codes see Forced Account Code Entry 307 Hands Free Answer on Auto Answer Intercom see Intercom Auto attendant 4 8 5 4 o O Autoattendantextensions 5 4 Auto Dial buttons description 2 20 5 1515 17 Cs light patterns 3 4 programming 5 16 using 2 21 3 4 5 17 1 O AutoDialnumbers 5 15 5 17 Cid Autodialers Intercom descripion 1 7 2 22 5 15 y dimensions andweightJA 1 probems 6 10 1 y O Automated attendants seelAuto attendant Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 18 Automatic Line Selection 5 2015 21 sd Automatic VMS Cover 4 amp 310 5 2215 23 1 Auxiliary equipment example setups oveview 1 B o LINE programming for requirements 1 8 with Night Service B Background Music description light pattems Backlit display Backup probleme automaticj6 18 6 19 manua 6 2016 21 0 0 0 0 Backup Programming Automatic 123 Manual 124 Backup Failure Alarm clearing Backup Restore PC Card 1 5 2 14 inserti removing problems with ng Bed and Breakfast features Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Wake Up Service Button 115 Bells see Extra alerts Bridging adapter Bridging calls Ca Ca Ca C o C fe Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca
200. ciated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 m f you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for Day Only or Night Only you must use Night Service Button 503 to program a Night Service button for extension 10 Valid Entries 1 Always v 2 Day Only 3 Night Only Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program H 5 O 7 at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 192 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Description This feature is available only on system phones This System Programming procedure identifies extensions that can receive voice interrupt on busy calls A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets a user the originator interrupt and speak to another user the recipient who is busy on an intercom or outside call with one other party When voice interrupt on busy is initiated the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator s voice The originator and the recipient should be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably will hear both the beeps and the faint sound of the
201. cing System Modules in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide m lf the LEDs light the problem is corrected m lf the problem remains call the hotline nthe continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 25 Poor Transmission Quality on Modem Possible Cause A high speed modem is connected through an extension jack on the control unit to a standard Central Office telephone line but the line quality is not sufficient to generate a clear signal when the modem transmits through the system interface What to do Either connect the modem directly to the network interface jack for a line or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading the line quality m If the device works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains call the hotline Other Problems with System The following procedure resets the system Use it when you have any problems that are not covered elsewhere in this chapter The procedure disconnects all calls in progress but does not erase any system settings provided that the system batteries are installed and not low on power Possible Cause System needs a hardware reset What to do Unplug the control unit s power cord from the wall Wait 10 seconds then plug it back in If the problem remains call the hotline
202. com calls and access system features Automatic Line Selection for his or her extension should be set to intercom first for proper operation For example the setting for a standard phone in a lobby used for internal calling or making local calls on line 1 would be Intercom 1 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program Automatic Line Selection for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Automatic Line Selection Press 9 Press the line or buttons in the desired order For each button pressed a display similar to the following appears Automatic Line Selection To exit Automatic Line Selection press G9 6 Press and enter a new extension number or exit programming mode Automatic Line Selection 5 21 Automatic VMS Cover 310 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure automatically routes an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after a specified number of rings default for all system extensions is three rings so callers can leave a message Related Features m Tomanually change an extension s VM
203. cted shorten the time m If the Recall signal has no effect lengthen the time 5 148 Recall Timer Duration 107 Restore Programming 125 Description This System Programming procedure enables you to reinstate your system and telephone programming except the System Day System Date and System Time to the settings saved on a PC Card at the last system backup manual or automatic This procedure is useful if your system settings become corrupted if you make changes and decide you would rather use the former settings or if you replace your processor module and want to retain the system settings you had on the previous processor module A successful restore takes about five seconds NOTE When a restore completes successfully the Restore Complete message displays for two seconds at idle extensions 10 and 11 and then a System Reset Programming Saved 728 occurs disconnecting any calls in progress t is recommended that you warn users before beginning a restore or do the restore during nonbusiness hours Related Features m Backup Programming Automatic 123 automatically saves your programmed settings at regular intervals m Backup Programming Manual 124 is a manual procedure that you can perform at any time to back up your system and telephone programming settings m System Reset Programming Saved 728 automatically occurs following a successful restore The reset disconnects any calls i
204. ctor CLOSURE wire if 2 Contact Closures used up to 800 feet 243 84 meters from control unit using 24 Adjunct Jack gauge solid conductor wire if only 1 Contact Closure used Specifications e Install the Contact Closure Adjunct in the same building as the control unit cannot be installed out of doors e Has three terminals per Contact Closure providing a normally open and normally closed function for each Contact Closure e Maximum contact voltages and current 30 VAC 1 Amp 50 VDC 1 Amp SMDR Output e 1200 baud e No parity Format e 8 data bits e 2 stop bits e XON XOFF protocol e Carriage return e Line feeds A 2 Specifications Environmental Requirements Control Unit Electrical Requirements Control Unit Mount on a wall at least 2 feet 0 6 meters from the floor wall mounting required Locate within 5 feet 1 5 meters of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not controlled by a switch using supplied 7 foot 2 1 meter cords Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C not in direct sunlight Humidity 15 90 noncondensing For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules provide the following minimum clearance around the control unit 5 Slot carrier 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the front and bottom 2 Slot carrier or Stand Alone ACS processor module 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the front top and rig
205. ctrical inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 IC Certification No See the label on the side of the control unit CSA Certification No LR 60486 Load No 7 FCC and IC Information C 3 Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Industrie Canada et la r paration L tiquette du minist re des Industrie Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le Minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce m teriel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communication Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de peuvent etre prolonges au moyen d un dispositif homologue de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l enterprise utilis s pour un service individuel ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositi
206. d The PARTNER MAIL VS system also answers calls received outside of business hours and prompts callers to leave a message in the receptionist s mailbox This example also includes two user extensions X and Y which are not automatically covered by the PARTNER MAIL VS system This allows the receptionist to give the caller more personalized service if the receptionist transfers a call to extension X or Y and that extension does not answer the call returns to the receptionist The receptionist can then take a message or send the call to the extension s mailbox if the caller prefers 4 24 Using Auxiliary Equipment PARTNER MAIL VS System Lin s qp 3 Ext z1 Ext z2 f Ext not automatically covered by M Ext Y the PARTNER MAIL VS System Ext 10 Receptionists Desk Figure 4 14 Delayed Call Handling To Use Follow the instructions packaged with the PARTNER MAIL VS system to install it During normal business hours the PARTNER MAIL VS system uses delayed call handling the receptionist picks up all calls at extension 10 If the receptionist cannot answer within four rings the system routes the call to the PARTNER MAIL VS system where the day menu plays to the caller Outside of business hours when Night Service is activated at extension 10 outside calls are answered directly by the PARTNER MAIL VS system Any user who is in the office can pick up calls before the PART
207. d out whether they send a hold release signal If the local phone company does not send a hold release signal or if they do but the problem still occurs call the hotline All Calls Disconnected Possible Cause 1 You just ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure What to do This is normal behavior after running Restore Programming 125 the system resets itself In the future warn users before beginning the restore or perform the restore during nonbusiness hours If you did not run Restore Programming 125 go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Power was interrupted to the control unit What to do Make sure the control units power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the on off switch is in the ON position O if you have a 5 Slot carrier m Ifthe green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected m lf the green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the hotline m lf the green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 in All Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights m If any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the hotline n the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 24 Troubleshooting All Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 Control unit is not receiving power
208. ddition you can assign all extensions in the system to one group this is especially useful for making paging announcements to all employees Do not assign extensions that connect auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems fax machines answering machines hotline phones to a Call Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones or doorphones or extensions assigned as External Hotline phones ing Group To create a Calling Group 1 Press or 11 Feature 0 O System Program System Program A 0 2 at extension 10 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 For example to select group At the 1 progra 1 press 1 Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be mmed For example to select extension 31 dial 3 1 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays 5 46 Calling Group Extensions 502 5 6 At this point m o program another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m o program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat Steps 2 through 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Calling Group Extensions
209. dditionally Simultaneous Paginaliets users make announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of idle system phones belonging to Calling Group 1 m Night Service Group Extensions 504 assigns extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is activated at extension 10 calls ring immediately at Night Service extensions regardless of how they ring at other times only the lines assigned to an extension will ring m Hunt Group Extensions 505 assigns extensions to one of seven Hunt Groups Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system A Hunt Group lets users ring or voice signal the first available nonbusy extension in that group If a ringing call is not answered the system tries each available extension in turn until the call is answered If a voice signaled call is not answered the call does not keep hunting Also usclGroup Call Distribution 206 to assign outside lines to a Hunt Group if you want outside calls to ring directly into a group Programming 2 11 Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment The following programming procedures help you manage auxiliary equipment See Chapter 4 for more information about auxiliary equipment configurations or refer to Chapter 5 for details on using the procedure m Fax Machine Extensions 42601 identifies extensions to which fax machines are connected m The music on hold feature uses the following procedures Music on H
210. dicator Lights when someone signals you with the Message Light On feature or if you have a voice messaging system when you have a message in your mailbox Volume Control Buttons Press to decrease or C3 to increase the volume as follows To adjust ringer volume press while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle To adjust speaker volume press while listening to a call through the speaker To adjust handset volume press while listening through the handset o adjust background music volume press while listening to music through the phone s speaker To adjust the display contrast on the PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D phones press X then to decrease the brightness or C3 to increase the brightness while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle Learning About Telephones 3 3 Lights Each line button has a green light and a red light The meaning of these lights varies depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line is programmed with a system feature or is programmed for Auto Dialing an extension number Intercom Auto Dial button Auto Dial buttons for fax extensions show additional information these Fax Management buttons are described in Chapter 4 When a phone is in information about programmed settings see programming mode the lights show Chapter 2 for details Table 3 1 shows the meanings of the various light patterns for each possible button
211. djust the volume of Music On Hold using Music On Hold Volume 614 m f Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active and Music On Hold is Active transferred callers hear music on hold until the call is answered m f Music On Hold is Active users with system phones with speakers can play Background Music through their phones speakers m f the receptionist at extension 10 uses the Wake Up Service Button 115 to schedule wake up calls the recipients hear music on hold when they answer their wake up calls Considerations m f Music On Hold is Not Active or if no audio source is connected callers on hold hear silence m The audio source must be connected to the control unit using an RCA phono plug The MUSIC ON HOLD input jack accepts a maximum input of 2 Volts at 50 Kohms For more information see the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide m f the audio source develops trouble such as a bad tape you can quickly turn it off by changing the Music On Hold setting to Not Active until you are able to solve the problem m The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Accordingly in order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives The Magic on Hold system available from Lucent Technologies includes the required license for the first year This license must be r
212. do Press the volume control button while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle m lf the phone rings increasingly louder the problem is solved m lf the phone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding feature is turned on What to do Check to see if Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on m f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension m f Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate m If Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work m f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Phone is faulty What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone Then plug the cord into a phone that you know rings properly m If the replacement phone rings properly the problem phone is defective Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement m f the replacement phone does not ring properly call the hotline nthe continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the contine
213. ds a maximum of either 15 or 24 digits depending on the setting of SMDR Output Format 610 The Number field in Figure 4 5 is set to hold 24 digits A character prints as the last digit of a dialed number if the called party hangs up before the system user a prints if the number of digits dialed exceeds the 15 or 24 digits that this field can hold If both of these conditions occur the takes precedence For an incoming call IN appears unless the system is set up to receive Caller ID information In that case telephone numbers of incoming calls on lines with Caller ID service print in this field See Caller ID in Chapter 5 for more information m Duration The duration of the call is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds This is the total time of the call including any time the call is on hold If an incoming call lasts less than one second this field contains all zeroes m Line Number This is the outside line used to make or receive the call m Station Extension This usually is the extension that answered or placed the call For redirected incoming calls the last extension on the call is shown on the report as follows Fortransferred incoming calls the destination extension Fortransferred outgoing calls the originator extension 4 10 Using Auxiliary Equipment For pickup calls the extension picking up the call For f
214. dure or Prev Procedure PRESS Next Data or Prev Data NOTE Procedures 399 609 and 728 shown below in dashed boxes are skipped when cycling EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBER LIST DIAL 406 DIAL a list entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS PRESS to remove a list entry PRESS to program another list entry ALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS p 5 10 DIAL 407 DIAL alist number 1 8 DIAL alist entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS PRESS to remove a list entry PRESS to program another list entry To program another list PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new list number and repeat above steps System Speed Dial Numbers p 5 175 To program a number To remove a number mode DIAL a three digit code 600 699 DIAL the telephone number up to 28 d including special characters see To mark it to override restrictions dial before the telephone number To program another number or to change a number repeat PRESS 0 to exit programming mode PRESS code 600 699 PRESS TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING PRESS DIAL 408 p 5 9 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL a list number 1 8 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS to assign another list To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure ente
215. e Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 84 Forced Account Code List 409 Group Call Distribution 206 Description This System Programming procedure assigns outside lines to Hunt Groups Doing so allows outside calls to ring directly into a Hunt Group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist You can assign lines to Hunt Groups 1 7 Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system Related Features m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions to Hunt Groups If you assign lines to Hunt Group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service you may want to adjust when the lines should ring in the group See VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Schedule 507 for more information If you are using a voice messaging system you have two Group Call Distribution options f you want Automated Attendant Service for some or all lines Assign setting 1 those lines to Hunt Group 7 f you want calls to route directly to the voice mailbox of a specific user after four rings choose VMS Line Cover setting 3 for those lines and assign a line owner in the voice messaging system For more information about voice messaging system options refer to the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system As an alternative to the VMS Line Cover setting you can use Line Coverage Extension 208 with VMS Cover This provide
216. e automatically set to select intercom lines first You can use Message Light On with the doorphone for example to turn on the doorphone s light as a prearranged signal to a delivery person provided the doorphone is connected to a PARTNER ACS processor module or to an R3 1 206 or later module in a system that is equipped with a PARTNER ACS processor module You can wire a Contact Closure on the Contact Closure Adjunct to activate an electronic lock on the door with the doorphone Then use Contact Closure Group 612 to assign extensions to control the door lock Use Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to specify how long the Contact Closure remains active when it is activated Users in the Contact Closure Group can use the Contact Closure dial code to activate the Contact Closure or they can program the dial code on a button on their phones Considerations An extension cannot be used for a doorphone and a hotline at the same time However hotlines and doorphones can have the same alert extensions You cannot assign doorphones to the first two extensions on each module 10 11 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 or 37 Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from doorphone extensions You cannot bridge two doorphones together Valid Entries Extensions 12 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 None Assigned W Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 5 71 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location
217. e 81 press 1 If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code the display reads Blank 4 Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it At this point m To program another Personal Speed Dial number start from Step 3 m To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the two digit code m Toremove a Personal Speed Dial number enter the number s two digit code and press once 6 Continue programming or exit programming mode Using System Phone You can lift the handset or press before dialing 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and the two digit line number Press Feature Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 If you did not specify an outside line the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display phone Standard Phone You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 To dial a programmed Personal Speed Dial number 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number Personal Speed Dial Numbers 5 143 Pickup Group Extensions 501 Descri
218. e Auto Dial button or and the two or three digit Speed Dial code Stop cannot be programmed from an ML C 6 or a TransTalk 9000 series phone since it has no button Sends touch tones over a rotary line to electronic equipment such as answering machines and bank computers Special characters cannot be used when dialing a number manually Examples m Pause To call an answering machine at 555 0529 wait 4 5 seconds then dial 321 to retrieve messages enter 0 2 9 Held Hold Hold 3 2 m Recall Centrex Feature Button The following entry shows how to program an Auto Dial button with a Centrex feature that you use while on a call for which the feature access code is 32 This example includes a Recall signal to send a switchhook flash to the Centrex system when you are already on a call You can store a Recall signal by pressing Sekr but only if it is the first character stored It also includes a 1 5 second pause which you insert by pressing Hold to allow time to get a new Centrex dial tone 3 Special Dialing Functions 5 161 m Stop Your local bank by phone service requires that you enter a password before the account number To program a Personal Speed Dial number or an Auto Dial button to call the bank at 555 7898 include a stop for manually entering the password and continue with the account number 679 88 enter 5 5 8 C 8 9 8 vic urA 6 7 9 8 8
219. e Group 61 2 for that Contact Closure m When a users extension is included in the appropriate Contact Closure Group the user can then use Contact Closure to activate the contact closure device Valid Entries 1 1 Second On 2 3 Seconds On W 3 5 Seconds On 4 Toggle Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To specify the Operation Type for a Contact Closure 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program H 1 3 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Contact Number prompt enter the number 1 or 2 for the Contact Closure For example to specify Contact Closure 1 press 7 The display shows the current setting for that contact closure 3 Press Next Data or Prev Data until the appropriate value displays or press to return to the default setting 4 Toassign the Operation Type for the other Contact Closure press or Prev item and repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 54 Contact Closure Operation Type 613 Copy Settings 399 Description This System Programming procedure copies all of the following settings from one extension to another 301 Line Assignment 302 Line Access Restriction 303 Display Language 304 Automatic Extension Privacy 305 Abbreviated Ringing 307 Forced Account Code Entry 308 Distinctive Rin
220. e beginning of a dialing sequence the system s number restrictions will still work properly with restriction checking resetting as often as necessary For example 67 705552539 could be dialed to block Caller ID information and to turn off Call Waiting the system would still check to see whether the 555 2539 number is restricted Second Dial Tone After a star code is dialed some Central Offices respond by providing a second dial tone as a prompt for the caller to enter more digits Usually the second dial tone is provided immediately but if the tone is delayed the caller should wait for the dial tone before continuing to dial The system may not recognize the numbers dialed before the second dial tone which may cause the call to be misrouted You can use the Star Code Dial Delay setting to force a delay in Auto Dialed calls after the star code so that the system waits to dial the rest of the digits until the second dial tone begins You can program an automatic pause of O to 5 seconds after each star code that is autodialed whether from a touch tone or a rotary phone Star Code Dial Delay 410 5 163 Related Features m You can include star codes in Allowed Phone Number Lists and Disallowed Phone Number Lists Star Code Dial Delay settings apply to Auto Dialing Last Number Redial Personal Speed Dial Numbers Save Number Redial and Dial Numbers m f Dial Mode 4201 is set to Rotary star codes are entered by dialing
221. e on and off Additionally if Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using To program a System Password 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 8 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Set System Password Data sss serves Enter a four digit password or press to delete the existing password Select another procedure or exit programming mode Before lifting the handset or turning on the speaker at a PARTNER or MLS model phone press Hold Enter the password The System Password does not appear on display phones Press an outside line button or press and a two digit line number and lift the handset Dial the number The password is in effect until you hang up the phone System Password 403 5 171 System Release Status F59 Description When calling for customer support you need to know the release level of your system This feature enables you to determine that information at any
222. e phone type on that extension can be programmed with a name through Centralized Telephone Programming If users want to program their own extension name they must have a system display phone at their extension m Only extension numbers not names are printed on SMDR reports m You should program Extension Name Display when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features If you want to program both Extension Name Display and Automatic Line Selection which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display Valid Entries Up to 20 characters including letters A Z numbers 0 9 and blank spaces See Table 5 1 below for the corresponding codes Note that only the first 12 characters appear on MLS model phones Table 5 1 Character Codes Letters Numbers A 21 N 62 blank 11 B 22 0 63 0 00 C 23 P 71 1 10 D 31 Q 72 2 20 E 32 Rs 73 3 30 F 33 S 74 4 240 G 41 T 81 5 50 H 42 U 82 6 60 2 43 V 83 f 70 J 51 W 91 8 80 K 52 X292 9 90 L 53 Y 93 M 61 Z 94 5 76 Extension Name Display Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign a name to an extension 1 Press F
223. e system assigns two lines and six extensions for the ACS processor module the system assigns three lines and eight extensions for each 400 module the system assigns four lines The system numbers lines and extensions consecutively from left to right in a 2 Slot carrier beginning with the ACS processor module in the leftmost slot in a 5 Slot carrier the numbering also begins with the ACS processor module in the center slot and then moves to the leftmost module and continues consecutively from left to right Figure 2 1 shows the numbering scheme for a PARTNER ACS stand alone configuration for a 2 Slot carrier and for a 5 Slot carrier each with the system configured for maximum lines Figure 2 2 shows the numbering scheme for a PARTNER ACS stand alone configuration for a 2 Slot carrier and for a 5 Slot carrier each with the system configured for maximum extensions However your system can have any number of lines or extensions up to the maximum Stand Alone 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier ACS ACS ACS Processor Processor 400 Processor Module Module Module 206 Modules Module 400 Modules ta Line Jacks Line Line Jacks Jacks 19 25 Extension 20 26 Jacks 21 27 Extension Jacks Li 28 23 29
224. e the setup shown in Figure 4 12 This setup makes line A the primary modem line but keeps the line available for users at other extensions when all other lines are busy Modem Line A Lines Figure 4 12 Send and Receive Modem To Use Calls on the modem line line A ring only at extension X Also line A is the ast line selected by other extensions so the modem line is unavailable for the modem only when all other lines in the system are being used To Program Jp Use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A For extension X set Automatic Line Selection to select outside lines first line A selected first For all other extensions set Automatic Line Selection so that line A is the last line in the select sequence That way the modem line is used for outgoing voice calls only when all other lines are busy Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Immediate Ring Set all other lines assigned to extension X to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 21 Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment You can set up modems fax machines
225. e value displays At this point m To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m o program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 144 Pickup Group Extensions 501 Privacy F07 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn Privacy on and off preventing or allowing other users to join calls at the user s extension as needed Related Procedures IfK Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is Assigned for an extension that extension normally is private However if a user sometimes needs to have co workers join conversations the user can program a Privacy button to turn Privacy on and off as needed Once a Privacy button is programmed the user must use the button to turn Privacy on and off even though Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is Assigned Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is appropriate for use with standard phones Privacy applies to active calls any user can retrieve a held call unless the call is placed on hold with Exclusive Hold If you have Caller ID you can use Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your call and from accessing the Caller ID informatio
226. eature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press 1 2 3 Press left Intercom For extension 12 the display reads 12 Enter Extension Name If a name was assigned previously to this extension that name displays instead 4 Enter the two digit code for each character you want to enter See Table 5 1 for codes For example to enter the name Andy press 6 2 OG The display reads 12 ANDY 5 fyou make a mistake you can press to clear the display Repeat Step 4 to enter the correct name 6 Program a button for this extension or exit programming mode Extension Name Display 5 77 External Hotline 311 Description This procedure applies only to standard phones This System Programming procedure identifies an external hotline extension When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline a predetermined outside number is dialed automatically The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau The external hotline must be a standard phone not a system phone After you identify an external hotline extension you must store the external phone number for the hotline extension as Personal Speed Dial code 80 Both procedures are included in Programming on the next page Related Features Use Hotline 2603 to ident
227. eatures An extension must be programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 for the Forced Account Code List to have any effect m j Account Code Entry provides instructions for entering forced account codes Considerations If you do not create a Forced Account Code List the system does not verify the account codes dialed at extensions that are required to enter them To validate an account code the system compares the first six digits of a user entered account code to the entries on the Forced Account Code List For a match to be successful the user must dial at least the account code s associated list entry even though the user can dial up to 16 digits for an account code If the system identifies a match the user can dial an outside number If no match occurs the user is denied access to an outside line and must re enter a valid account code to dial out Each list entry can include up to six digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display Valid Entries Up to 6 digits including 0 9 and any single digit Examples m Expanded Account Codes Users can enter more than the required digits for an account code for tracking purposes For example a Customer Service Department s account code is 123 Representatives in the department must dial at least 123 to get an outside line but can enter aaditional digits to tr
228. ecial programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 3 1 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging system For example to program extension 11 press 1 3 Toassign or unassign Automatic VMS Cover press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic VMS Cover 310 5 23 Background Music F19 Description This feature is available only on system phones with speakers This feature provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user s work area Background Music plays the recorded material from the Music On Hold audio source Related Features Background Music is available only if Music On Hold 602 is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module Considerations m The Background Music feature broadcasts music over telephone lines The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Accordingly in order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by
229. eed Dial numbers that override dialing restrictions mark them by entering a star x before the phone number Note that Marked System Speed Dial Numbers appear on the SMDR call report as Ennn where nnn is the Speed Dial code For more information about SMDR see Call Reports in Chapter 4 A Marked System Speed Dial number can begin with a star code To enter it press X followed by the star code and the phone number For example press GJ 6G9 6 2 2 6 6 2 0 0 QD System Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed on Auto Dial buttons System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed only from extension 10 or 11 but can be used from any extension Refer to a completed System Speed Dial form for the list of numbers to be programmed After programming the numbers distribute a copy of the completed form to users See Appendix D for a blank form If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code and one or more pauses if available in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system System Speed Dial Numbers 5 175 If you program 911 or other emergency numbers as Speed Dial numbers and want to place test calls you should 1 perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening and 2 remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the re
230. elated Features Backup Programming Automatic 123 and Backup Programming Manual 124 do not backup up the System Day m Restore Programming 125 does not restore the System Day Considerations Be sure that the System Day is set correctly before using backup or restore procedures Valid Entries 1 Sunday v 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the System Day 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 A at extension 10 or 11 2 Change the day by entering a new setting number as listed in Valid Entries above For example to set the day to Tuesday press until the display reads System Day 3 Tuesday 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 170 System Day 102 System Password 403 Description This feature is available only on PARTNER and MLS model phones This System Programming procedure defines a four digit password that users can enter from PARTNER and MLS model phones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Related Features m he SE EI overrides all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction 302 m Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Servic
231. em Date 101 Chapter 5 Feature Reference provides comprehensive information about each feature with the features arranged in alphabetical order For example if you see a reference to System Date 41101 you can look it up in Chapter 5 for details Product Safety Statements Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a A A CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided A WARNING Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal personal injury if the hazard is not avoided How to Comment on This Guide A feedback form is located at the end of this guide after the appendixes If the form is missing send your comments and recommendations for changes to Publications Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W 226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 FAX 1 908 953 6912 vi About This Guide Overview Contents Important Safety Instructions Features and Capabilities System Components Configurations System Modules System Batteries PC Card Slots System Capacity Telephones System Telephones Intercom Autodialers Standard Telephones Auxiliary Equipment m Requirements m Connecting Standard Devices l i Important Safety Instructions A WARNING The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be followed when using your telephone equipment 1 2 3
232. en active on a call Outgoing Call Restriction 4401 to prevent the extension from making certain types of outgoing calls on all system lines 2 4 Programming m Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more Disallowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 44404 to create the lists of outside numbers that extensions cannot dial m Allowed List Assignments 74408 to assign one or more Allowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Pickup Group Extensions 25501 Calling Group Extensions 502 44505 to place the extension in any of these groups See Setting Up Groups of Extensions later in this chapter for more information Fax Machine Extensions 26601 Doorphone Extension 604 and 44605 Doorphone Alert Extensions 4606 AA Extensions 607 External Hotline 4311 Jor Hotline 603 to identify the extension as one of these equipment types later in this chapter provides an overview of the procedures you use for setting up devices such as voice messaging systems and call reporting devices Also Chapter 4 provides detailed information and example applications for auxiliary equipment Copy Settings The recommended way to set up your system is to program one extension for each type of phone in the system then
233. en listen for one of the following responses Ifyou hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the line button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up Ifyou hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the line button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller Ifyou hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller m otransfer a call with one button touch While on a call press the Auto Dial button pr
234. en they see this message You should replace the batteries within 45 days of seeing the message NOTE The message may flicker on and off as the batteries approach the low power threshhold It is recommended that you change the batteries in the processor module every year even if the system has not yet displayed the ReplaceSysBat W Power On message Choose good quality alkaline batteries Use the following procedure to replace the batteries 1 Locate the battery compartment at the bottom of the PARTNER ACS processor module below the extension jacks see Figure 6 1 Push gently on the battery icon the locking latch and slide the battery icon up to cover the plus icon Battery Compartment Locking Latch ET d Locked Position Unlocked Position Figure 6 1 Battery Compartment PARTNER Advanced Communications System Processor Module Troubleshooting 6 3 2 Remove the battery assembly by gently pulling the tab at the bottom of the battery compartment cover see Figure 6 2 Tab Figure 6 2 Removing the Battery Assembly 3 Pull the batteries straight out of the metal spring clips see Figure 6 3 and dispose of the batteries properly A CAUTION Do not dispose of batteries in fire Do not recharge disassemble install backwards or mix with used or other battery types batteries may explode or leak and cause a burn injury Pull to rem
235. enewed annually Valid Entries 1 Active W 2 Not Active Music On Hold 602 5 129 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the setting of the MUSIC ON HOLD jack 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 6 2 at extension 10 or 11 2 Toactivate or deactivate the MUSIC ON HOLD jack press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 130 Music On Hold 602 Music On Hold Volume 614 Description This System Programming procedure allows you to select one of seven volume settings for the external music source provided through the MUSIC ON HOLD jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module This setting is system wide Related Features Music On Hold 602 activates or deactivates the MUSIC ON HOLD jack on the processor module Considerations Changes to the Music On Hold Volume setting will have immediate effect on all calls currently receiving Music On Hold treatment Valid Entries 1 E lowest volume 2 NH 3 NEN 4 EEEE o 5 EEE 6 BHEHHEH 7 mmmmmum highest volume Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Music On Hold
236. ensions to a Hunt Group 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program O 5 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 7 For example to select group 1 press 7 A display similar to the following appears Hunt Group 1 Extension Enter the desired extension number For example to select extension 31 press 1 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays At this point m To assign or unassign another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m o program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 102 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Intercom Dial Tone 309 Description This System Programming procedure determines the type of dial tone that the system provides at an extension It may be necessary to change this setting to Machine outside line dial tone for an autodialing device such as a fax or modem that has trouble making calls For example if you have a modem that checks for outside line dial tone before dialing use this procedure to change from Regular to Machine dial tone Considerations Use this procedure only if an autodialing device has trouble making calls Valid Entries 1 Regular dialtone v 2 M
237. er 10 41 For example to answer a call ringing at extension 23 press left 8 3 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press 8 and the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked Standard Phone il Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 plus the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked 5 36 Call Pickup I6XX Call Waiting 316 Description This feature applies only to standard phones This System Programming procedure specifies standard phone extensions that are eligible for Call Waiting Users who receive a call waiting tone hear two beeps when they are on a call to indicate a second incoming intercom transferred or outside call The user can press the switchhook or Recall or Flash button if available to put the current call on hold and retrieve the second call To return to the first call the user simply presses the switchhook again Related Features m For instructions for using Call Waiting see Answering Calls m Call Waiting does not apply to parked calls See Call Park Considerations m This feature is distinct from the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature If you use this system feature do not use your local telephone company s Call Waiting feature m The Call Waiting tone two
238. er When a customer uses the hotline phone the butcher s phone rings Alternatively if the loudspeaker paging system is programmed as the alert extension a sales clerk could request a price check over the loudspeaker simply by lifting the handset of the hotline phone Hotline 603 5 99 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify a hotline extension and its alert extension 1 5 Using Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 6 O 3 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the hotline extension number see Valid Entries on the previous page For example to program extension 33 as the hotline press 3 3 At the Data prompt enter the alert extension number see Valid Entries Jon the previous page For example to program extension 32 as the alert extension press 3 Z A display similar to the following appears Internal Hotline Ext 33 Data 32 At this point m Tochange the hotline and alert extension numbers you just entered repeat Steps 2 and 3 m To delete the existing hotline and alert extension numbers press Remove m To identify another hotline and alert extension pair press Or until the new hotline extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit prog
239. er button for this extension or exit programming mode Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL 5 57 Using System Phone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press a button programmed with Direct Line Pickup Active Line then dial the two digit line number 01 15 of the line you want to pick up or join or press 6 8 and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 8 and the two digit line number 01 15 of the line you want to pick up or join 5 58 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Direct Line Pickup Idle Line ISLL Description This feature allows users to access a specific outside line where LL is a line number from 01 15 when the line is not in use This feature is useful for accessing a line that is not assigned to the phone Related Features m Ifa lineis in use users cannot access it with this feature they hear busy tone For information about accessing a ringing or held call or joining a call in progress see Direct Line Pickup Active Line m f Line Access Restriction 2302 is set to No Access or In Only for a line assigned to an extension a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to access that line to place a call Considerations You can program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button on a system phone to
240. er each call is completed For outgoing calls the system records information for each call that lasts more than 10 seconds The timing begins when you lift the handset or press to access an outside line For incoming calls the timing begins when the call is answered Timing stops when the call is disconnected The system sends the information through a 1200 baud serial interface to either a serial printer or a call accounting device The device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the processor module Programming Use the following programming procedures for call reporting m SMDR Record Type 7608 to specify the type of calls that you want to record for call reporting either all calls or outgoing calls only m SMDR Top of Page 609 to notify the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page m SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report Before changing the output format to 24 digits check the documentation for your call accounting device to verify that this operation is supported m Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to making outside calls and Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes m Display Language 2303 to specify the language to be used for display messages The call report header is printed in the
241. ered by a Service Protection Plan the means of warranty fulfillment on the product is to ship the replacement item to you or at Lucent Technologies discretion to dispatch a technician to repair or replace the product Lucent Technologies OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE Lucent Technologies ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND DEALERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Limitation of Liability Except as provided below the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims losses damages or expenses from any cause whatsoever including acts or omissions of third parties regardless of the form of action whether in contract tort or otherwise shall not exceed the lesser of 1 the direct damages proven or 2 the repair cost replacement cost license fee annual rental charge or purchase price as the case may be of the equipment that directly gives rise to the claim Except as provided below Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any incidental special reliance consequential or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment As used in this paragraph consequential damages include but are not limited to the following lost profits lost revenues and
242. erns of your local telephone company Related Features This procedure affects the operation of dialing restrictions and permissions For more information see Allowed Phone Number Lists 24407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Valid Entries 1 2 Oor 1 required before Area Code and Number W 2 Area Code and Number Only Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Toll Call Prefix setting 1 Press Feature System Program System Program 4 C A at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value displays Select another procedure or exit programming mode Toll Call Prefix 402 5 179 Touch Tone Enable F08 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user send touch tone signals on an outside call over a rotary line For example a user may need to dial touch tone digits while on a call to a bank by phone service Related Procedures You must use Dial Mode 2201 to identify rotary lines to the system To activate this feature from within a number stored on an Auto Dial button or as part of a Speed Dial number press when storing the number see Special Dialing Functions Considerations This feature is needed only when dialing on a rotary line
243. ers emergency phone numbers 5 73 5 74 faxmachine for j4 16 lineaccess 2 9 5 108 5 109 locking an extension long distance for 5 179 outgoing calls types oe CF NENNEN outside lines controling alls on overriding 2 PBX Centrex services T I 1 star codes with summary of 2 812 10 SSCS Retrieving aheldcall 5 96 Ring on Transfer 119 5 Ring Distinctive 308 Ringer Equivalence Number REN Ringer volume controls 3 3 Ringing Abbreviated 305 Line 5 115 5 116 1 Transfer 3 5 3 9 b 185 1 Ringing patterns standard phones 3 9 O system phones Ringing Idle Line Preference se Rings VMS Cover 117 5 190 O Rotary dial 5 56 5 153 0 a ee Automatic Line Selection lines phones 1 7 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 S SAC see Send All Calls Safety instructions requirements Save NumberRedial 5 154 Self Service Center on the Internet Customer Send All Calls 5 155 Setup initial 2 3 J2 5 Sharinganextension 3 12 Cd Simultaneous Paging SMDR see Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Output Format 610 descripion 5 158 Cd specificationsJA 2 Cd SMDR Record Type 608 SMDR Top of Page 609 Speaker on standard phoneJ3 10 on system phone 3 3 3 5 3 7 Speaker Spkr button 3 3 1 1 1 Speakerphone
244. es will be MAN and 5 150 Restore Programming 125 AUTO respectively You cannot use these files for a restore they will generate the error message Empty File after you press in Step 6 Press to start the restore If the system detects an error before beginning the restore the bottom line of the display shows one of the following messages Insert Card Or Insert Valid Card Bad File Or Bad File Try Again Incompat Version Or Incompatible Versions Empty File See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more information about these messages Before removing or inserting a Backup Restore PC Card be sure to power down the system If the system does not detect an error the restore begins When the restore has completed successfully the bottom line of the display shows Restore Complete for two seconds Then the system resets itself which means that all calls in progress are disconnected but no system settings are lost You are no longer in System Programming mode If the restore is not successful the display shows Restore Failedor Restore Failed Try Again fortwo seconds All calls that were in progress are disconnected and all of the system and telephone programming settings revert to the default settings You are no longer in System Programming mode Try the restore again Restore Programming 125 5 151 Ring on Transfer 119 Description This System Programming procedure lets
245. es with your system If it does not apply go to the next section System Programming Options m PBX services are provided by a private telephone switch m Centrex services are provided by your local telephone company from a Central Office CO outside your premises These services include the Centrex lines connected to your control unit modules and some set of features such as hold conference or transfer that are available on those lines Centrex services may be offered in your area under a different name For specific Centrex features to be available to you your company must subscribe to those features For specific information about using Centrex see the Centrex documentation provided by your local telephone company Some of the issues you should consider when setting up your system to work effectively behind a PBX or Centrex system are discussed below Chapter 5 explains how to use the programming procedures discussed here Recall Setting To set up your equipment to work properly with a PBX or Centrex system first set Recall Timer Duration 107 to match the setting used by your PBX or Centrex system usually 800 msec or 32 This setting affects the length of a Recall signal sent by the control unit to access PBX or Centrex services Dialing Restrictions Outgoing Call Restriction 401 is an equipment restriction intended to limit an extension s dialing to inside calls only using the buttons on system phones or to
246. evices SMDR in Chapter 4 Valid Entries 1 All Calls outgoing and incoming W 2 Outgoing Only Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify the type of calls to include for call reporting 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program 6 8 at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value displays Select another procedure or exit programming mode SMDR Record Type 608 5 159 SMDR Top Of Page 609 Description Call Reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure notifies the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page Use this feature after inserting paper clearing a jam or to print a new header after changing SMDR Output Format When this feature is used the system prints a new call report header Related Features m You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports m You can use SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report m You can use Display Language 303 to specify the language in which the call report page header should print Considerations m This feature requi
247. extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If you hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller Transferring Calls 5 187 VMS Cover F15 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system It is available only on system phones This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn VMS Cover on and off routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for their extension to the Call Ans
248. f homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communication ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur m teriel des jacks d abonn sauf dans les cas pr cis pr vus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es par un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le foumisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales A AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir racours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou un electrician selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign chaque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surcharge le pourcentage de la charge totale
249. f the receptionist should answer some lines only when a user does not pick up set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to Delayed Ring set the lines assigned at each user s extension to Immediate Ring m No Answering f some lines should not be picked up by the receptionist at all either set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to No Ring or simply use Line Assignment 301 to remove those lines from extension 10 In either case set Line Access Restriction 302 to No Access for those lines at extension 10 to prevent the receptionist from using Direct Line Pickup to access those lines Button Programming The PARTNER 34D phone shown in illustrates the following programmed buttons in addition to some other system features m Extension Numbers Auto Dial buttons are programmed for extensions 11 through 28 The receptionist can use these buttons to dial or transfer calls to the extensions with one touch In addition the lights of these Auto Dial buttons show the status of the extension so the receptionist can tell whether the phone at the extension is idle no lights on busy red on calling the receptionist green flash manually signaling the receptionist green flutter or ringing back after the receptionist transferred a call green flutter m Manual Signaling Manual Signaling button labeled MS Bill is programmed to signal the target extension When the button is pressed the user at the target exten
250. g 309 Intercom Dial Tone 310 Automatic VMS Cover 311 External Hotline 312 Voice Interrupt On Busy 316 Call Waiting Considerations 401 Outgoing Call Restriction 405 Disallowed List Assignments 408 Allowed List Assignments 501 Pickup Group Extensions 502 Calling Group Extensions 504 Night Service Group 505 Hunt Group Extensions 601 Fax Machine Extensions 607 AA Extensions 612 Contact Closure Group Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing m This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code 399 directly m For each type of phone program one extension then use this procedure to copy the programming from that extension to the others with the same number of line buttons for example from a PARTNER 18D phone to a PARTNER 18 phone Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To copy the programmed settings from one extension to another of the same type 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 9 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the source extension to copy from For example to copy the current settings from extension 18 press 8 3 Atthe Data prompt enter the target extension to copy to any extension except the source extension is valid
251. g and are prompted to enter digits to transfer to a specific extension or group without the assistance of the receptionist Valid Entries 1 Assigned for hunting to groups 1 6 or to group 7 for the voice messaging 2 system s Automated Attendant Service Not Assigned v 3 VMS Line Cover available only for Hunt Group 7 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To set up lines for Group Call Distribution 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 2 6 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 6 7 for the voice messaging system For example to select group 1 press 7 At the Line prompt enter the desired line number For example to select line 1 press 1 To assign or remove a line for groups 1 6 or to assign or remove a line or use VMS Line Cover for group 7 press until the appropriate value displays At this point m To program another line press Next item or Prev ttem until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 86 Group Call Distribution 206 Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G Description Thi
252. g the button An Auto Dial number can be stored on any programmable button a button with no line assigned on a system phone Related Features You can use the Auto Dial button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Park Message Light On Message Light Off Station Unlock Jand To set up a Fax Management button program the fax extension number on an Auto Dial button with lights Special light patterns on the Auto Dial button for the fax extension indicate fax machine status Chapter 4 provides more information about using alFax Management button Identify fax extensions using Fax Machine Extensions 601 You can include special functions such as a Pause in the Auto Dial number See Special Dialing Functions for more information An Auto Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting Considerations If you program an extension number on a button with lights the lights show calling activity at the extension see Lights in Chapter 3 You can connect an Intercom Autodialer to the system phones at extension 10 and 11 to have Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system Each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system phone or on the Intercom Autodialer for another extension in the system That button can be programmed for intercom ringing intercom voice sign
253. gn extensions to a Hunt Group m Set Transfer Return Rings 105 jto four or greater to ensure that calls continue hunting to other group extensions if the call is not answered m Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so that a call to your extension moves directly to the next available extension in the group m You can use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign outside lines to a Hunt Group Doing so allows outside calls on those lines to route directly into that Hunt Group instead of being transferred by the receptionist m Hunt Group calls are not eligible for VMS Cover m When using PARTNER MAIL Release 3 or later a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a Hunt Group mailbox Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group m Outside calls can be answered and transferred to a Hunt Group The voice messaging system and the auto attendant also can transfer calls to a Hunt Group m Calls cannot be transferred to a Hunt Group if all extensions in that group are busy m f only one extension in a Hunt Group is available and that extension does not answer an incoming call the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension after the programmed amount of transfer return rings 5 90 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G I 77G m You can program a Group Hunting button on a system phone to ring or
254. gnments Forced Account Code List Star Code Dial Delay Pickup Group Extensions Calling Group Extensions Night Service Button Night Service Group Extensions Hunt Group Extensions VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule Fax Machine Extensions Music on Hold Hotline Doorphone Extension 1 Doorphone Extension 2 Doorphone Alert Extensions AA Extensions SMDR Record Type SMDR Top of Page SMDR Output Format Contact Closure Group Contact Closure Operation Type Music On Hold Volume System Reset Programming Saved Dial Code Features FO1 F02 FO3 F04 FOS FOG FO7 FO8 FOOXX F10XX F11 XX XX F12 F18XX F13 XX Do Not Disturb Exclusive Hold Recall Save Number Redial Last Number Redial Conference Drop Privacy Touch Tone Enable Message Light On Message Light Off Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Account Code Entry Manual Signaling beep or ring Manual Signaling voice signal Intercom Dial Code Features I6XX I66G I68LL 170 1 70 IZG I 7G I77G I 77G IBLL Call Pickup Group Pickup Direct Line Pickup Active Line Loudspeaker Paging Simultaneous Paging Group Calling Ring Group Calling Page Group Hunting Ring Group Hunting Voice Signal Direct Line Pickup ldle Line F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F21 F22 F41 F42 F59 Voice Mailbox Transfer VMS Cover Caller ID Name Display Caller ID Inspect Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Background Music Station Lock Sta
255. grammable button with nohis PRESS Feature 1 8 p 5 195 VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER p 5 196 PRESS a programmable button PRESS System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE PRESS 0 0 PRESS 0 0 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES SETTINGS PRESS TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE PRESS Next Procedure or Prev Procedure PRESS Next Data or Prev Data DIAL and three digit procedure code NOTE Procedures 399 609 TO RETURN TO FACTORY PRESS E eas and 728 shown below in dashed SETTING Example 1 for System Date poxes are skipped when cycling SYSTEM DATE DIAL 101 DIAL the date in MMDDYY form p 5 169 SYSTEM DAY DIAL 102 DIAL 1 Sunday 5 Thursday 2 Monday 6 Friday 3 Tuesday 7 Saturday 4 Wednesday p 5 170 SYSTEM TIME DIAL 103 DIAL the time in HHMM 24 hour military format p 5 178 NUMBER OF LINES See IMPORTANT below DIAL 104 DIAL two digits 01 15 for the number of outside lines to be assigned to every extension v 3 per ACS module V 2 per 206 module V 4 per 400 module p 5 136 TRANSFER RETURN RINGS DIAL 105 p 5 183 DIAL one digit 0 9 for the number of rings before the call returns v 4 rings O rings no return RECALL TIM
256. h the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following Means of Connection Connection to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C These USOCs must be ordered from your local telephone company FCC compliant line cords are provided with Line and Line Extension Modules for connecting to the telephone company provided USOC RJ11C jacks Use only FCC compliant line cords and jacks for these connections This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines Notification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number REN which can be found on the right hand side of the control unit The facility interface code which is O2LS2 You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s REN Information The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the same telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to incoming calls In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of
257. hat have programmable auto dial buttons last number redial buttons hold buttons and built in speakers You can use most of the system s dial code features from a feature phone and program them onto a feature phone button However there are some limitations to what these phones can do The capabilities of a feature phone are in the phone itself For example if you store a number on a feature phone s auto dial button that number is stored in the feature phone This is different from storing a number on a system phone s Auto Dial button When you program a button on a system phone the number is actually stored in the control unit Similarly when you press a hold button on a feature phone the call is held at the phone itself Callers will not hear the system s Music On Hold Other phones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line If you want to program an outside number on a feature phone s auto dial button you must add a 9 and one or more pauses if available before each outside number The 9 gets an outside line and each pause allows a few seconds to get an outside dial tone Note that the feature phone s last number redial button may not work for an outside call To redial the last number use the system s Last Number Redial feature by pressing 0 Learning About Telephones 3 11 Combination Extensions A combination extension is an extension with two devices connected to
258. hat the batteries are installed correctly and that they are new If the message is still displayed call the hotline In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 5 Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm If you use Backup Programming Automatic 123 and the automatic backup fails a Backup Failure Alarm message appears instead of the default day date time message on the top line of the telephone display at idle extensions 10 and 11 After correcting the problem that caused the failure you can clear the Backup Failure Alarm using the following procedure See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 1 2 3 The current setting is displayed 2 Press 3 to choose Option 3 Backup Alarm Cleared NOTE You cannot use Next Data or Prev Data in this procedure to choose Option 3 3 Exit programming mode NOTE Using Option 3 to clear a Backup Failure Alarm does not change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 123 It remains either Active or Not Active 6 6 Troubleshooting Problems with System Phones System Phone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer volume is set too low What to
259. he contacts will respond when activated Then users at eligible extensions can program a button on their phones or they can simply use to activate Contact Closure 1 or to activate Contact Closure 2 For example suppose Contact Closure 1 can release the door lock on the Deliveries door You program extension Y as an eligible extension for Contact Closure 1 using Contact Closure Group 612 and set the Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to 5 Seconds On When a delivery person uses the doorphone extension X to announce a package delivery the user at extension Y can use to activate Contact Closure 1 The lock on the Deliveries door will be released for five seconds enabling the delivery person to enter Programming Contact Closure Devices 1 Use Doorphone Extension 604 to assign Doorphone 1 to extension X 2 Use Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 to identify extension Y as an alert extension for Doorphone 1 3 Use Contact Closure Group 612 to assign extension Y to Contact Closure Group 1 This extension can activate Contact Closure 1 4 Use Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to set Contact Closure 1 to Option 3 5 Seconds On 4 12 Using Auxiliary Equipment Credit Card Scanners Many retail businesses and restaurants use credit card scanners to get instant approval of credit card purchases The system allows your credit card scanners to share the lines in your system as shown in Figure 4 7 You can insta
260. he user must have access to an outside line in order to dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Considerations m A line must be assigned to a button with lights If a line is assigned to a button without lights you cannot access that line nor can you program anything else on the button m You can assign multiple lines up to 15 to a standard phone but a single line phone can handle only one call at a time To make a call a user lifts the handset and dials 9 at the intercom dial tone the system selects the first available line based on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for the extension Alternatively the user can use Direct Line Pickup to access a specific line 5 110 Line Assignment 301 PARTNER 34D eee eee eH o o o H o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 73 SOA sce B g g ELZ 5C 13 u00 57 u02 o o o o o o BL 2 aL 3 al 4 BL HLe o o n o Ext Message Intercom Intercom PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 BLS aLe aLZ als alt sL21 sl3 C4 B E Ext Message Intercom Intercom PARTNER 6 sL3 amp L4 sL1 1 sl2 mi mi a oO Intercom Intercom Ext Message Figure 5 1 Default Li
261. her standard device or a system phone as long as the REN of the two devices together does not exceed 2 0 System phones have 0 0 REN For example you can connect a standard phone and an answering machine to the same extension An extension with two devices connected to it is called a combination extension You cannot connect two system phones on one extension The PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide provides installation instructions REN is a measure of the power it takes to ring a phone The typical home phone line supports 4 0 5 0 RENS each extension jack in your system handles up to 2 0 RENs 1 8 Overview Programming Contents Overview 2 1 Hardware Considerations 2 2 Initial System Setup 2 3 m Setting the System Clock 2 3 m Assigning Lines 2 4 m Customizing Extensions 2 4 m Copy Settings 2 5 Changing Settings after Installation 2 6 m Changing the System Clock 2 6 m Adding New Lines 2 6 m Adding New Extensions 2 6 m Swapping Extensions 2 6 Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services 2 7 m Recall Setting 2 7 m Dialing Restrictions 2 7 m Speed Dial and Auto Dial Numbers 2 7 System Programming Options 2 8 m Speed Dialing 2 8 m Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 2 8 Locking an Extension 2 8 Restricting Access to Outside Lines 2 9 Controlling Calls on Outside Lines 2 10 Overriding Dialing Restrictions 2 11 m Setting Up Groups of Extensions 2 11 m Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment 2 12 m
262. hich call should return if not answered V Extension transferring call PRESS to program another extension FORCED ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY DIAL 307 p 5 81 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to program another extension DISTINCTIVE RING DIAL 308 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 ActiveY 2 Not Active PRESS to program another extension p 5 67 INTERCOM DIAL TONE p 5 103 DIAL 309 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Regular V 2 Machine PRESS to program another extension AUTOMATIC VMS COVER DIAL 310 p 5 22 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to program another extension EXTERNAL HOTLINE DIAL 311 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to program another extension p 5 78 VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY DIAL 312 p 5 195 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to program another extension CALL WAITING DIAL 316 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to program another extension p 5 37 COPY SETTINGS p 5 55 DIAL 399 DIAL a source extension number PRESS 0 0 PRESS PRESS OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION DIAL 401 p 5 137 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 No Restriction v 2 Inside intercom Only 3 Local
263. hone alert extensions 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 6 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enterthe first alert extension number 10 41 For example to identify extension 10 press 1 3 Tochange the alert status press until the appropriate value displays To identify another alert extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 70 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Description Each of these System Programming procedures identifies an extension to which a doorphone is connected A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors You can connect up to two doorphones to the system use Doorphone 1 Extension 604 to identify the extension to which the first doorphone is connected and Doorphone 2 Extension 605 to identify the extension to which the second doorphone is connected Related Features You must use Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 to identify the extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed Each doorphone can signal any number of alert extensions To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the doorphone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the doorphone extension Automatic Line Selection for the doorphone extension will b
264. ht side and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the bottom and left side Locate in an area free of excess moisture corrosive gases dust and chemicals U S and Canada 90 130 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 prong outlet separate ground separately fused at 15 Amps Other countries 90 264 VAC 220 VAC fused at 10 Amps Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL 1459 A An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system B The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment C The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment Requirements for Out of Building Installation of a telephone or other standard tip ring device in another building requires the following In Range Out of Building IROB protectors to protect the control unit and device Installations from electrical surges System phone two Lucent Technologies IROB protectors Standard phone one Lucent Technologies IROB protector plus one carbon block protector Installation of a Con
265. hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously Answering Calls 5 13 Standard Phone If your standard phone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use this button whenever you are instructed to press the switchhook m o answer a call When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call m To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The call you are on is placed on hold and you are connected to the new call 2 Toreturn to the first call press the switchhook again 3 You can continue to press the switchhook to move back and forth between the two calls You cannot transfer either party conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active 5 14 Answering Calls Auto Dialing Description Auto Dial buttons can be programmed only on system phones This Telephone Programming procedure lets system phone users dial outside numbers extension numbers feature codes or account codes with a single touch by pressing a programmed button If an extension number is stored on an Auto Dial button the user can dial signal or transfer calls to the extension by pressin
266. ible Power Supply or UPS is also available to allow full equipment operation during a power failure Centrex or PBX operation support including one touch dialing of feature access codes on system phones Overview 1 1 Flexible dialing restrictions and permissions so you can control telephone activity and phone bills Special hospitality features that let Bed and Breakfast proprietors for example regulate phone use in guest rooms and schedule wake up calls for guests Easy to use programming procedures making it simple for you to manage your system and telephones System display phones provide messages and prompts during programming Two system programming extensions allowing you to program the system from one extension without interrupting call activity at the other programming extension usually the receptionist s extension Modular connections to the control unit making it easy to reconfigure your system or to add lines and or extensions as your business grows Direct connections for industry standard devices including most standard phones fax machines answering machines modems and credit card scanners Optional equipment support including doorphones Contact Closure Adjunct for example to release a door lock loudspeaker paging systems music on hold call reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR devices auto attendants extra alerts and PC Cards for Backup Restore or for
267. ician m Off Premises Range Extender OPRE allows you to connect a standard touch tone phone beyond 3 000 feet 915 meters in another building on the same continuous property It also allows you to use a special circuit from your local phone company to provide off premises station capability m Electromagnetic Interference EMI fillers allow you to block noise generated by a nearby radio station as well as most electrical devices m Caller ID devices allow you to store and process Caller ID information Although the system provides functionally integrated multi line Caller ID on system display phones you can connect other devices provided you subscribe to the service from your local phone company and connect the device directly to the Caller ID line You cannot install a Caller ID device directly to a PARTNER extension jack or to a combination extension jack Refer to Connecting Caller ID Devices in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for installation details To order auxiliary equipment refer to Product Ordering Information in Appendix B If a Device Has Trouble Two System Programming procedures can be used to adjust the system settings for auxiliary equipment installed at an extension if a device has trouble answering calls or dialing out If a device such as an answering machine does not pick up transferred or intercom calls you can use Distinctive Ring 308 to change the ringing so that
268. ide line If a forced account code is invalid the system denies access to an outside line to dial out the user must repeat the procedure for entering a forced account code Extensions programmed with this feature are restricted from dialing outside phone numbers on all lines at the extension including numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 unti an account code is entered If a Forced Account Code List exists the account code must match an entry on the list for the user to get an outside line Account codes can be entered manually or using System Speed Dial iNumbers Personal Speed Dial Numbers and Auto Dialing but not Marked System Speed Dial Numbers Automatic Line Selection does not apply for an extension programmed with this feature the user must manually select a line after entering an account code Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry to an External Hotline 311 extension If alSystem Password 2403 is required to override dialing restrictions for an extension users must enter it before entering the account code Considerations If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports See Call Reporting Devices SMDR in Chapter 4 for more information about call reporting For forced account code entry if a Forced Account Code List exists only valid account codes are printed on the call report Forced account codes are not required to answer incomi
269. iew CONTROL UNIT Optional Carriers Optional Devices for the control unit 5 Slot 2 Slot PARTNER ACS Carrier Carrier Processor Module 0 Serial Printer Contact Closure Jack te PC Card Slots 2 Power LED J PARTNER Paging System PAGE Jack MAIL VS Outside Line Jacks 3 g d E eee MUSIC ON HOLD Jack 3439 for RCA phono plug Extension Jacks 8 Fe Sa amp Call Accounting LE Terminal Basic or Plus ae Battery Compartment Al Contact Closure _ Adjunct SYSTEM PHONES Optional Modules d Backup Restore PC Card agic on Hold deck Optional Devices for extension jacks NAAN SSE A zi C2s I z PARTNER 34D Phone T with optional PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Lt Standard H PARTNER MAIL 0uch Tone ram j Voice Messaging none System TransTalk H Wireless j Phones H B B H Machine A Fax Machine 7 PARTNER 6 EE Phone A Alert Doorphone EF Module Remote PassageWay Administration Adapter PARTNER 189 Unit Phone Overview 1 3 Configurations
270. ify an internal hotline extension Use Line Assignment 301 to assign outside lines to the external hotline extension and Automatic Line Selection to set the extension to select outside lines first If your use of the external hotline requires immediate dialing of the programmed number dedicate a line for use by this extension do not assign the line to any other extension or use the line for any other purpose You can set Line Ringing to No Ring for all lines assigned to the external hotline to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the extension Make sure there are no call or line restrictions assigned to an external hotline because that will prevent the outside number from being dialed See Outgoing Call Restriction 2401 and Line Access Restriction 302 Do not use Station Lock at an external hotline because it will prevent the outside number from being dialed Remove external hotlines from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry 307 to the external hotline Considerations Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage the external hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the standard devices connected to your system dial out at the same time See Using for more information A standard phone without a dialpad is recommended for use as the external
271. ight next to the Auto Dial button is on steady m Inside Only The red light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady m Local Only The green light next to the Auto Dial button flashes Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 or lift the handset and replace it back in the cradle The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button goes off and extension 10 resumes normal operation 5 140 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Outside Conference Denial 109 Description This System Programming procedure determines whether users can include more than one outside party in a conference call Related Features m For instructions on making conference calls see Conference Calls m Use Conference Drop to drop the last outside party added to the conference Considerations m This feature setting applies to all system users m Aconference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator If outside conference is allowed you can have up to two outside parties and up to three inside parties If outside conference is disallowed you can have one outside party and up to four inside parties Valid Entries 1 Allow conference calls with up to two outside parties W 2 Disallow conference calls with two outside parties Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To allo
272. ignment 301 to assign only line A to extension Y If you want it to be able to dial out when fax 1 is unavailable set Automatic Line Selection for extension Y to select outside lines first line A selected last Set Line Ringing for line A at extension Y to Immediate Ring set all other lines at extension Y to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring or Delayed Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension Y to Assigned Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine at extension Y use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension Y as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 19 Modems There are several ways to use modems with your system as described below NOTE Modems can connect directly to an extension jack without an adapter However if you connect a high speed modem through the control unit you may experience some degradation of efficiency and throughput depending on the quality of the central office lines connected to the system To solve the problem either connect modems directly to the network interface jacks or contact your local telephone company for information about upg
273. ines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system Transfer Return Extension 22306 identifies the extension to which a call transferred by the voice messaging system should be routed if the destination extension does not answer and does not have voice mail coverage active The transfer return extension for the voice messaging system is typically extension 10 Programming 2 13 Backup and Restore Features The PARTNER ACS processor module has two PC Card slots These slots function similarly to a floppy drive on a PC in that information can be added to the system or copied from the system using a PC Card inserted in one of the slots To use the optional Backup and Restore features of the system you must purchase a Backup Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies Only these Lucent Technologies PC Cards can be used in the PARTNER ACS processor module The same PC Card stores both automatic and manual backups separately Backup Programming Automatic 123 enables you to specify whether automatic backups should be performed or not If you set this feature to Active your system and telephone programming settings are backed up to the PC Card automatically at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month The PC Card must be present in the PC Card slot for the backup to take place Backup Programming Manual 124 enables you to initiate a backup of your system and telephone programming
274. ing or changing an account code by pressing after entering the account code If the account code is not valid you will hear a denial tone The Lucent Technologies Call Accounting Terminal uses less than 16 digits for an account code Refer to the device s documentation to determine the maximum digits supported You can program the Account Code Entry feature code on a button on a system phone It is recommended that you use a button with lights This button can be used for optional Account Code Entry or Forced Account Code Entry Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using To program an Account Code Entry button 15 c RO m Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press 2 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To enter or change an optional account code 1 From a system phone if a password is programmed for the system you must enter it before lifting the handset See System Password 403 for more information After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press 2 If the Account Code Entry button ha
275. int m o assign or unassign another extension to the same Contact Closure Group press Next Item or Prev ttem until the correct extension is displayed Then repeat Step 4 m Toassign extensions to the other Contact Closure Group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Contact Closure Group 612 5 53 Contact Closure Operation Type 613 Description This System Programming procedure specifies how long the Contact Closures remain active when they are activated A Contact Closure can be activated for 1 3 or 5 seconds or the Contact Closure can be set to toggle If a Contact Closure that controls a door lock has a Contact Closure Operation Type of 5 Seconds On for example the door lock is released for 5 seconds when a user activates the Contact Closure If the Contact Closure has a Contact Closure Operation Type of Toggle the Contact Closure must be activated and deactivated One user can activate the Contact Closure and another user can deactivate it provided both users are included in the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure or the same user can both activate and deactivate the Contact Closure For more information about Contact Closure devices see Contact Closure Devices in Chapter 4 Related Features m Before a user can activate a contact closure you must assign the user s extension to the Contact Closur
276. ion Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 3 m Ifthe phone does not work and it is not part of a combination extension call the hotline Display Shows Only 16 Characters Per Line Possible Cause A power outage occurred What to do Unplug the modular telephone cord from the phone then plug it in again If the display is still incorrect see System Phone Does Not Work n the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 8 Troubleshooting Display Is Incorrect Possible Cause Date day and time are not set properly What to do Re enter the date day and time using System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 m lf the display is correct the problem is solved m If the display is still not correct see System Phone Does Not Work Display Shows ReplaceSysBat W Power On or ChgBat W PowerOn at Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause System battery power is low What to do Replace the system batteries see Battery Replacement earlier in this chapter Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number Possible Cause 1 Not receiving Caller ID service from local phone company What to do Contact your local phone company to check on Caller ID service m f you are not receiving Caller ID service subscribe to it m f you are receiving Caller ID service g
277. ion by pressing a programmed button The phone at the target extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed Alternatively the Manual Signaling button can be used to ring or voice signal the target extension See also Intercom Auto Dial button Music on hold system Equipment that lets you play recorded music or messages to callers who are placed on hold A music on hold audio source can be connected to the RCA jack on the processor module in the control unit See also Background Music N Network interface jack A jack generally located in your equipment room that provides access to an outside line coming into your building from your local telephone company A line cord from the network interface jack to a line jack on a PARTNER ACS processor module a 206 module or a 400 module connects the line to your system Night Service A feature that automatically redirects calls received after hours or when a receptionist is not available to answer calls This feature also activates night service operation of the voice messaging system See alse password O One touch Intercom Calling button See Intercom Auto Dial button Outside line See Line P Park See Call Park PARTNER ACS processor module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that provides the software intelligence that controls the system s features This module may be a Stand Alone unit or it may be installed in the center slot of the
278. ional but strongly recommended to make the most of your investment See System Programming Options and Telephone Programming Options later in this chapter for details Setting the System Clock After supplying power to the control unit use the following procedures m System Date 101 to set the month and day 7 System Day 102 to set the day of the week 7 System Time 103 to set the hour and minutes Programming 2 3 Assigning Lines For initial setup only use Number of Lines 104 to specify the number of lines that will be assigned to all system extensions Then use the following procedures as needed m Dial Mode 2201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone Line Assignment 2301 to assign lines to specific extensions if the line was not assigned using the Number of Lines procedure to remove lines from some extensions or to change the button used to pick up a line at a specific extension Line Access Restriction 302 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on specific lines m Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line will start ringing at each extension that has the line For additional information about line ringing options see Programming a Receptionist s Extension later in this chapter Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an
279. iraneter e 3 306 for those extensions to extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller Considerations for Hunt Groups 1 6 m Any number of extensions can be assigned to each Hunt Group In addition extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group m You can include multiple fax machines or answering machines in a Hunt Group m f you have a PARTNER MAIL system and multiple fax machines you can assign the fax machines to a Hunt Group Then you can program the PARTNER MAIL system so that when an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL s Automated Attendant Service the PARTNER MAIL system recognizes that it is a fax call and automatically transfers it to the first available fax machine in the group Hunt Group Extensions 505 5 101 Considerations for Hunt Group 7 This Hunt Group is used exclusively for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware Do not assign any other extensions to this group A voice messaging system requires special hardware and set up procedures refer to Voice Messaging Systems in Chapter 4 and to the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system for more information Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign ext
280. kup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing the Backup Failure Alarm Jearlier in this chapter Display Shows Backup Failed Write Prot at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause The Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is write protected and an automatic backup was attempted What to do Using the end of a paperclip or another pointed object push the write protect tab upward to the nonprotected position see Figure 6 6 You do not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the write protect tab up The backup is rescheduled for ti the next day at 2 00 a m NS Slide the switch on the PC card up to the nonprotected position Figure 6 6 Write Protect Tab on a Backup Restore PC Card Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing the Backup Failure Alarm earlier in this chapter Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the backup was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the PC Card and reapply power to the system The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a
281. l In Warranty Repairs If you purchased or leased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will repair it free of charge during the one year warranty period Simply call the hotline and ask for service Business Day service is standard during the warranty period for both the control unit and system phones Business Day service is performed during normal business hours However if you need 24 hour service protection during the warranty period on the control unit in case there is a major system failure you can purchase an Around the Clock service contract from your local Lucent Technologies sales office 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Post Warranty Repairs If you purchased your system from Lucent Technologies and you have a post warranty service contract Lucent Technologies service is provided under the terms of that contract To significantly reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period you can purchase a post warranty service contract from Lucent Technologies If you do not have a contract Lucent Technologies service is provided on a time and materials basis by calling the hotline A contract provides to you within the applicable coverage period and response times service calls with no charge for parts
282. l Hotline 311 Extra alerts 4 2 F FACE Forced Account Code Entr Fax Machine Extensions 601 Fax machines dialing restrictions for 4 16 example setups line saver 4 17 S programming fori4 14 5 16 b 80 sendandreceive 4 1814 19 single 4 16 transferringcallsto 4 15 1 using 41414 18 1 Fax Management button 4 14 6 15 SSS xx FCC information Feature button 3 2 Feature phones 8 11 0 Flash button description 5 146 5 147 3 9 5 146 switchhook use instead of Follow Me 5 31 1 5 33 Forced Account Code Entry 307 Forced Account Code List 4409 5 8315 84 Forwarding calls 5 31 5 33 Cd 400 module 1 4 2 2 B 6 y 400Emodule 1 4JB 6 O 400EC module 1 3 4 4 B G y 5 Slot carrier configuration overview 1 4 maximum lines configuration illustration maximum extensions configuration illustration 2 3 ordering information B 6 G GCD see Group Call Distribution Z o Z Group Call Distribution 206 GroupCaling s 46 b 87 5 89 o 1 Group Hunting 5 90 5 92 5 10115 102 b 191 GroupPaging 5 87 5 89 1 1 1 1 Group Pickup 5 144 Groups Calling Hunt Night Service 5 135 00 oveview 2 11 0000 Y O Paging Pickup 5 0315 04 5 144 re
283. l Numbers and System Password 403 Users with system phones can enter account codes to track incoming and pies calls For more information Mosen Code EY You also can use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that must enter account codes prior to dialing outside phone numbers including those on the Emergency Phone Number List Making Calls 5 119 m Users can signal then speak to system phone users who are already active on a call to alert them of important business matters provided Interrupt On Busy 2312 is Assigned for the recipient Considerations The following instructions assume that system phones are set using Automatic Line Selection to automatically select outside lines first and standard phones are set to select intercom first This means that when a user with a system phone lifts the handset the user hears outside dial tone if an outside line is available but when a user with a standard phone lifts the handset the user hears intercom dial tone How to Make an Outside Call System Phone 1 Liftthe handset or press Gpkr The green light next to a line button is on steady and you hear the outside dial tone 2 Dialthe phone number On a system display phone the dialed number appears on the display If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the system To make an outside call on a s
284. l Speed Dial numbers are outside phone numbers that a user dials by pressing or on a standard phone plus a two digit code Unlike System Speed Dial numbers which are available to all users in the system Personal Speed Dial numbers are available only at the extension for which they are programmed Users can store up to 20 Personal Speed Dial numbers Programming Telephone Buttons Telephone buttons without lines assigned to them can be programmed for system features such as Exclusive Hold or Conference Drop or for telephone numbers so you can use the feature or dial the phone number with one touch Once programmed these buttons are called Auto Dial buttons because simply pressing the button automatically dials the feature code or telephone number A user who has a system phone with programmable buttons should consider programming them with a combination of frequently used features and outside and intercom telephone numbers 2 20 Programming Programming a Receptionist s Extension Call Handling Options If you set up a centralized telephone answering position at extension 10 use the following settings to customize it m Immediate Call Answering f the receptionist should answer all calls use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension 10 Set Line IRinging for all lines at extension 10 to Immediate Ring set the lines assigned at each user s extension to Delayed Ring or No Ring m Backup Call Answering
285. lation instructions 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier Cover for 5 Slot Carrier AC power cord Line cord D2R Connects 206E and 400E modules to network interface clear color Specify length 7 standard length 14 or 25 ft 267F2 bridging adapter Connects two devices to one extension In Range Out of Building IROB protector Required when installing extensions in another building from the control unit two required per PARTNER model telephone one per standard phone or device Lucent Technologies 146G Surge Protector SCL 8 Required when installing a Contact Closure controlled device outside the building to protect the control unit from electrical surges Z300A Electromagnetic Interference EMI Filter Includes filter 7 ft line cord and installation instructions 267C line adapter Splits two outside lines from an RJ14 network interface jack so that each line has its own modular plug do not use at extension jacks 355A 355AF adapter Connects call reporting device to primary processor module A A To locate the nearest Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer check your local telephone directory s yellow pages Continued on next page B 6 Maintenance To use Table B 1 first locate the item you want A triangle A indicates where you can obtain it Table B 1 Continued System Telephones and Accessories PARTNER 34D corded telephone SOU
286. ll Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 5 Multiple Answering Machines If a single answering machine cannot handle all your calls you can set up two or more machines at different extensions Figure 4 2 so that a call does not go unanswered If one answering machine is busy a second call will be answered by the second machine A setup such as this might be used by a movie theater to announce movie times to people calling for information Figure 4 2 Multiple Answering Machines To Use m Goto the machines to manually play back messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to an answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code Note however when calling from outside you can retrieve messages only from the first machine that answers To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extensions X and Y that you want the machines to cover For extensions X and Y set Line Ringing for all lines to Immediate Ring Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting 316 extensions Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 Night Service Group Extensions 504 or Hunt Group Extensions 505 Adjust both answering machines to answer on a different number of rings so they do not
287. ll feature works the problem is solved m If the Recall feature still does not work continue increasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call This problem applies when the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex system or with the local phone company s Call Waiting feature Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too long What to do Decrease the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m If the Recall feature works properly the problem is solved m If the Recall feature still disconnects calls continue decreasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved nthe continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 15 Problems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Ringer equivalents are too high for the extension What to do Be sure the total of the two devices Ringer Equivalence Numbers REN does not exceed 2 0 If it does unplug one of the devices m Ifthe phone works properly the problem is the REN was too high m Ifthe phone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Auxiliary device such as a fax answering machine or modem is faulty What to do
288. ll the credit card scanner on an extension by itself or combine it with a system phone or a standard phone on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide elephone Lines optional Figure 4 7 Credit Card Scanner Using Credit Card Scanners When you make a call on the credit card scanner an outside line is automatically selected If you combine the credit card scanner with a system phone or standard phone you cannot use the phone while the credit card scanner is operating You can use only one of the devices at a time Programming Credit Card Scanners 1 Qu O r o9 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign the lines you want the scanner to use to extension X Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select the outside lines that the scanner is to use Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension If the scanner has an auto answer feature turn it off For multiple scanners repeat Steps 1 5 for each extension Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 13 Fax Machines This section suggests several ways you can set up fax machines to work with your system It includes instructions for programming and using a Fax Management button on a system phone in order to monitor the status of a fax machine and transfer calls to it with a single tou
289. losses arising out of unauthorized use or charges for such use of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through or connected Maintenance B 3 to the equipment For personal injury caused by Lucent Technologies negligence Lucent Technologies liability shall be limited to proven damages to person No action or proceeding against Lucent Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twenty four 24 months after the cause of action accrues THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY Product Ordering Information Reference Materials In addition to this guide the following materials are available the order numbers are in parentheses PARTNER Advanced Communications System Planner 518 456 051 provides the forms needed to plan and record how your system and telephones are to be programmed PARTNER Advanced Communications Installation 518 456 052 provides instructions for installing the system User Instruction Cards 518 455 340 contains basic instructions for using system phones PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay 847531696 helps with System Programming from a PARTNER 34D phone PARTNER 18D Programming Overlay 847531688 helps with System Programming from a PARTNER 18D phone MDW 9030P Wireless Pocketphone Installation and Use 503 801 160 explains how to install and use the MDW 9030P pocketphone MDW 9030P Wireless Pocketphone Quick Reference
290. ly turns off the microphone for the duration of the call 2 f HFAI is on and you are already on a call you will not receive any voice signaled calls to your extension they will ring instead 3 Ifyou make a voice signaled intercom call to a busy extension it may result in a voice interrupt on busy call to that extension See Voice Interrupt On Busy Calls on the next page for more information Voice Interrupt on Busy Calls A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets you interrupt and speak to another user who is busy on a call and who has the Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 feature activated When you use Voice Interrupt on Busy the interrupted user hears two beeps before hearing your voice Be aware that the third party to whom the interrupted user is speaking will probably hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Therefore the message you deliver with the interruption should be brief and discreet If the interrupted user wants to answer you he or she can press a programmed Talk Back button the interrupted user s response cannot be heard by the third party in this case 3 6 Learning About Telephones Speakerphone Performance Tips The speaker on your system phone has a sensitive sound activated switch Room acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the speakerphone To ensure that your speakerphone works effectively follow these guidelines Avoid placing your pho
291. m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing the Backup Failure Alarm earlier in this chapter 6 18 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 2 The Backup Restore PC Card or the PARTNER ACS processor module is corrupted What to do Try to do a backup using the manual backup procedure Backup Programming Manual 124 to test the system m lf the backup completes successfully the problem may be solved An automatic backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing the Backup Failure Alarm earlier in this chapter m lf the backup fails try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two different Backup Restore PC Cards Ifthe system will not write to either PC Card the processor module is probably corrupted call the hotline Ifthe system writes to one of the PC Cards the original PC Card is corrupted See Table B 1 in Appendix B for information about ordering a new Backup Restore PC Card Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause Changes were being made to system programming or central telephone programming while a backup was in progress What to do The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup
292. m programming from a remote location Recall A system feature that sends a timed switchhook flash to let you recall a dial tone to make another call to or access a PBX or Centrex service Use Recall only on an outside call using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call Reorder tone A fast busy signal that the system transmits to an extension when a user attempts to use a feature that is not available to that extension Ringer Equivalence Number REN A measure of the power it takes to ring a phone or other telecommunications device usually shown on a label on the bottom of the device Restore The reinstating of system and telephone programming settings that have been saved on a Backup Restore PC Card using either Backup Programming Automatic 123 or Backup Programming Manual 124 If necessary this backed up information can be restored using Restore Programming 125 S Send All Calls Lets you send calls immediately to the voice messaging system Simultaneous Paging A feature that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker and all idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 See also SMDR Station Message Detail Recording See Call reporting Speed dialing A feature that lets a user dial a telephone number quickly by dialing a short code Glossary GL 5 Standard phone An industry standard touch tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home Some standard pho
293. m Other ways of placing a call on hold include Hold and Exclusive Hold m Parked calls do not receive Call Waiting Call Coverage Call Forwarding or VMS Cover Considerations m itis recommended that you park only one call at a time from your extension to ensure that you know which caller you are talking to when you pick up the parked call m Call Park is useful for standard phone users because they can retrieve a parked call without concern for which line the call is on Using System Phone To park a call 1 While on a call press and dial your two digit extension number or press the Auto Dial button programmed for your extension 2 Hangup If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you used an Auto Dial button the green light next to the button flutters To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Dial 6 2 Dial the extension number or press an Auto Dial button for the extension where the call is parked 5 34 Call Park Standard Phone To park a call 1 While on a call press the switchhook or Recall The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial your two digit extension number 3 Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you are on another call when the parked call returns you will not receive notification even if Call Waiting is Assigned to your extension The parked call ri
294. ming procedure code or feature dial code consult the numerical listings below to find the correct feature name Numerical Listing of Procedure Codes and Dial Codes System Programming Procedures 101 102 103 04 05 07 08 09 14 15 17 19 122 k e L L i i L i dk dk dk dk dE dE dE dE dE dE dt dE db db db dk 5 2 Overview System Date System Day System Time Number of Lines Transfer Return Rings Recall Timer Duration Rotary Dialing Timeout Outside Conference Denial Outgoing Call Restriction Button Wake Up Service Button VMS Cover Rings Ring on Transfer Caller ID Type Backup Programming Automatic Backup Programming Manual Restore Programming Dial Mode Hold Disconnect Time Group Call Distribution Line Coverage Extension Line Assignment Line Access Restriction Display Language Automatic Extension Privacy Abbreviated Ringing Transfer Return Extension Forced Account Code Entry Distinctive Ring Intercom Dial Tone Automatic VMS Cover External Hotline Voice Interrupt On Busy Call Waiting Copy Settings 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 612 613 614 728 Outgoing Call Restriction Toll Call Prefix System Password Disallowed Phone Number Lists Disallowed List Assignments Emergency Phone Number List Allowed Phone Number Lists Allowed List Assi
295. mmed for an extension that extension is required to enter an account code before dialing an outside number on all of the lines assigned to that extension even those on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 If the Forced Account Code List 409 contains entries the system checks the account code against the list If the account code is on the list line access is allowed if not line access is denied Table 2 1 Settings that Restrict an Extension s Access to a Specific Line Type of Restrictions or Setting for Setting for a Permissions for the Line Assignment Line Access Restriction Extension 301 302 Can receive and place All outside lines not No access for all lines intercom inside calls only assigned Cannot use a specific outside line Outside line not assigned No access for that line Can only monitor call activity and pick up held calls on a specific line Outside line assigned No access for that line Can only receive calls on a specific line Outside line assigned Incoming only for that line Can only place outgoing calls on a specific line Outside line may be assigned Outgoing only for that line If a line is not assigned to the extension a user can use Direct Line Pickup to access the line Emergency numbers Marked System Speed Dial numbers Allowed Phone numbers and numbers dialed using the System Password override all
296. mming 125 procedure but the restore failed What to do See Possible Causes 1 and 2 under Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode Display Shows Restore Complete but All Calls Were Disconnected Possible Cause You just ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure What to do Nothing This is normal behavior after a restore the system resets itself In the future warn users before beginning the restore or perform the restore during nonbusiness hours Troubleshooting 6 23 System Problems Calls on Hold Are Disconnected Possible Cause Hold Disconnect Time setting is too short What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 to a longer interval m If calls on hold no longer disconnect the problem is solved m f calls on hold still get disconnected or the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to the longest interval call the hotline Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect Possible Cause 1 Hold Disconnect Time setting is too long What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 to a shorter interval m f abandoned calls on hold are disconnected the problem is solved m f abandoned calls on hold still do not disconnect or if the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to the shortest interval go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Local phone company does not send hold release signal What to do Call your local phone company and fin
297. most efficiently taking into account your company s telephone service personnel and equipment as well as the special needs of particular departments This section lists the procedures you can use for details on using a particular procedure refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5 Speed Dialing You can program up to 100 frequently dialed phone numbers such as numbers for suppliers repair services customers so that all users in the system can dial them by pressing four buttons or on a standard phone plus a three digit code These are called System Speed Dial Numbers Dialing Restrictions and Permissions The system has several procedures for restricting telephone use and several for overriding those restrictions You can use any combination of these procedures to design a system that meets your needs When a user makes a call the system checks the number dialed against all of the dialing restrictions that apply to the extension making the call When the number dialed passes a restriction the system goes to the next restriction if necessary If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active star codes are also checked against the restrictions Star codes typically dialed before an outgoing call provide special services from the local telephone company Central Office CO for example G9 6 7 enables a dialer to block the sending of Caller ID information to the called party When a user dials a star code the system checks i
298. must press the button m This feature applies only to active calls Any user can retrieve a held call unless Exclusive Hold is used Considerations m f you want to be able to intercept calls routed to an auxiliary device such as an answering machine a voice messaging system or an auto attendant make sure Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the auxiliary equipment extension m Standard phones and system phones without a programmed Privacy button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension Valid Entries 1 2 Assigned 2 NotAssigned W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 16 press 6 3 Toassign or unassign Automatic Extension Privacy press until the appropriate value displays 5 18 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 4 To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 19 Automatic Line Selection Description This
299. n If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select PRESS to program another line forthis extension To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension num ber and repeat above steps p 5 110 LINEACCESSRESTRICTION DIAL 302 p 5 108 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL a line number 01 15 DIAL 1 No Restriction v 2 Outgoing Only 3 Incoming Only 4 No Access line appears on button but you can use line only to pick up a transferred or held call PRESS qu to program another ine To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension num ber and repeat above steps DISPLAY LANGUAGE DIAL 303 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 English V 2 Spanish 3 French PRESS to program another p 5 66 extension V Factory setting i Button with lights required AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY DIAL 304 p 5 18 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v PRESS to program another extension ABBREVIATED RINGING p 5 5 DIAL 305 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Active 1 ring V 2 Not Active repeated ringing PRESS to program another extension TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION DIAL 306 p 5 181 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL number of the extension 10 41 to w
300. n a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to answer a call on that line which is ringing at another extension but the user can join a call or access a held or transferred call on the line Direct Line Pickup cannot be used to access an active call at an extension that hasPrivacy activated or that is part of a Conference Call or a held call Exclusive Hold at an extension that used Calls picked up with this feature get Caller ID information unless Line Access Restriction 302 is used to prevent users at specific extensions from viewing Caller ID for ringing calls Considerations This feature is useful when users are requested or paged to pick up a call on a specific line that does not appear on their phone Users cannot access conference calls using this feature You can program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button on a system phone to pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two digit line number Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button lls a Fw DN Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left 6 8 Program anoth
301. n displayed for active calls at your extension Considerations m Privacy must be programmed on a button with lights Users cannot dial the Privacy code manually or use a programmed button without lights to activate this feature When Privacy is on the button light at the extension is also on indicating that others cannot join calls m Privacy can be turned on and off at any time even during a call Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Privacy button i On e gm Using Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 7 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button to turn Privacy on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Privacy is On Privacy F07 5 145 Recall F03 Description This feature causes the system to send a timed switchhook flash over the telephone line to recall a new dial tone or to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Related Features m lf users have trouble with Recall use Recall Timer Duration
302. n progress Considerations m If the restore is not successful the display shows Restore Failed or Restore Failed Try Again fortwo seconds All calls that were in progress are disconnected and all of the system and telephone programming settings revert to the default settings m The PC Card in the PC Card slot must be a PARTNER ACS Backup Restore PC Card which can be purchased from Lucent Technologies m PC Card Slot 2 is recommended for the Backup Restore PC Card however either slot can be used If the system detects Backup Restore PC Cards in both slots when a restore begins the first slot is used and the second is ignored Valid Entries 1 MAN mmddyy W where mmddyy the month day and year 2 AUTO mmddyy Restore Programming 125 5 149 Using See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To initiate a restore als Power down the system m If you have a 5 Slot carrier move the On Off switch to the Off position 0 m f you have a Stand Alone PARTNER ACS processor module configuration or a 2 Slot carrier unplug the power cord from the power jack Insert the correct Backup Restore PC Card in Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module if there is a PC Card in Slot 1 remove it If the system detects cards in both slots it will use Slot 1 for the Restore Power up the system m If you have
303. n the system display phone at extension 10 m Wake Up Service must be programmed on a button with lights This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights m A scheduled wake up call occurs once in a 24 hour period If you want to send a wake up call at the same time on the next day you must reschedule the call m Wake up calls ring the target extension for approximately 30 seconds or six rings m Wake up calls are not placed to extensions assigned as doorphones Valid Entries 1 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Wake Up Service to that button Wake Up Service Button 115 5 197 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Wake Up Service button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program H 1 7 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthis point m If you want to assign Wake Up Service to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Wake Up Service button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 2 Not Assigned m f you want to assign Wake Up Service to a specific button
304. ncrease the brightness or the down volume control button to decrease the brightness Adjust the contrast while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle The angle of the display is adjustable to three positions low medium and high Display 5 65 Display Language 303 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the language in which display messages appear if the extension has a system display phone The language is set for each extension so phones in the same system can display different languages Considerations If SMDR is used the call report header is printed in the language specified for extension 10 Valid Entries 1 English W 2 Spanish 3 French Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Display Language setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 O 3 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 11 press 7 The current display language displays To change the display language press until the appropriate value displays To change the display language for another extension press Or until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 66 Displ
305. ndard phone connected users hear a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in to the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated m Use the switchhook on a standard phone to place calls on hold park a call transfer a call answer a call waiting call or set up a conference call For details see Using the Switchhook on the next page or Hold Transferring Calls Answering Calls and Conference Calls in Chapter 5 m lf the standard phone has a message light use it to notify users of messages For details see Message Lh Onno Message La ei eld 5 For alist of supported phones see ITelephones in Chapter 1 Alternatively if you have a voice messaging system the light is used to indicate that a message has been left in your mailbox On a standard phone the message light flashes when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message 3 8 Learning About Telephones Ringing Patterns Standard phones have these ringing patterns m An outside call will ring ring ring m Anintercom call will ring ring ring ring ring ring m Atransferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back will ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring NOTE If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to phones Telephones use the ringing patterns described here
306. ne You can lift the handset or press before dialing then 1 Press an idle button red and green lights are both off You hear intercom dial tone and the green light next to the button is on steady To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number To voice signal a system phone at the extension press X plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses m Ifyou hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply m Ifyou hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response m Ifyou hear ringing you have reached an idle standard ML C 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Making Calls 5 121 Standard Phone il Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number To voice signal a system phone at the extension press X plus the two digit
307. ne Assignments Line Assignment 301 5 111 Valid Entries 1 Assigned YW 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a line button to assign the line to that button Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign lines to a specific extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 0 1 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the extension number to be programmed For example to program extension 15 press 5 The red light next to each button that has a line assigned is on steady To remove all existing line assignments press before selecting a line 3 Enter the line number to be assigned For example to select line 1 press 0 1 4 Atthis point m f you want to assign the line to the first available button with lights press until the display reads Line Assignment 15 L01 1 Assigned m If you want to remove a line assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Line Assignment 15 L01 2 Not Assigned m f you want to assign the line to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Line Assignment 15 L01 3 Select a Button Then press a button with lights to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select
308. ne in areas with high background noise caused by sources such as motor vehicles manufacturing equipment loud voices radios printers copiers typewriters other noisy office equipment and heater and air conditioning fans Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking When you both talk at the same time only one person s voice comes through Do not use your speaker to make announcements over a loudspeaker paging system connected to your phone system When talking always face your phone and stay within two feet of it Place your phone at least six inches 15 cm away from the edge of your desk If you have difficulty hearing the other party try increasing the speaker volume If you have background noise try turning off the microphone when the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak If the difficulty persists lift your handset to continue the conversation In conference rooms a separate speakerphone such as the SoundStation from Lucent Technologies is recommended since the built in speaker on a system phone is designed for individual use Learning About Telephones 3 7 Standard Telephones In addition to system phones you can connect industry standard touch tone or rotary dial phones and even some feature phones which have built in calling features directly to the system You can also combine standard phones on the same extension with system phones or other devices wi
309. ne phone 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 1 You hear intercom dial tone again 3 Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension You hear intercom dial tone again If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code used to lock the extension you hear silence and the extension is unlocked If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code used to lock the extension you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains locked Repeat the unlocking procedure above Station Lock F21 5 167 Station Unlock F22 Description This feature is available only at extension 10 or 11 This feature lets you unlock a specific user s locked extension Use this feature when a user forgets the code he or she used to lock the extension Related Features Use Station Lock to lock an extension Considerations It is recommended that you do not program this feature on a button Using System Phone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Press 2 2 Dial the extension number or use an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button for the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked If that extension used a Station Lock button with lights to activate the feature the green light goes off Standard Phone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Press 2 2 Dial the number of the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked 5 168 Station Unlock F22 System
310. nes include special feature buttons for frequently used calling functions See also Feature phonelnd incustry sendarc device Star Codes Codes typically dialed before an outgoing call that provide special services from the local phone company Central Office For example 67 enables a dialer to block the sending of Caller ID information to the called party Station See Extension Station Lock A feature that lets a user lock his or her extension to prevent other users from making outside calls from the locked extension Station Message Detail Recording SMDR See Call reporting Subscriber 1 On a voice messaging system a user who has a mailbox in the system 2 A user who has access to an outside line with special features such as Caller ID System The Lucent Technologies control unit and system phones that you purchased plus all other telecommunications devices that are connected to your control unit System Manager The person in your business who is responsible for managing your system including system programming System phones The Lucent Technologies telephones that are specifically designed for use with PARTNER systems Models include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDW 9000 MDW 9010 and MDW 9030P phones System Programming Procedures that allow you to customize system settings for your business System Programming requires a s
311. nes with feature buttons When you press a Hold button on a feature phone the call is held at the phone itself This means other phones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line Also callers on hold at a feature phone will not hear the system s music on hold Hold 5 95 Using System Phone To put a call on hold press oid The green light next to the line or button winks To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Press the line or button next to the winking green light 2 Ifthe handset is in the cradle lift it up or press Gok You are reconnected to the held call The green light next to the line or intercom button changes to on steady To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold press the button next to the winking red light or press 8 8 and the two digit line number Standard Phone To put a call on hold press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone The call is on hold Do not hang up the handset while the call is on hold If you hang up the handset the phone rings Lifting the handset reconnects you to the held call To retrieve a call that you put on hola 1 Hang up The call rings back 2 Lift the handset You are reconnected to the held call To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold 1 Liftthe handset 2 Atthe intercom dial tone dial 6 8 and the two digit line number
312. nformation to a call accounting device such as Lucent Technologies Call Accounting Terminal Basic or Plus if you want to further analyze call activity The device stores rate table information and processes the information it receives into meaningful reports that can help you optimize your communications system The primary application for call accounting devices is accounting or pricing of the calls The call accounting device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module and can also print out reports that include summaries by hour line and extension Refer to the manual provided with the call accounting device for instructions on connecting it to your system Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 11 Contact Closure Devices The Contact Closure Adjunct plugs into a jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module and has two Contact Closures that can be used to control devices such as an electronic door lock as shown in Figure 4 6 or an alert The device being controlled must be wired to the Adjunct by an electrician in accordance with local electrical codes See Appendix A Specifications for more information Contact Closure Door with Electronic Lock CONTROL UNIT Ext Y Doorphone Alert Extension Figure 4 6 Contact Closure Adjunct Using Contact Closure Devices You must designate which extensions are eligible to use the Contact Closures and you must program how t
313. ng calls at the extensions programmed with this feature Forced Account Code Entry 307 5 81 Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 7 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 15 press 3 To assign or unassign Forced Account Code Entry press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 82 Forced Account Code Entry 307 Forced Account Code List 409 Description This System Programming procedure lets you identify a list of up to 99 account code verification entries for extensions that are forced to enter account codes Once alist is created any user at an extension programmed for Forced Account Code Entry must enter a valid account code one that matches a list entry before being allowed to make an outside call This feature ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Related F
314. ng probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If you hear a second set of beeps the recipient has ended the voice interrupt on busy call In either case hang up to end your part of the voice interrupt on busy call m If you hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a system phone that is idle has Do Not Disturb turned off and has Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers 5 194 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets you program a button that is used to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call while the user is active on another call Related Procedures You must use Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 to identify extensions that can receive an intercom call while busy on another call Considerations Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back must be programmed on a button with lights This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button 1 Press Feature 0 Q System Program Sy
315. ng the handset Combining a speakerphone with a system phone or a standard phone in a conference room or office is an inexpensive way for several people at a meeting to conference in other parties In conference rooms a separate speakerphone such as the SoundStation from Lucent Technologies is recommended since the built in speaker on a system phone is designed for individual use m Headsets allow users to hold hands free conversations A headset is a combination earphone and microphone worn on the head useful for receptionists salespeople or others who need to have their hands free while talking on the phone Lucent Technologies offers several compatible headsets 4 2 Using Auxiliary Equipment m Specialty Handsets are designed for those individuals who need greater functionality than that provided by the handsets on system phones and standard phones For example an amplified handset is available for all PARTNER phones for hard of hearing users m In Range Out of Building IROB protectors are required to prevent electrical surges from damaging your system when phones or other standard devices such as a doorphone are installed in a location other than the building where the control unit is installed The system supports the Lucent Technologies IROB protector which provides coverage for up to 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices and 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones IROBs must be installed by a qualified techn
316. ngs back when your phone is idle To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 6 and the extension number where the call is parked Call Park 5 35 Call Pickup I6X X Description This feature lets users answer any intercom outside or transferred call ringing at another specified extension where XX is an extension number from 10 41 This feature is useful for officemates who agree to answer each other s calls Related Features Use this feature to retrieve a parked call see Call Park Note that if you use Call Pickup to answer a call that is parked at an extension that also has ringing calls you will be connected to the parked call parked calls take precedence over ringing calls Considerations You can program a Call Pickup button on a system phone to pick up with one touch a call that is ringing or parked at another specified extension Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Call Pickup button 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 To specify the extension to be answered press left Intercom followed by 6 and the two digit extension numb
317. nologies BCS Publications Center at 1 800 457 1235 or 1 317 361 5353 or your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Hardware Components Ordering additional telephones and modules accessories and replacement parts for your system is convenient Table B 1 shows where you can buy system components in the continental United States To take full advantage of your system the sources shown below also can provide you with the optional equipment you might want for your system such as Lucent Technologies fax machines answering machines standard phones voice messaging systems modems paging systems doorphones headsets bells lights strobes music on hold systems and printers You can obtain most items from more than one source either directly from Lucent Technologies or from authorized dealers Sources in the U S are m Lucent Technologies Catalog Sales This source is Lucent Technologies national phone mail sales center in Cincinnati A Catalog Associate will place your order including Lucent Technologies installation if you need it You can charge your order on a VISA Mastercard or American Express card The Catalog Associate can also give you sales advice and mail you the Lucent Technologies SOURCEBOOK CATALOG of systems telephones and accessories Call 1 800 451 2100 m Lucent Technologies Sales Offices Sales offices to serve the small business customer are located throughout the country To contact the
318. ns active when activated If the Contact Closure Operation Type is set to Toggle one user can activate the Contact Closure and another user can deactivate it provided both users are included in the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure When the Contact Closure Operation Type is set to Toggle if a user activates the Contact Closure so that the toggle is On and then a power failure occurs the toggle automatically changes to Off as a security measure m lf you plan to use a Contact Closure to control a door lock you may also want to install a doorphone at that door Use Doorphone Extension 604 or 4605 to identify the extension to which the doorphone is connected and Doorphone Alert Extensions 2606 to identify the extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed You can assign some or all of the Doorphone Alert extensions to a Contact Closure Group 612 so that users at those extensions can control the door lock Considerations It is recommended that users program and or on buttons with lights so that they can monitor the status of the Contact Closures The button s green light will light when the Contact Closure is activated by that user and the red light will light when the Contact Closure is activated by another user in that Contact Closure Group The light will go out when the Contact Closure is deactivated Contact Closure F41 and F42 5 51 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2
319. nsions m The transfer return extension for any extensions associated with auto attendant or voice messaging system hardware should be extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller 607 is used to identify the extensions associated with auto attendant hardware and Hunt Group Extensions 505 is used to identify the extensions associated with voice messaging system hardware m ifanextension has VMS Coverjactive unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return extension Considerations m Anunanswered transferred call returns to the transfer return extension identified for the extension transferring the call not the extension receiving the call m Do not designate an extension associated with auto attendant or voice messaging system hardware as the transfer return extension for any user extension m Transfer return calls do not receive voice mail coverage Valid Entries Extension transferring call W Any extension other than the one transferring the call Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Transfer Return Extension for a specific extension 1 Press Feature System Program System Program 3 at extension 10 or 11 2 Dial the number of the originating extension 3
320. nswer the call shown on the display Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Caller ID Inspect button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press 7 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode ar wn Using 1 While active on a call press the programmed button The green light flutters Caller ID Inspect is activated 2 Pressaline or intercom button The Caller ID information for the selected line or intercom displays Caller ID Inspect F17 5 41 3 Press the programmed button to deactivate the feature The feature is deactivated automatically if you hang up the handset or press any button other than a line or intercom button The green light is off when the feature is deactivated 5 42 Caller ID Inspect F17 Caller ID Name Display F16 Description This feature lets users with system display phones toggle the display between Caller ID number and Caller ID name Caller ID name is an optional feature of the Caller ID service provided by your local telephone company and may not be available in your area even if Caller ID number is available Related Features m To view C
321. ntal U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Troubleshooting 6 7 System Phone Does Not Work Possible Cause 1 Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of system phone What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack see the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for instructions m Ifthe phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Phone needs to be reset What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone With the handset hung up plug the cord in again m lf the phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The telephone is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone Then plug the cord into a phone that you know works m lf the replacement phone works the problem phone is faulty Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement m Ifthe replacement phone does not work go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 The telephone cord is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the phone and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m Ifthe phone works the cord is faulty Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement m f the phone does not work and it is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combinat
322. o N oO WwW O 123 125 127 129 131 132 135 136 137 139 141 142 144 145 146 148 149 152 153 154 155 156 158 159 160 161 QU SQ AQ mis a IRE Ne OQ vers x ae ee le A ee a EE E E as E a E a A S aC is E E Re E E ene ns L h h ee 5 iii Contents Star Code Dial Delay 410 Station Lock F21 Station Unlock F22 System Date 101 System Day 102 System Password 403 System Release Status F59 System Reset Programming Saved 728 System Speed Dial Numbers System Time 103 Toll Call Prefix 402 Touch Tone Enable F08 Transfer Return Extension 306 Transfer Return Rings 105 Transferring Calls VMS Cover F15 VMS Cover Rings 117 VMS Hunt Delay 506 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Wake Up Service Button 115 AAAA AAA THT FH FHKE THE age 163 165 168 169 170 171 172 173 175 178 179 180 181 183 184 188 190 191 192 193 195 196 197 Feature Reference Overview This chapter provides reference information for programming and using system features Features are listed in alphabetical order System Programming procedures include the procedure code and three digit number in the heading dial code features include the feature code F for or for intercom plus a two or three digit code Headings without codes are general call h
323. o a combination extension with a system phone only the system phone signals m Call Waiting 2316 does not work on a standard phone in combination with a system phone m The lights on the system phone show what the standard telephone is doing as well as what the system phone is doing For an explanation of light patterns see earlier in this chapter If Privacy is active at a combination extension no other extension can join a call in progress at either a system phone or a standard device However a phone can interrupt a call on a standard device at the same extension For example if a system phone and modem are combined at an extension picking up the handset of the system phone could interrupt a modem transmission even if Privacy is active 3 12 Learning About Telephones m While on a call on a standard phone you can use the system phone s dialpad and fixed feature buttons to handle calls For example you can use the system phone to select a specific outside line and conduct the call on the standard phone Or if someone is on a call using the standard phone someone else can put that call on hold by pressing on the system phone To do this it is not necessary to lift the handset of the system phone Held calls do not ring back at a standard phone in a combination extension To retrieve a held call from the standard phone use Direct Line Pickup Active Line m A standard phone s message light will not light when B
324. o the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used Considerations m You can program a Station Lock button on a system phone A button with lights is recommended so the user can quickly determine whether or not the extension is locked m Users can enter a different code each time they lock their extension m A user at a locked extension can make intercom calls and can receive intercom and outside calls Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Station Lock button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 1 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode ak wh Station Lock F21 5 165 Using System Phone You can lock an extension when the phone is idle or while active on an intercom or outside call using the handset or speakerphone 1 Press the Station Lock button or press 1 On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes Enter a four digit code using digits 0 9 Re enter the four digit code If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code entered in Step 2 the extension is locked On a button with lights the green light ch
325. o to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Extension connected to a module that does not support Caller ID What to do Make sure lines with Caller ID service are connected to a PARTNER ACS processor module or 206EC or 400EC modules If Caller ID lines are not connected to one of these modules install the appropriate modules and or make the appropriate connections Priv Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Possible Cause The caller used a star code 67 to block Caller ID information or has instructed their telephone company to block Caller ID information What to do Nothing this is the normal operation for these conditions Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Possible Cause The call originated outside the area for which the phone company can provide Caller ID information What to do Nothing this is normal operation for the Caller ID service Troubleshooting 6 9 Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display Possible Cause Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local phone company What to do If Caller ID information for a large number of calls is not displayed contact your local telephone company Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of Intercom Autodialer What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack see the PARTNER Advanced Communications Sys
326. ocedure to create up to eight lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each Related Features m After completing this procedure you must use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign the Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions m Allowed Phone Numbers Emergency Phone Numbers and Marked System Speed Dial Numbersjoverride the Disallowed List m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for oli Call Prefix 202 This setting tells the system whether a O for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls m fiStar Code Dial Delay 410 is active the system checks for allowed and disallowed phone numbers again beginning with the first digit after the star code Considerations m Fach list entry can include up to 12 digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display m When a user dials a number that is on a Disallowed List for the user s extension the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal after dialing the part of the number that is stored in the list for example an area code m f you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone numbers in a list you must use Next Procedure Or Prev Procedure to do so since entering and a three digit code will be considered data for the
327. ocessor module or on Release 3 1 R3 1 or later 206 modules Table 1 1 Summary of Module Capacities Module Lines Extensions 206 2 6 400 4 0 ACS 3 8 System Batteries The system uses two user replaceable AAA size standard alkaline batteries in the PARTNER ACS processor module to ensure that system programming and telephone programming settings are not lost in case of a power failure See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for instructions for replacing the batteries PC Card Slots The PARTNER ACS processor module has two PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association interface slots hereafter referred to as PC Card slots You can buy PC Cards to use in these slots for backup and restore or for future software upgrades System Capacity The carrier you use and the combination of 206 and 400 modules installed determine the number of available lines and extensions The system allows up to 15 lines and up to 32 extensions however these maximums cannot be achieved simultaneously Table 1 2 Configurations for Maximum Lines or Maximum Extensions Configuration Maximum Lines Maximum Extensions Stand Alone PARTNER ACS processor module PARTNER ACS processor module Total 3 lines 8 extensions Total 8 extensions 3 lines 2 Slot Carrier One PARTNER ACS processor module One PARTNER ACS processor module One 400 module One 206 module
328. of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a doorphone extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 0 4 for doorphone 1 or amp for doorphone 2 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the doorphone extension number For example to identify extension 20 as a doorphone extension press 0 or press to unassign an existing doorphone extension 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 72 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Description This System Programming procedure creates a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions provided they have access to an outside line Typical list entries include fire police and emergency services numbers Related Features m If an extension is programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 a user at the extension is required to enter an account code before dialing a number in the Emergency Phone Number List m The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for oli Call Prefix 202 This setting tells the system whether a O for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls Considerations m Each telephone number can include up to 12 digits m When programming emergency num
329. ogrammed for the extension or the Hunt Group or Calling Group button for the group to which you want to transfer the call There is no need to press or Next Item this takes the place of Steps 1 and 2 in the procedure on the previous page For an extension that has a system phone you can program X plus the extension number on the Auto Dial button so you can announce the calls when you transfer them 5 186 Transferring Calls Standard Phone m To pass a call to another extension 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone Dial the extension number or and a Hunt Group number or 7 and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing after Step 2 above If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller To make a voice signaled transfer to a system phone in Step 2 above press plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other
330. ogramming see the PARTNER Communications System Hemote Administration Unit Installation and Use guide Programming 2 19 Telephone Programming Options System telephones are ready to use when they are installed but they can be customized to meet the needs of your business and individual users This customization is accomplished through Telephone Programming Automatic Line Selection When a user lifts the telephone s handset or presses Sekr the system chooses an idle line automatically Automatic Line Selection determines the order in which the system looks for an idle line You can set the system to look for lines in any desired order For standard phones or for any phone used mainly to call other extensions select an inside intercom line first Extension Name on Display With Extension Name Display users can assign a name up to 20 characters long to their extension Then when those users make an intercom call group call or transfer a call their name and extension number appears on the display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Line Ringing Line Ringing defines when each outside line rings at a phone For each line at an extension you can specify Immediate Ring Delayed Ring phone rings after a 20 second delay or No Ring Personal Speed Dialing Persona
331. old 602 activates or deactivates the MUSIC ON HOLD jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module When this jack is activated an audio source is connected and Ring on Transfer 1 19 lis set to Not Active callers hear recorded music or messages while being transferred Music on Hold Volume 614 controls the volume at which the music plays when the MUSIC ON HOLD jack is active Changes to this setting affect the many features that use Music on Hold Music Call Park Call Waiting Conference Exclusive Hold Hold Background Music lets users with system phones other than the MDC 9000 or TransTalk 9000 series phones play the recorded material through their phone s speaker when the phone is not in use m Hotline 2603 identifies internal hotline extensions so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone a predetermined extension number automatically rings External Hotline 311 identifies external hotline extensions so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone a predetermined outside phone number is automatically dialed m Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 identifies extensions to which doorphones are connected Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 identifies extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed m The Contact Closure Adjunct which plugs into a jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module and has two Contact Closures that can be used to control devices such as an elec
332. on Busy calls or voice signaled calls 5 188 VMS Cover F15 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a VMS Cover button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Or sm oes N Using From a system phone press the programmed button to turn VMS Cover on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on VMS Cover is on and your unanswered intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If you turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing the call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox If VMS Cover is already on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice mailbox VMS Cover F15 5 189 VMS Cover Rings 117 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions programmed for VMS Cover defines the number of times a call rings
333. on for the line on which the call was received When a call you transferred is answered the red light goes on next to the line button on which the call was received If you transfer a call to an extension for which you have an Auto Dial button and the call is unanswered the green light next to the Auto Dial button flutters when the call returns to your extension 5 184 Transferring Calls Calls can be transferred to Calling Groups and Hunt Groups Hunt Group calls do not Transfer Return if the call is not answered and if Transfer Return Rings 105 is set to 4 or more rings When you transfer a call from a display phone the number to which you are transferring the call briefly appears on the display If a transferred call is unanswered the number of the extension that is returning the transferred call also appears on display phones If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call transfer feature that lets you transfer a call to another Centrex extension so that the line on which the call came in is free to place and receive other calls However to use Centrex transfer you must be able to dial the extension directly using the Centrex extension number if a Centrex line is shared by several extensions you cannot use Centrex transfer to direct the call to a specific extension For more information about such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system
334. on jacks either directly or through your building s modular wall jacks Each 206E module has a green power indicator that shows it is receiving power m 400E Module is similar to the 206E module but without extension jacks It has four outside line jacks This module is an inexpensive way to add lines when you do not need more extensions m 206EC 400EC Modules provide the same capabilities as the 206E and 400E modules respectively but add support for Caller ID information on system display phones To get Caller ID first you must subscribe to the service from your local phone company if it is available on a per line basis then connect those lines associated with Caller ID to the line jacks on the 206EC and or 400EC modules Any users with system display phones who receive calls on Caller ID lines will get Caller ID For more information see Caller ID Jin Chapter 5 Hereafter references to 206 modules include 206E 206EC and all 206 modules used with previous releases of the product Similarly references to 400 modules include 400E 400EC and all 400 modules used with previous releases of the product 1 4 Overview If you are upgrading from a PARTNER or PARTNER Plus system you can still use its 200E modules each providing two line jacks If you want message waiting capability on standard phones that are equipped with LED compatible message waiting lights you must connect those phones to extension jacks on a PARTNER ACS pr
335. once The green light next to the line button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs up or for a transferred call until it returns to the transfer return extension This feature prevents incoming calls from distracting users when they are busy on another call To allow calls to ring repeatedly set Abbreviated Ringing to Not Active Considerations Abbreviated Ringing is typically set to Not Active for receptionists and others who handle many calls quickly so they have an audible reminder of incoming calls Abbreviated Ringing applies to outside transferred and intercom calls The volume of an abbreviated ring is lower than a normal ring Calls to a busy extension ring at a lower volume than normal even if Abbreviated Ring is set to Not Active Valid Entries 1 Active incoming calls ring once v 2 Not Active incoming calls ring repeatedly Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Abbreviated Ringing setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program A 3 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press 1 2 To set Abbreviated Ringing press until the appropriate value displays To set Abbreviated Ringing for another extension press Next ltem or P
336. or TransTalk 9000 series phone refer to the documentation that came with the phone Learning About Telephones 3 1 Buttons and Indicators PARTNER 34D Display Programmable Buttons 4 without lights l I I I I I I I I I 7 U nu ng oo I 8 B E E E E gt a so EE 8r 3 8 Line Programmable I BE 8 a a B uL 1 1 Buttons 32 with lights eun 7 j EB ii ik Intercom Buttons 2 Mic I Transfr Q 8 Ext Message HFAI I relier i I F LIA oo Message Light l i A fe DLOS i Gay XO uns l e ey N94 XB Pull Out Tray for User CI i 7 0G 5 Instruction Cards B a Rum mi v all PARTNER models pur The following buttons and indicators appear on system phones Display PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D only Shows date day and time when phone is idle mo dialed when placing a call extension number and name if programmed calling you or transferring a call to you and duration progress When programming shows settings options and prompts To adjustthe display contrast see Volume Control Buttons onthe next page Line Programmable Buttons Used for individual outside lines or if no line is assigned on a button for prog
337. or for phones with no regular users such as those in conference rooms Related Features m To copy the Line Ringing settings as well as other system settings to other extensions you can use Copy Settings 399 m Users automatically receive Caller ID information for calls that audibly alert at the extension For lines set to Immediate Ring Caller ID information is displayed after the first ring For lines set to Delayed Ring Caller ID information is displayed as soon as the call begins audibly alerting For lines set to No Ring no Caller ID information is displayed If the phone is idle users can press the line button to see the Caller ID information If the phone is in use users can press a button programmed with Caller ID Inspect to see the information Considerations m Program this feature from extension 10 or 11 only using Centralized Telephone Programming Individual users cannot program this feature m System phone users see the light patterns for the lines assigned to their extensions even if Line Ringing is set to Delayed Ring or No Ring m Ifa line at an extension is set to No Ring a user at that extension has to manually select the line to answer a call Valid Entries Immediate Ring W Delayed Ring No Ring Examples m Receptionist Call Routing f you want calls to be answered by the receptionist first set the lines at the receptionist s extension to Immediate Ring and the lines at the use
338. orwarded calls the extension answering the forwarded call m Account Code This is the account code up to 16 digits assigned to the call This code typically is used for charging calls to a specific client project or department Considerations m lfareport cannot print because the printer is jammed or out of paper the system will store up to 45 records in its memory until they can be printed Additional calls will not be recorded m Inthe event of a power failure records of any calls in progress are lost m Inside intercom calls are not recorded m Ifyou place a call on hold and the caller hangs up the call is considered complete and the record is sent to the call reporting device m Conference calls appear as two outside calls This means two records are generated on the report Output Format The following RS 232 serial transmission protocol is used for SMDR records m 1200 baud m No parity m 8 data bits m 2 stop bits The call reporting feature also supports XON XOFF protocol carriage returns and line feeds Serial Printers Use a 355A adapter which converts a modular jack interface to an RS 232 25 pin connector to connect a serial printer to the PARTNER ACS processor module If you connect a printer make sure the printer can receive SMDR data in the format described above refer to the printer s instructions or contact the printer s manufacturer if you need help Call Accounting Devices You can send call i
339. other calls before redialing the saved number m System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be saved using this feature m A Save Number Redial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting Considerations m This feature redials all digits dialed on the outside call for which the feature was used except account codes You can program a Save Number Redial button on a system phone to access the feature with one touch If you do you can press the button to save the number and press the button later to redial the number You can program this feature on more than one button to save more than one number Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Save Number Redial button ile a RON Using Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 0 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To save a number from a system phone press the programmed button or press after dialing the number but before hanging up To redial a stored number press the programmed button again or press again 5 154 Save Number Redial F04 Send
340. ount Code List exists and the account code is not valid you are denied access to the outside line Verify the account code with your System Manager then repeat this procedure starting from Step 1 Make the telephone call To change the account code while on a call a Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press 2 b Enter a different account code C Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press 2 If a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is invalid you hear a denial tone Verify the account code then repeat Step 7 making sure to enter a valid account code 5 8 Account Code Entry F12 Allowed List Assignments 408 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to eight Allowed Phone Number Lists to a specific extension Related Features You must use Allowed Phone Number Lists 2407 to create the lists of allowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure Valid Entries 1 2 Assigned to extension 2 Not Assigned to extension W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign Allowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program 4 0 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 27 press 2
341. oup Call Distribution A system setting that automatically directs incoming calls on specific lines to a Hunt Group See also Hunt Group and VMS Hunt Group H Hold Reminder Tone On system phones a short beep that is generated for a call that is left on hold for longer than one minute The tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Hotline phone A standard phone at an extension which rings another extension automatically when the handset is lifted See a so External Hotline Hunt Group A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred calls in round robin fashion Calls to the hunt group go to the first available extension in the group with the extension that answered most recently being the last one in the hunt order See also Calling Group and VMS Hunt Group Industry standard device A telephone or other telecommunications device that can be connected directly to the public telephone network See also Proprietary device and Standard phone Inside call See Intercom call Intercom Autodialer An auxiliary device that can be connected to the System phones at extensions 10 and 11 The device has an Auto Dial button for each extension in the system which can be used to dial or transfer calls to the extension with one touch Glossary GL 3 Intercom Auto Dial button A button that is programmed to ring or page another extension whenever the button is pressed
342. our Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 14 Troubleshooting Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer Possible Cause 1 lf you are using a speakerphone there may be environmental factors that affect the performance of the speaker or microphone for example too much background noise What to do See Speakerphone Performance Tips in Chapter 3 for suggestions on the proper use of the speakerphone If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 If the system is set for touch tone dialing you may have a faulty phone or cord See System Phone Does Not Work If the system is set for rotary dialing the Rotary Dialing Timeout interval is too long What to do Reset the interval using Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m If you can hear the called party answer the problem is solved m lf the problem is not solved call the hotline Automatically Dialed Calls Beginning with Star Codes Are Misrouted Possible Cause The Star Code Dial Delay setting is not inserting a long enough pause allowing a portion of the phone number to be dialed before the second dial tone from the Central Office is established What to do Use Star Code Dial Delay 410 to increase the Star Code Dial Delay setting Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too short What to do Increase the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m If the Reca
343. ove Push to insert Figure 6 3 Removing or Inserting Batteries in the Battery Assembly 4 Insert two new AAA size standard alkaline batteries into the metal spring clips by pushing them straight in placing the negative end of one battery into the bottom clip and the positive end of the other battery into the top clip 6 4 Troubleshooting 5 With the locking latch in the unlocked position battery icon and minus icon visible slide the battery assembly into the processor module along the battery guides on the inside of the battery compartment see Figure 6 4 Locking Latch Figure 6 4 Inserting Battery Assembly and Batteries into Battery Compartment 6 Make sure the battery assembly is pushed in far enough that the edges of the assembly slip behind the plastic housing of the processor module 7 Pressing lightly on the battery icon on the front of the battery assembly slide the locking latch downward to secure the assembly in place see Figure 6 5 The plus icon and the battery icon should now be visible on the front of the battery assembly This is the locked position Er Ec Unlocked Position Locked Position Figure 6 5 Battery Assembly in Unlocked and Locked Position 8 Goto extension 10 or 11 and verify that the ReplaceSysBat W Power On message is no longer displayed If it is displayed check t
344. pe 608 Description Call Reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure allows you to specify whether all calls or outgoing calls only are to be included on call reports Related Features m The date and time that appear on call reports are determined by System Date 4101 and System Time 103 m The call report page header prints in the Display Language 303 specified for extension 10 m fiAccount Code Entry optional or forced is used to enter an account code for a call for example to charge calls to specific departments or projects the account code prints on the call report If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List 409 only valid account codes and any other entered digits up to 16 print on the call report m Marked System Speed Dial Numbers appear on the call report as Fnnn where nnn is the Speed Dial code m You can use SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report m For instructions on notifying the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page see SMDR Top Of Page 609 m f you use Caller ID SMDR reports include the telephone numbers of incoming calls Considerations This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting D
345. pecific line 1 Press the idle line button red and green lights are both off or dial plus the two digit line number 2 If desired lift the handset 3 Dialthe phone number To reserve a busy line so your phone beeps when the line becomes free this is useful when you share a line such as a WATS line with other people 1 Press the busy line button red light is on steady without lifting the handset or pressing Gek 2 When the line is free and your phone beeps lift the handset and dial the number If more than one person reserves a line all their phones beep when the line is free The first person to pick up the phone after the beep gets the line and the other reservations are canceled 5 120 Making Calls Standard Phone i Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial 9 to get an outside line You hear outside line dial tone Dial the phone number If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the PBX or Centrex system To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial 8 plus the two digit line number Dial the phone number How to Make an Intercom Call An intercom call or inside call is a call between two extensions without using an outside line There are two ways you can signal the extension you are calling by ringing or by voice System Pho
346. pter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Night Service Button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 3 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthis point m f you want to assign Night Service to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m Ifyou want to remove the Night Service button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 2 Not Assigned m If you want to assign Night Service to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Night Service to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Night Service button at extension 10 Using To turn Night Service on 1 Press the Night Service button at extension 10 m f a System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 m f no System Password is programmed the green light is on steady and Night Service is on 2 Enter the password The green light is on steady Night Service is on Night Service Button 503 5 133 To turn Night Service off 1 Press the Night Service button at extension 10 m f a Sys
347. ption This System Programming procedure lets you assign extensions to a Pickup Group When a call rings at an extension in a Pickup Group a user at any other extension in the system can answer the ringing call by dialing the Pickup Group code The Pickup Group feature is useful when a user needs to answer calls on lines not assigned to his or her phone The system supports up to four Pickup Groups Related Features For instructions on answering calls in a Pickup Group see Group Pickup Considerations An extension can be assigned to as many as four different Pickup Groups Extensions where extra alerts such as a loud bell are installed can be assigned to a Pickup Group to enable anyone who hears the alert to answer the call Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign extensions to a Pickup Group 1 6 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 0 1 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 For example to select group 1 press 7 A display similar to the following appears Pickup Group 1 Extension Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 29 press 9 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriat
348. purchase price towards the purchase of another Lucent Technologies system B 2 Maintenance If you purchased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technologies maintenance coverage you selected A written explanation of Lucent Technologies types of maintenance coverage may be obtained from Lucent Technologies by calling 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you purchased your system from a Lucent Technologies authorized reseller contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will not be responsible under this limited warranty for damages resulting from m Failure to follow Lucent Technologies installation operation or maintenance instructions m Unauthorized system modification movement or alteration m Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system m Abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control or m Acts of third parties and acts of God For warranted items that were not installed by Lucent Technologies self installed and are not cov
349. qui peut tre raccord e a un circuit t l phonique bouci utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit bouci peut tre constitu e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 No d homolagation Voir l tiquette sur le c t de l unit de contr le No de certification CSA LR 60486 L indice de charge 7 C 4 FCC and IC Information Speed Dial Form Speed Dial Form This appendix contains a Speed Dial Form to be photocopied and handed out to system users It provides space for System and Personal Speed Dial numbers For instructions on programming and a e EEE numbers see Chapter 5 We suggest that you fill in a photocopy of the form leaving the blank original in the book in case you need to distribute revisions in the future Speed Dial Form D 1 eBeue N uieis S a1no oj suorsjaa1 pajsebOHns pue swajqoid yoda jeBeue A ueijs S au Aq peuiumejBoud ase sjequinu eig peedg uiejs S uoisueixe ano uo peoejd suonouiseiJ Buierp jo ssajpsebeu ow Aue ye e yym sepoo eig peeds uieis S eip UBD noA x JequinN euoudejo Auedwo9 aweNn JequinN euoydaje Auedwog awey JequinN 3uoyd j L Auedwog awey
350. quick reference charts receptionist extension remote 2 19 restrictions and permissions 2 8 2 9 speed dialing 2 8 2 20 Cd system 2 1 2 8 2 19 Cd telephone 2 1 2 26 S voice messaging system 2 13 Programming overlays illustration 2 15 12 16 lt Pulse dial 5 56 5 153 Cd IN 6 Index Q Quick reference charts End of book R RAU see Remote Administration Unit Recall programming feature on a button 5 146 programming function in phone numberj 5 161 5 162 using Recall button description 5 146 5 147 5 148 switchhook use instead of 3 9 Recall Timer Duration 107 5 148 Receptionistextension 2 21 O Redial 5 106 5 107 5 154 0 Last Number Save Number 5 154 Reference materials B 4 B 5 Reminder service 5 197 5 199 Cd Remote Administration Unit RAU 2 19 REN see Ringer Equivalence Number Repair B 1 Replacement Request line 5 Reserving an outsideline 5 120 Resetting the system Restoreproblems 6 2216 23 1 1 1 1 1 Restore Programming 125 descripion 2 14 b 149 5 151 calls in progress effect on 5 1449 SY problems 6 2216 23 CS Restore file choosing manual or automatic 5 150 Restriction Line Access 302 Outgoing Call 4401 5 13715 138 111 Restrictions dialing 2 10 55 60 5 6115 63 disallowed phone numb
351. r m To answer a call on a specific line 1 Press the line or button for the line you want to answer 2 Lift the handset or press Sekr You are connected to the call m To answer a call when you are already on a call 1 Press Hola The call you are on is placed on hold 2 Press the button for the new call You are connected to the new call 3 To return to the first call put the second call on hold then press the line or button for the first call m To answer a voice signaled call your phone beeps and you hear the caller s voice If the microphone is on you can speak after the beep If the microphone is not on press or lift the handset m Torespond to a voice interrupt on busy call you hear two beeps and the originator s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Askthe party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has
352. r then lift the handset 2 Speakinto the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Loudspeaker Paging 170 5 117 Standard Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 2 3 Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system For touch tone phones only if your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements 5 118 Loudspeaker Paging 170 Making Calls Description A user can make a Call by dialing an outside phone number or an extension number There are also several ways to speed dial a number see Related Features below Related Features You can store an outside number an intercom number or a feature code on a button so a user can dial the number with a single touch For information about programming and using Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing You can program outside numbers for one extension or for the entire System so a user can dial a number by pressing or ona standard phone plus a two or three digit code 80 99 for Personal Speed Dial numbers 600 699 for S
353. r 1 4 CONTACT CLOSURE 1 p 5 51 For paging the group PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button PRESS W PRESS left DIAL a Calling Group number 1 4 BACKGROUND MUSIC p 5 24 PRESS a programmable button PRESS PRESS a programmable button p 5 31 PRESS DIAL optional two digit originating extension number DIAL optional two digit destination extension number CONTACT CLOSURE 2 p 5 51 PRESS a programmable button GROUP HUNTING RING VOICE SIGNAL PRESS For ringing the first available extension PRESS a programmable button p 5 90 PRESS left DIRECT LINE PICKUP ACTIVE LINE DIALa Hunt Group number 1 7 PRESS a programmable button p 5 57 For voice signaling the first available extension DIAL left 8 PRESS a programmable button CALL PICKUP p 5 36 PRESS left DIAL a Hunt Group number 1 6 dire oh Com UR DIRECT LINE PICKUP IDLE LINE ia ES DIAL the two digit extension number PRESS a programmable button p 2 39 9 DIAL left CALLER ID INSPECT p 5 41 PRESS a programmable button with ia DO NOT DISTURB p 5 68 PRESS Feaure 7 7 PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS eature CALLER ID NAME DISPLAY p 5 43 PRESS a programmable button with lights EXCLUSIVE HOLD HOLD p 5 75 PRESS Featue 1 a programmable button PRESS GROUP PICKUP PRESS a programmable but
354. r 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program an Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 1 Using Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 1 1 4 at extension 10 or 11 At this point m f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 1 Assigned Ext10 m f you want to remove the Outgoing Call Restriction button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 2 Not Assigned m f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button Select another procedure or exit programming mode Label the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 To change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting 1 Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button turns on and extension 10 appears busy to the system Press the Auto Dial button for the desired extension repeatedly until its lights show the correct setting as follows m No Restriction The green l
355. r a new extension number and repeat above steps FORCED ACCOUNT CODE LIST DIAL 409 p 5 83 DIAL a list entry 01 99 To add entry DIAL the account code up to 6 digits PRESS RESS to remove alist entry RESS to program another list entry DIAL 410 p 5 163 DIAL 0 Seconds Delay v 1 Second Delay 2 Seconds Delay 3 Seconds Delay 4 Seconds Delay 5 Seconds Delay Not Active Ouhwon _o PRESS to enter programming DIAL the System Speed Dial number s To remove another number repeat PRESS 0 to exit programming mode DIAL 501 p 5 144 DIAL a group number 1 4 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group PRESS to assign another extension DIAL 502 p 5 46 DIAL a group number 1 4 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v PRESS to assign another extension NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON DIAL 503 p 5 132 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select Button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select V Factory setting TE Button with lights required NIGHT SERVICE GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL 504 p 5 135 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL
356. r an Account Code before accessing an outside line This feature is not available on standard phones m fiStar Code Dial Delay 410 is active the system checks for allowed and disallowed phone numbers again beginning with the first digit after the star code Considerations m While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System phones give you more protection against such misuse than standard phones Therefore we strongly recommend that you install system phones where restricting phone use is important m lf the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system the control unit may not be able to prevent calls for extensions restricted to Local Only If dialing restrictions are needed on Centrex lines use Centrex restrictions instead m f you want to restrict the use of star codes include them in the Disallowed Phone Number Lists Valid Entries 1 No Restriction can make toll local and intercom calls W 2 Inside intercom Only 3 Local intercom and local Only Outgoing Call Restriction 401 5 137 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension 1 Press
357. rading line quality Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only A modem and a terminal allow you to dial out and connect to computer bulletin boards and other data services This setup which lets you dial out but not receive calls is shown in Figure 4 11 Note that the telephone is optional and can be used if you want the terminal to share an extension with a phone Telephone optional Lines Figure 4 11 Stand Alone Modem for Placing Calls Only To Use Follow the modem manufacturer s instructions To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X 2 Ifthe modem will only dial outside the system set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first If you also use the modem for calls within the system set Automatic Line Selection to select intercom first and include a 9 and a couple of pauses in the modem s dialing sequence for outside calls Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 Setthe auto answer feature of the modem to Off 4 20 Using Auxiliary Equipment Send and Receive Modem If you need to place and receive calls with the modem us
358. ram and Enter on system phones To identify a Fax Machine extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 6 1 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected For example to identify extension 30 press 3 0 3 Toassign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 80 Fax Machine Extensions 601 Forced Account Code Entry 307 Description This feature applies only to system phones This System Programming procedure identifies specific extensions at which users must enter an account code prior to making outside calls The account code can be used to charge telephone calls to a department or client the account code prints on call reports if you are using SMDR Station Message Detail Recording or a call accounting package Related Features Account Code Entry provides instructions on entering forced account codes You can use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If a forced account code is valid the system provides access to an outs
359. ramming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Star Code Dial Delay setting 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program 4 1 0 at extension 10 or 11 The current setting is displayed 2 Press the number on the dialpad for the setting you want see Valid Entries above or press Next Data or Prev Data until the correct setting is displayed To return to the default setting press Remove Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 164 Star Code Dial Delay 410 Station Lock F21 Description This feature is available only on system and standard touch tone phones This feature lets users enter a four digit code on their telephone dialpad to lock their extension Later the user enters the identical code to unlock the extension Station Lock helps to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from these extensions You should recommend that users lock their extensions whenever they leave their desks for extended periods of time Related Features m All outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 2406 are restricted from locked extensions m lfauserforgets the code use Station Unlock to unlock the extension m Donotlock External Hotline extensions m Station Lock returns t
360. ramming mode To use the hotline phone 1 2 Lift the handset of the hotline phone The designated alert extension rings When the call is answered speak into the handset 5 100 Hotline 603 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign any number of extensions to a Hunt Group The system supports up to seven Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system Related Features for Hunt Groups 1 6 m For instructions on ringing or paging extensions in a Hunt Group or transferring calls to a Hunt Group see Group Hunting m If aringing call to the Hunt Group is not answered within three rings the call moves to the next available extension in the Hunt Group If users in the Hunt Group leave their desks they should turn on Do Not Disturb at their extensions so calls hunt immediately to the next available extension m Forinstructions on making outside calls ring directly in a Hunt Group see Group Call Distribution 206 m Hunt Group calls are not eligible for VMS Cover m When using PARTNER MAIL Release 3 or later a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a Hunt Group mailbox Related Features for Hunt Group 7 m This Hunt Group applies only to the voice messaging system For more information see m After you assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 you should set ihe q
361. ramming telephone or extension numbers or other system features such as Last Number Redial When a line is assigned press the line button to make a call on that specific line lights show status of line When a number or feature is programmed press the button to dial the number or use the feature The PARTNER 34D has 36 programmable buttons 32 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18D has 20 programmable buttons 16 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18 has 16 programmable buttons all with lights the PARTNER 6 has 4 programmable buttons all with lights Intercom Buttons Press to make or answer a call to or from another extension in the system Feature Press to change programmed settings or use system features Conf Press to add other parties to your call Transfr Press to pass a call to another extension Hold Press to put a call on hold 3 2 Learning About Telephones PARTNER 6 g Line Programmable E Buttons 4 o BB ng 8 Intercom Intercom q Ext __ Imessage Message Light d 3 Feat Spkr i d q Rel N AAA eS jek asd p i i e Conf mie NI HFAI cred X 9 Transfr Hold PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 Display Programmable Buttons
362. ransfer a caller to a specific subscriber s mailbox 1 From a system phone press the programmed button or press a 2 Dialthe two digit extension number or press an Auto Dial button of the mailbox subscriber for whom the caller wants to leave a message The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the recorded greeting for that mailbox 3 Hang up 5 196 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Wake Up Service Button 115 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up or reminder calls for system extensions When a wake up call is scheduled the system makes an intercom call to the target extension at the scheduled time If the first call is not answered or the called extension is busy the system makes a second attempt five minutes later Related Features m Wake up time is based on System Time 103 m f users answer a wake up call they hear Music On Hold 4602 if it is Active If Music On Hold is Not Active users hear silence m Wake up calls ring at target extensions even if Do Not Disturb is active at the extension m Wake up calls to a target extension that has Call Forwarding active ring at the extension the calls are not forwarded m Wake up calls that are not answered do not go to voice mail coverage even ifVMS Coveri is active at the target extension Considerations m A Wake Up Service button must be programmed o
363. re included on the call report The voice messaging system uses the following procedures Hunt Group Extensions 505 assigns the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 the VMS Hunt Group Group Call Distribution 206 assigns lines to the VMS Hunt Group so calls can ring directly into the voice messaging system and receive Automated Attendant Service Line Coverage Extension 208 identifies an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so calls on that line can ring directly into the owner s voice mailbox when either Automatic VMS Cover 310 or VMS Coveri is on at the owner s extension VMS Hunt Delay 506 determines when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system You can set the system for either immediate call handling or delayed call handling The setting you select is used for both day and night operation VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only depending on the status of the Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Automatic VMS Cover 310 determines whether or not an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on lines assigned ownership are automatically covered by the voice messaging system VMS Cover Rings 117 specifies the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on l
364. re makes use only of the phone s intercom The alert extension can be any type of phone or it can be the loudspeaker paging system so the hotline phone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker Related Features m To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the hotline phone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines m Set Automatic Line Selection for the hotline extension to intercom only m Remove hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 75502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 m Use External Hotline 311 to identify an extension that automatically dials a programmed outside number when a user lifts the handset Considerations m he same extension cannot be assigned as both a hotline and a doorphone Assigning a doorphone extension as a hotline extension cancels the doorphone setting m Do notassign hotline phones to the first two extensions on each module 10 11 18 19 24 25 30 31 36 or 37 which are reserved as power failure extensions m The hotline phone can receive transferred calls but the user at that extension should not pick up the handset until the phone rings Valid Entries A hotline extension 12 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 An alert extension 10 41 or 70 for the loudspeaker paging system No hotline or alert extension assigned f Example A supermarket installs a hotline phone at its meat count
365. re 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Caller ID Type setting 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 1 2 2 at extension 10 or 11 The system shows the current setting 2 Press Next Data or Prev Data until the appropriate value displays or press to return to the default setting 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Type 122 5 45 Calling Group Extensions 502 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the extensions in a Calling Group a group of extensions that can be called at the same time Any user in the system can ring or page all extensions in a Calling Group at the same time or transfer a call to a Calling Group the first extension to pick up the call is connected to the caller This feature is useful for conversing with any individual in a specific group such as a sales pool or for paging all individuals in the group The system can have up to four Calling Groups Related Features m For instructions on making a ringing call or paging call to a Calling Group see Group Calling Ring Page m Users can make simultaneous announcements over the loudspeaker paging Considerations system and the system phones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Simultaneous Paging m Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group In a
366. re allows users at any extension in the system to answer any outside intercom or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group where G is a Pickup Group number from 1 4 In other words when a call rings at an extension that is in a Pickup Group a user at any extension in the system can answer the call without knowing which extension or line is ringing and without being in the same Pickup Group The system can have up to four Pickup Groups Related Features You must use Pickup Group Extensions 501 to assign extensions to Pickup Groups Considerations m Extensions can be in more than one Pickup Group m You can program a Group Pickup button on a system phone to pick up calls in a Pickup Group with one touch Examples Here are some useful applications for a Pickup Group m Put all system extensions in a Pickup Group except the boss private extension so anyone on the system can answer a ringing call except calls to the boss m Putthe extensions of people who work near each other and who can hear each other s phones ring but who don t have each other s lines on their phones in a Pickup Group For example a group of typists work in a large room separated by cubicles and all of their extensions are in Pickup Group 1 When a typist leaves the room and the typist s phone rings anyone else in the system who can hear the call ring can pick it up simply by dialing the Pickup Group code for that group ntercom
367. red to a fax or answering machine from returning before it is answered m The system does not start counting the number of rings for a transferred call to determine when it goes to the transfer return extension if it is not answered until the transfer originator hangs up Valid Entries 0 9 0 rings no return 4 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the number of times a transferred call rings before returning to the transfer return extension 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program 1 OC 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter a setting 0 9 For example to set a Transfer Return of 5 rings press until a display similar to the following appears Transfer Return 5 Rings 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Rings 105 5 183 Transferring Calls Description This section explains how to transfer calls using the button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone Transferring a call lets users pass a call from one extension to another Users can transfer both outside calls and intercom calls to other extensions Related Features To transfer calls to an extension with a single touch you can program the extension number on an Auto Dial button see Auto Dialing To transfer calls to an extension for which
368. res special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR Jin Chapter 4 m his procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly Using 1 Make sure the paper in the printer is aligned at the top of a new page 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 6 9 The system responds by printing the call report page header 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 160 SMDR Top Of Page 609 Special Dialing Functions Description This feature lets you add special characters for System Speed Dial numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers and Auto Dial numbers as follows Function Button Display Description Pause Hold P Recall R Stop S Touch Tone T Enable Considerations Inserts a 1 5 second pause in the dialing sequence to wait for a response such as a dial tone or computer voice message Sends a timed switchhook flash needed to alert the system on the other end such as a PBX or Centrex system and to use some local telephone company custom calling features such as Call Waiting Use Recall only as the first entry in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number Stops the dialing sequence until the Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number is used again for example so the user can enter additional digits such as a credit card number or password To continue press th
369. ress Feature 0 C System Program System Program H 1 2 4 at extension 10 or 11 If there is a problem one of the following messages is displayed Card is Write Protected Insert Valid Card System BUS See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for explanations and corrective actions Otherwise the display instructs you to press Enter to begin the backup 3 Press Enter A status message is displayed indicating that a backup is in progress and within 30 seconds a message displays indicating the result If the backup was successful the new backup information replaces the information in the old MAN mmadyy file on the Backup Restore PC Card and the mmadyy extension now reflects the current date Backup information created during a manual backup does not overwrite any AUTO mmadyy file Go on to Step 4 If the backup failed you see one of the following error messages in the display Backup Failed Check Card Backup Failed SystemBus Go to Step 4 and then see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for explanations and corrective actions 4 Exit programming mode NOTE If you exit the procedure before the backup finishes you will not interrupt the backup but you will not see feedback messages on the display Inserting or Removing a PC Card 1 Ifthe system has power do one of the following to turn off the power 5 Slot carrier Move the On Off switch to the Off position O 2 Slot carrier or Stand Alone PARTNER
370. rev Data cycle forward and backward through the valid entries These buttons work only for fixed data such as a line or extension number They do not work for variable data such as date time password telephone numbers or doorphone assignments m Remove returns the current setting to the factory setting or when using Line Assignment 301 removes lines from an extension m Enter ends an entry of variable length such as a telephone number in an Allowed Phone Number List W System Program starts the System Programming process m Central Tel Program starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process to customize individual telephones centrally from extension 10 or 11 when followed by 0 0 enters or exits programming mode m Wid enters a wildcard a character that matches any digit dialed in telephone numbers in Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Phone Number Lists 404 jand the Forced Account Code List m j Programming 2 15 Next Next Procedure Item Remove Prev Prev Prev Procedure Item Data Enter Central System C Tel Program Program Message Feature e Nex Nex Next Bene i ltem Data j ta Prev Prev
371. rev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Abbreviated Ringing 305 5 5 Account Code Entry F12 Description This feature can be used only from a system phone This feature lets a user enter an account code up to 16 digits for an outside call incoming or outgoing An account code typically is used to identify a department project or client for charge back or tracking purposes Related Features You can use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify system phone extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to dialing any outside number including those on the Emergency Phone Number List A forced account code must be entered at the beginning of a call however a different account code can be entered any time during the call You can use Forced Account Code List 2409 to create a list of valid account codes which should be distributed to the appropriate users If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If the code is valid the system provides the user access to an outside line If the code is invalid the system denies the user access to an outside line For faster entry of frequently used account codes you can program an account code on an Auto Dial button or as a System or Personal Speed Dial number but not as a Marked System Speed Di
372. rfere with its operation Users can program Privacy onto a system phone button to allow or prevent others from joining their calls as needed activated m Caller ID information displays if you join a call however you cannot join a Privacy call at any extension that has If a line is not assigned to a user s extension and access to that line is not restricted for that extension the user can use Direct Line Pickup Active ILine to join a call on that line Considerations You cannot join an intercom call or a conference call at another extension You cannot join a call on an extension that has a voice interrupt on busy call in progress You can join a call that is being answered by the voice messaging system but only if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware If this is the case when you join the call the voice messaging system disconnects automatically so you can speak to the caller You cannot put a joined call on hold You can tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next to the line button change to alternately flashing red and green If a system phone joins a call on a standard phone there is a momentary break in the call on the standard phone 5 104 Joining Calls How to Join a Call System Phone A steady red light next to a line button indicates a call is in progress at another extension To join
373. rictions define groups or set up auxiliary equipment Refer to the filled out System Planner when you are changing system settings and be sure that any changes in programming are recorded there The Programming Overlays System Programming requires a Programming Overlay placed over the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 Overlays are provided with the system documentation Replacements can be ordered from the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center See under Product Ordering Information in Appendix B Figure 2 3 on page 2 16 illustrates the Programming Overlays for the PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D phones During System Programming the normal functions of several buttons on the display phone at extension 10 or 11 change For example the left button becomes and the right button becomes Central Tel Program The Programming Overlay identifies these buttons You use the following special buttons while programming and cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures You can use these buttons to select a procedure If a procedure instructs you to press Next Procedure Prev Procedure pressing these buttons one after the other enables you to repeat the current programming procedure m Next Item and Prev tem cycle forward and backward through a procedure s parameters A parameter is typically an outside line an extension or a telephone list entry m Next Data and P
374. ristics of the telephone being programmed including any System Programming settings and lines assigned to the phone If you have any 34 button phones in the system you must use a 34 button display phone to program since an18 button phone cannot be used to program a 34 button phone Also if your system has both PARTNER model and MLS model phones itis recommended that you use a PARTNER model display phone at the programming extension To program a phone from extension 10 or 11 use the following procedure 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 see The Programming Overlays Jearlier in this chapter for more information 2 Tostart programming a Press A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 b Press System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering Centralized Telephone Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 2c c Press again The display reads SYSTEM PROGRAM d Press Central Tel Program A display similar to the following appears CENTRAL TELEPHONE PROG Extension 2 24 Programming 3 Dial the extension number of the telephone to be programmed The green lights next to
375. rmation displays only when a call is audibly alerting at an extension This means that mises wih Do Not Disturb activated or extensions that have lines with Line Ringing set to No Ring do not receive Caller ID information However Caller ID information is displayed once the call is answered or if the line is preselected Caller ID Type 122 can be set to either USA or Singapore For proper operation in the United States leave the default setting USA Considerations Subscriptions to Caller ID service are on a per line basis The lines associated with Caller ID must be connected to a line jack on a PARTNER ACS processor module 206EC module or 400EC module For more information refer to the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide Caller ID information is passed to an extension between the first and second ring To receive Caller ID information wait until the second ring before answering the call Individuals with Call Waiting from the local telephone company will not receive Caller ID information for the second call Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local phone company When Caller ID information is not captured the system date and day default displays instead The incoming telephone number replaces the system date and time display on system phones for the duration of the call An out of area message displays if a call is being dialed from a region that does not
376. rogrammable button To program the button to ring the next available extension in the Hunt Group press left 2 To program the button to voice signal the next available extension in a Hunt Group press left Intercom X 7 Dial a Hunt Group number 1 7 for ringing calls 1 6 for voice signaled calls Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To use when programmed on a button m Toring or voice signal an extension in the Hunt Group simply lift the handset or press and press the programmed button If you are voice signaling start talking after the beep m To transfer a call to an extension in the Hunt Group while on a call press the programmed button Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I77G 5 91 To manually ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Liftthe handset and press Intercom You hear intercom dial tone 2 To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 7 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press and a group number 1 6 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To manually transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 While on a call press rans 2 Dial and a group number 1 7
377. rogramming Station Unlock 5 168 Stop programming function in phone number 5 161 5 162 Support customer Inside front cover 6 1 6 2 B 2 Swapping extensions 2 6 SwitchfabricJA 2 oS O Switchhookflash 3 9 5 146 5 148 System batteries descripion t b replacement instructions 6 3 J6 5 System clock 2 3 2 5 5 178 sd System Date 4101 5 169 System Day 102 System Password 403 System phones buttons 1 6 2 17 2 20 2 21 3 2 3 3 call handling defintion t G Cd dialcodefeatures 3 14 3 15 dial tones 3 5 dimensions and weightsJA 1 sd labeling sheets 2 o23 B Index IN 7 lights 3 213 3 9 4 microphone ordering B 7 oveview l 6 0 O problems with 6 5 16 10 Cd programming 2 20 2 26 1 1 1 programming mixed types ringing patterns speaker using 3 1 8 7 3 12 8 14 3 15 SystemPlaner B 4 System problems 6 2416 26 CS System programming see alsolProgramming lt changingl2 612 19 1 1 1 1 O individual procedures 5 2 lt initial method of 2 47 options 2 812 144 overlays 2 15 2 16 Cd oveview2 1 PBX Centrexsupport for 2 7 quick reference charts System ReleaseStatus b 172 System Reset Programming Saved 728 5 173 5 174 System
378. rs extensions to No Ring Line Ringing 5 115 m Receptionist Backup f you want all calls on a line to ring directly at users extensions with the receptionist providing backup set the line at the users extensions to Immediate Ring Then set the line on the receptionist s extension to Delayed Ring An incoming call that is not answered by a user within 20 seconds also rings at the receptionist s extension Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the way outside lines ring at an extension 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Line Ringing The green lights next to the line buttons show the current Line Ringing settings for all lines assigned to the extension If a line is not assigned to a button the green light next to that button is off The following ringing options can be shown by the green light next to the line button m Immediate Ring on steady m Delayed Ring lashes slowly m No Ring lutters quickly To change Line Ringing on any line press the line button until the button light shows the correct setting the setting for the currently selected line also appears on the display Continue programming or exit programming mode 5 116 Line Ringing
379. s assigned to an extension the list applies to all lines to which the extension has access Valid Entries 1 Assigned to extension 2 Not Assigned to extension W Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign Disallowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 0 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 27 press 2 A display similar to the following appears Disallow To 27 List Number 3 Enter the list number 1 8 For example to select list 1 press 7 4 Toassign or unassign the list press until the appropriate value displays 5 Atthis point m Toassign or unassign another list for this extension press or until the list number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 m To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 60 Disallowed List Assignments 405 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Description This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users cannot dial For example you may want to prevent calls to a specific telephone number or to categories of numbers such as international numbers Use this pr
380. s feature lets users ring page or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the extensions in any one of four Calling Groups G is a Calling Group number from 1 4 When paging the caller hears a beep and begins speaking the caller s voice is heard on the speakers of all idle system phones in the selected Calling Group The first extension to answer the call by picking up the handset or pressing Sek or by pressing to answer a page is connected to the caller Related Features You must use Calling Group Extensions 502 to assign extensions to a Calling Group Extensions assigned to Calling Group 1 can receive Simultaneous Paging Considerations Examples Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group Exclude extensions that connect auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems fax machines internal and external hotline phones and doorphones from Calling Groups If some extensions in a Calling Group have standard MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phones those extensions are not signaled for voice paged calls to the group because they do not have built in speakers If a Calling Group is in use a user attempting to page that group hears a busy tone If a user leaves the microphone on for hands free answer on intercom HFAI the microphone is turned off when that phone receives a group page the user must lift the handset or press to answer the page Calls can be transferred to a Calling Group manuall
381. s lights the green light turns on Enter an account code using one of the following methods m Dialit manually using the phone s dialpad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press to indicate the end of the code If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns off Make the call if you are not already on a call To change the account code repeat Steps 2 through 4 Account Code Entry F12 5 7 To enter or change a forced account code 1 From a system phone if a password is programmed for the system you must enter it before lifting the handset See System Password 403 for more information Lift the handset or press Gpkr Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press 2 If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on 4 Enter an account code supplied by your System Manager using one of the following methods m Dialit manually using the phone s dialpad m Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code m Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code 5 Pressan idle line button m lf aForced Account Code List exists and the account code is valid or if the Forced Account Code List is empty you hear outside dial tone Go to Step 6 m f a Forced Acc
382. s more flexibility because it lets you specify the number of times calls ring using VMS Cover Rings F117 a the user s extension before going to the user s mailbox In addition if the user s extension has Do Not Disturb on calls on the line can go immediately to coverage Considerations Examples Each outside line can be assigned to only one Hunt Group If a Hunt Group that has outside lines assigned receives an outside call and all members of that Hunt Group are busy or have Do Not Disturb on the caller hears ringing which continues until the call is answered Here are some useful applications for Group Call Distribution m Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group Doing so lets outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order Group Call Distribution 206 5 85 If you install a voice messaging system assign the system extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 Then use this procedure to assign outside lines to Hunt Group 7 for Automated Attendant Service Callers hear a greetin
383. same language as is specified for extension 10 m The System Date 4101 ana System Time 103 must be set correctly to ensure accurate call reports Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 9 Call Reports A call report is a page of information that begins with a header The header includes field names that describe the information in each call record The call record is a line of information that includes the fields shown in Figure 4 5 DATE TIME NUMBER DUR LINE STN ACCOUNT C 04 26 97 11 11 1028812015558014 00 01 40 08 18 C 04 26 97 11 34 1023319085556036 00 04 28 02 32 1725 I 04 26 97 13 35 IN 00 02 12 01 10 I 04 26 97 13 38 9085559111 00 01 22 I2 15 Figure 4 5 Sample Call Report Each page includes 59 records The report has the following fields m Call Type C indicates outgoing calls I indicates incoming calls SMDR Record Type 4608 defines whether incoming calls are reported m Date The date of the call is shown in mm dd yy format where mm is the month ad is the day and yyis the year The system uses the date set with System Date 101 m Time The time of the connection is shown in hh mm format where hh is the hour and mm is the minute The system uses the time set with System Time 4103 and is shown in 24 hour military time m Number For an outgoing call this is the dialed number or the speed dial code of a Marked System Speed Dial number preceded by an F This field hol
384. scription This feature turns off the message light at a specified extension where XX is an extension number from 10 41 Related Features For instructions for turning on the message light see Message Light On Considerations This feature turns off the message light on system phones and standard phones that have message lights See Standard Telephones in Chapter 1 for a list of standard phones with message lights For message waiting capability standard phones with LED compatible message waiting lights must be connected to a PARTNER ACS processor module or to an R3 1 or later 206 module in a system equipped with a PARTNER ACS processor module Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns off the message light at a subscriber s extension when messages in the mailbox have been deleted If a message light is inadvertently turned off at an extension that has a message in the mailbox the message light is refreshed during the voice messaging system s daily maintenance 3 a m If you use the Message Light On feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use this feature to turn the light off You can program a Message Light Off button on a system phone to turn the message light off at a specific extension with one touch Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as Sys
385. se the feature or dial the number with one touch The number in each PARTNER model name indicates the number of programmable buttons with status lights plus two buttons If the PARTNER model phone has a display indicated by a D in the model name users receive messages and prompts when making calls and when programming More information about the display is provided in Chapter 5 A system display phone is required for system programming Table 1 3 summarizes PARTNER model system phone features Table 1 3 PARTINNER Model System Phones PARTNER PARTNER PARTNER PARTNER 34D 18D 18 6 Total Number of 32 16 16 4 Programmable Buttons with Status Lights Total Number of 4 4 0 0 Programmable Buttons without Status Lights Line Capacity 15 15 15 4 ntercom Buttons 2 2 2 2 Display v v Speakerphone v v v v Since the system supports a maximum of 15 lines when the system is configured for the maximum number of lines you can use up to 15 buttons on these phones for outside lines 1 6 Overview Intercom Autodialers PARTNER model system phones support the PARTNER CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer at extensions 10 and 11 The autodialer provides Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system up to 32 The extra 16 buttons on the autodialer are not operational on your system The status lights next to each button also indicate calling activity at
386. setting up 2 11 Index IN 3 H Hands Free Answer on Intercom 3 6 1 Handset volumecontrols 3 3 for hard of hearing Headsets 4 2 Hearingaidcompatibiity C 3 HFAI see Hands Free Answer on Intercom Hold button 3 2 5 95 5 96 Hold Disconnect Time 203 5 97 HoldReminderToneJ5 75 5 95 Cd Hold Exclusive b 75 O Holdingacall 5 75 5 95 5 906 Cd Hotel Motel features description 2 14 1 1 1 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 5 139 5 140 Wake Up Service Button amp 115 5 197 15 199 Hotline 603 5 99 5 100 ss Hotline External 5 78 5 79 _ O Hotline support Inside front cover Hunt Group Extensions 505 5 101 5 102 lt Hunt Groups see also description 2 41 Cd programming 5 102 using VMS 5 90 5 91 5 101 5 102 I IC notification and repair information C 31C 4 Idle Line Preference see Automatic Line Selection Immediate call answering Immediate ring 2 20 2 21 5 115 5 116 In Range Out of Building protectors 4 3 A 3 B 6 Indicators system telephone 3 213 3 ss Industry standard devices se Inside call making an 5 121 5 122 Intercom Auto Dial buttons 2 20 2 21 3 4 5 15 5 16 Intercom Autodialer 1 7 2 22 5 15 6 10 A 1 Intercom buttons 1 6 3 2 1 1 Intercom call making an 5 12115 122 1 1 Intercom Dial Tone 309 Intercom
387. settings whenever you feel that it is necessary It is recommended that a backup be performed after any change to the system or telephone programming Restore Programming 125 copies either the manual or the automatic backup data stored on a PC Card back to the system thereby enabling you to restore settings to their status at the time of the last automatic or manual backup Hospitality Features The following hospitality features are for special applications such as the Bed and Breakfast and Hotel Motel industries With both features the receptionist at extension 10 optionally can use the Intercom Autodialer to specify an extension m Outgoing Call Restriction Button 2114 lets you program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to change an extension s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting without entering System Programming mode For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the No Restriction setting of the guest room phone to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out m Wake Up Service Button 2115 lets you program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up or reminder calls for specified system extensions 2 14 Programming Using System Programming System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole or for individual lines or extensions You can also use System Programming to set up dialing rest
388. sic NEN UE nol Jo m Call Forwarding Call Follow Me m Call Pickup m Conference Drop m Contact Closure m Contact Closure irect Line Pickup Active Line m Direct Line Pickup ldle Line m Exclusive Hold roup Calling Ring Page roup Hunting Ring Voice Signa roup Pickup Available only on system phones 3 14 Learning About Telephones m Last Number Redia oudspeaker Paging ff m Message Light On zl ol T D n n D O E Q 2 pt Q m Personal Speed Dial Numbers m Recall E Co ave Number Redial m Simultaneous Paging m Station Lock m Station Unlockt stem Release Status 7 stem Speed Dial Numbers m louch Tone Enable E m Voice Mailbox Transfer Available only on system phones T Available only on system phones at extension 10 and 11 Available only on system display phones Learning About Telephones 3 15 Using Auxiliary Equipment Contents Overview 4 1 m If aDevice Has Trouble 4 3 Answering Machines 4 4 m Single Answering Machine 4 5 m Multiple Answering Machines 4 6 m Personal Answering Machine 4 7 Auto Attendant 4 8 m Backup for Receptionist 4 8 Call Reporting Devices SMDR 4 9 m Programming 4 9 m Call Reports 4 10 m Considerations 4 11 m Output Format 4 11 m Serial Printers 4 11 m Call Accounting Devices 4 11 Contact Closure Devices 4 12 m Using Contact Closure Devices 4 12 m Programming Contact Closure Devices 4 12 Credit Card S
389. sion will hear a tone for as long as the button is pressed This feature is typically used by a receptionist to alert the boss to an important incoming call when the boss is already on a call The lights of a Manual Signaling button work like an Auto Dial button to show the status of the target extension Additionally a Manual Signaling button can be used to place intercom calls Manual Signaling applies only to system phones SM Trees Chapter 5 for more information NOTE You can have only one button for a target extension per extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button for intercom ringing or voice signaling Programming 2 21 m Fax Management A button labeled Fax 30 is programmed as a Fax Management button for the fax machine connected to extension 30 The lights next to the button show what is happening at the fax machine for example red broken flutter indicates that the fax machine is not responding for example when it is out of paper For more information see Fax Management Feature in Chapter 4 PARTNER 34D Phone 4 a SE L3 c aa ee A ges qe ge Ac s Line O ees fea ie fe BI BL amp BL BL HI Programmable al BL a BL BL Gl Buttons ec BECA BECA os SE Any unused BL BL Ex message line button is Intercom Intercom programmable
390. ss Restriction 302 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To restrict an extension from making calls on a specific line 1 Press Feature 0 Q System Program System Program 3 2 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the extension number to be programmed For example to program extension 23 press 2 3 3 Atthe Line prompt enter the line number to be restricted at this extension For example to restrict line 2 press 0 2 The current restriction displays 4 Tochange the line restriction for this extension press until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries on the previous page 5 Atthis point m Torestrict another line at this extension press Next Item or Prev ttem until the line number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 m Torestrict another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Access Restriction 302 5 109 Line Assignment 301 Description This System Programming procedure assigns the outside lines that are available at an extension The default order of line assignment to the buttons on a system phone is from left to right starting in the bottom left corner see Figure 5 1 on the next page To put
391. ssaging system for Call Answer Service m This feature has no effect on the CO Line Ownership procedure in PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS Valid Entries Line number 01 15 Extension number 10 41 No lines owned by an extension AW Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Line Coverage setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 2 0 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the desired line number For example to program line 12 press 2 3 Enter the number of the extension to be assigned ownership of the line Line Coverage Extension 208 5 113 4 Atthis point m To delete the current setting press Remove m To program another line press Next tem or Prev ttem until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 114 Line Coverage Extension 208 Line Ringing Description This Telephone Programming procedure determines how each outside line assigned to an extension rings A line can ring immediately ring with a 20 second delay or not ring at all Delayed Ring is useful for backup coverage on shared lines such as for secretaries who cover each other s lines No Ring is useful for all extensions except 10 when a receptionist answers all calls
392. ssign a name to their extension The name appears along with the extension number on system display phones when users make an intercom call or a group call or transfer a call Extension Programming A method of telephone programming that lets users program their own extensions from their system phones See also Centralized Telephone External Hotline A standard phone that is programmed to dial a predetermined outside number when a user lifts the handset See also Hotline phone F Fax Management button A system phone button with lights that is programmed with the extension number of a fax machine A user can monitor the lights next to this button to determine when the fax machine is in use available or not answering Feature phone An industry standard phone that includes programmable buttons or other built in features Forced Account Code Entry A system setting that forces users at specified extensions to enter an account code before making a call See also Account code and Forced Account Code List Forced Account Code List An optional list of account codes that the system checks when a user enters a forced account code If the forced account code entered by the user is on the list valid the user gets access to an outside line if not the user is denied access 400 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that has line jacks for connecting up to four outside lines to the control unit G Gr
393. st the volume of Background Music use the phone s volume control buttons while listening to the Background Music To turn Background Music off Press the programmed button or press 9 again If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns off Background Music F19 5 25 Backup Programming Automatic 123 Description The backup of system and telephone programming is optional but recommended This System Programming procedure determines whether the automatic backup of all programming except the system date day and time occurs or not The default setting is Not Active When Backup Programming Automatic is set to Active the information is backed up at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month determined by the system date and time settings to a Backup Restore PC Card If Backup Programming Automatic is Active and an automatic backup fails a Backup Failure Alarm message appears instead of the system date and time on the top line of the telephone display at idle extensions 10 and 11 The message will be one of the following W Backup Failed Write Prot WB Backup Failed Check Card E Backup Failed SystemBusy Backup Failed InsertCard See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for an explanation of these messages and suggested corrective actions and for the procedure for clearing the Backup Failure Alarm message Related Features m Verify that the System Date 101 System Day 102 and S
394. stem Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press 8 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode aor wn Using To respond to a voice interrupt on busy call you hear two beeps and the originator s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 5 195 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Description This feature applies only if you have a
395. stry Canada IC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The IC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate ele
396. swered automatically by fax 2 If a fax comes in on a line other than line A you can transfer the call to fax 2 see Transferring al Call to the Fax Machine Jearlier in this chapter If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine see Using the Fax Management Feature Jearlier in this chapter If fax 1 is set for Delayed Ring on line A fax 1 can pick up fax transmissions when fax 2 does not answer To Program Fax 1 Send Ext X 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first line A selected last 3 Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Delayed Ring set all other lines to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 Tomonitor the fax machine at extension X use Fax Machine Extensions 4601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button 4 18 Using Auxiliary Equipment To Program Fax 2 Receive Ext Y 1 2 Use Line Ass
397. sword is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only The status of the Night Service button at extension 10 tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode The Night Service button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to System Reset 728 being used Considerations A Night Service button must be programmed on the system phone at extension 10 Night Service must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not work if it is programmed on a button without lights A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line that is assigned to that user s phone Line assignments for extensions in the Night Service group can vary from one extension to another Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation If you reassign the Night Service button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned Valid Entries 1 2 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 es Not Assigned wv Select Button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button 5 132 Night Service Button 503 Programming See Figure 2 3 in Cha
398. sy Voice Mail coverage A voice messaging system feature that provides Call Answer Service when a call is not answered b a covered extension See alsa Call Answer Service Voice Mail Service A voice messaging system feature that lets users retrieve messages and record greetings Voice mailbox A storage area for greetings and messages in a voice messaging system Voice messaging system VMS An optional call routing and messaging device that provides call coverage by answering calls and routing them to caller designated extensions It also lets callers leave messages at unanswered extensions and lets subscribers retrieve their messages The system supports either the PARTNER MAIL VS system or the PARTNER MAIL system W Wake Up Service A special application feature that lets the receptionist at extension 10 schedule wake up or reminder calls for specific extensions Glossary GL 7 AA Extensions 607 Abbreviated Ringing 305 5 5 sid Accessories E i 3 Account Code Entr descripiion 5 6 5 8 5 81 5 833 light patterns 3 4 Adding lines and extensions 2 6 1 Allowed List Assignments 408 5 9 Allowed Phone Number Lists amp 407 5 4015 11 Amplified handset 4 83 B 7 Answering a call atyourextension 5 13 5 14 1 identifying call type by ringing pattern ringing at another extension 5 36 5 93 5 94 Answering ma
399. system display phone A display similar to the following appears P ACS R1 0 C01 This message indicates that this is Release 1 0 of the PARTNER Advanced Communications System The C01 represents the country code Using To use this feature press 9g at any system display phone The system release message replaces the default information on the top line of the telephone display for 15 seconds 5 172 System Release Status F59 System Reset Programming Saved 728 Description This System Programming procedure resets the system while retaining the currently programmed settings Reset the system only when advised to do so by technical support personnel Related Features After a power failure or system reset m Night Service Button 503 and Station Lockjreturn to the status on or off that they were in immediately prior to the power failure or system reset m The VMS Cover button and Privacy button return to the status on or off determined by the programmed setting of Automatic VMS Cover 310 and Automatic Extension Privacy 304 respectively For example If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be on again after the system reset However if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be off after the system reset m Allother active features
400. system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Press the programmed button or then lift the handset 2 Speakinto the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of all idle system phones in Calling Group 1 If your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Standard Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of all idle system phones in Calling Group 1 For touch tone phones only if your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Simultaneous Paging I 70 5 157 SMDR Output Format 610 Description Call Reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure allows you to specify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers in the Number field on the call report The longer field is useful for businesses such as law offices and hotels
401. t Group any group 1 6 using Hunt Group Extensions 505 Restricting Dialing from a Fax Machine You can use dialing restrictions to restrict calling activity on a fax machine For example you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to restrict the fax machine to local calls only For a more detailed discussion of dialing restrictions see Chapter 2 Single Fax Machine The single fax machine setup shown in Figure 4 8 is good for moderate traffic The fax machine has its own line line A the number of which is published as the fax number The fax line can be used by other phones when all other lines are busy The fax machine is connected to its own extension extension X Fax Line A CONTROL Figure 4 8 Single Fax Machine To Use The fax machine automatically answers all calls that come in on the fax line If a call comes in on another line you can transfer the call to the fax extension see Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine see Using the Fax Management Feature earlier in this chapter When you send a fax the system automatically selects the fax line To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select line A only Set Automatic Line Selection
402. t against the dialing restrictions to determine whether the code is allowed If the code is allowed the system resets its checking procedure and checks the remaining digits that the user dialed to make sure the call is permitted When a number violates a restriction the call is stopped and the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal IMPORTANT While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System phones provide more protection than standard phones Therefore it is strongly recommended that you install system phones where restricting phone use is important Locking an Extension The system offers a Station Lock feature that lets users enter a four digit code on their telephone dialpad to lock their extensions This helps prevent other users from making outside calls at those extensions 2 8 Programming Restricting Access to Outside Lines A user can access a line either by lifting the handset pressing the line button on the phone or dialing the Direct Line Pickup feature code If you do not want a user to access a specific outside line you can use Line Access Restriction 302 to control an extension s access to a certain line whether the line is assigned to the extension or not Table 2 1 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extension s access to a specific outside line NOTE If Forced Account Code Entry 307 is progra
403. tact Closure Adjunct controlled device outside the building requires a Lucent Technologies 146G Surge Protector SCL 8 to protect the control unit from electrical surges Wiring System phones Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX Bulk Nonplenum DIW cable Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX Bulk Plenum HALAR HALAR cable or at least 2 pair 4 wire star home run not loop Other standard telecommunications equipment single line phones fax machines answering machines etc 1 pair 2 wire mounting cords Lucent Technologies D2R mounting cords recommended Bridging adapter Lucent Technologies 267F2 Range 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices Safety U S Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Requirements Canada Meets CSA C22 2 225 All other countries Meets IEC950 Second Edition and EN60950 Second Edition Specifications A 3 Government Approvals and Local Phone Company Information U S Canada FCC Part 68 FCC registration number U S See the label on the side of the control unit FCC Part 15 Class A Class B 5 Slot Configuration PARTNER Advanced Communications 2 Slot Configuration with System Stand Alone Configuration PARTNER MAIL VS 2 Slot Configuration with 200 206 or 400 module plus ACS processor module REN outside line jack 0 9A per line jack Jack type RJ11C Loop start lines IC CPO1 Issue 7 IC registration number Canada See the label on the
404. tchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone Dial and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 5 89 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal 177G 1 77G Description This feature lets you distribute call volume among extensions in a group to offload call activity from a single user When an intercom or transferred call is placed to a Hunt Group where G is a Hunt Group number from 1 7 the system rings or voice signals the first available non busy extension in the group passing over busy extensions or those with Do Not Disturb on in a circular hunt If a ringing call is not answered within three rings it moves to the next available extension and so on until the call is answered or the caller hangs up Fora voice signaled call only the first available extension is signaled if that extension does not answer the call does not keep hunting After an extension receives a Hunt Group call the next call to the Hunt Group will not ring or voice signal that extension first unless all other extensions in the group are busy or do not answer The system supports up to seven Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system For more information refer to Voice Messaging Systems in Chapter 4 Related Features m You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assi
405. telephone number Valid Entries Up to 12 digits including 0 9 and any single digit Examples The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for a Disallowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of Programming m Specific Telephone Numbers Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it For example to prevent calls to the local number 555 5678 press 5 8 amp amp 6 C 8 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 5 61 m All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code The following list entries prevent calls to the 900 area code Toll Call Prefix required 1900 and 0900 Toll Call Prefix not required 900 and 0900 m All Telephone Numbers in One Exchange The following entries prevent calls to the 976 exchange Toll Call Prefix required 976 Prevents local calls 1111976 Prevents direct dial calls to all area codes 0111976 Prevents operator assisted calls to all area codes 1976 Prevents direct dial toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code 0976 Prevents operator assisted toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code Toll Call Prefix not required 976 Prevents local calls 10 976 Prevents calls to area codes with O as the second digit such as 203 11 976 Prevents calls to area codes with 1 as the second digit such as 212 m International Long Dist
406. tem Installation guide for instructions m Ifthe Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Intercom Autodialer is not receiving auxiliary power What to do Make sure the Intercom Autodialer is plugged into an electrical outlet m Ifthe Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The cord is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the Intercom Autodialer and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m Ifthe Intercom Autodialer works the cord is faulty Call the hotline to arrange for a replacement m lf the Intercom Autodialer does not work call the hotline n the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 10 Troubleshooting Problems with Standard Phones Standard Phone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer is turned off What to do Turn on the ringer m lf the phone rings the problem is solved m f the phone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Call Forwarding is turned on What to do Check to see if Call Forwarding is turned on m f Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off m f Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause
407. tem Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 m f no System Password is programmed the green light goes out and Night Service is off 2 Enter the password The green light goes out Night Service is off 5 134 Night Service Button 503 Night Service Group Extensions 504 Description This System Programming procedure assigns extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is on and a call comes in all extensions in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing settings Related Features m You must use Night Service Button 503 to program the button that is used to turn Night Service on and off m f you program a System Password 403 when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers without entering the System Password m If you have a voice messaging system lines that are assigned to the user s phones in the Night Service Group are covered by the voice messaging system depending on the status of VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Considerations m Do not include extensions connected to certain auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems internal or external hotline phones or doorphones in the Night Service Group m Auserin the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it
408. tem Program and Enter on system phones To program a Message Light Off button 1 ak wn Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Message Light Off F10XX 5 125 Using System Phone To turn off the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press Q If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes off Skip Step 2 2 If no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Standard Phone To turn off the message light 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off 5 126 Message Light Off F10XX Message Light On FO9XX Description This feature turns on the message light at a specified extension where XX is an extension number from 10 41 Related Features For instructions on turning off
409. that need to record many digits for outgoing calls for billing purposes Before changing to 24 digits check the documentation for your call accounting device to verify that 24 digit output is supported Related Features m You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports m When you change the output format the length of the Number field is adjusted for the next call record that prints To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 Considerations m This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR Jin Chapter 4 m Ifthe output format is set to 15 digits and a prints as the last digit of a dialed number on a call report indicating that the digits dialed exceed the 15 digits the Number field can hold you may want to change the output format to 24 digits Valid Entries 1 2 15 Digits W 2 24 Digits Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the maximum number of digits for dialed numbers that can print on call reports 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 6 1 at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value displays Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 158 SMDR Output Format 610 SMDR Record Ty
410. the lines in a different order first use this procedure to remove all assigned lines then assign lines in the desired order Related Features m Number of Lines 104 can be used only during initial system setup to assign a subset of lines to all extensions You can use Line Assignment to assign additional lines to specific extensions For example if five lines were assigned to all extensions using Number of Lines 104 and there are eight lines in the system use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 6 7 and 8 to specific extensions m After you finish Line Assignment you can use Line Ringing to identify when each outside line assigned to an extension should start ringing If you add a line to the system its factory setting is Immediate Ring m You can use Automatic Line Selection to determine the order in which the system selects a line for an extension when the user at that extension lifts the handset or turn on the speaker to make a call If you add a line to the system it becomes the last line in the selection sequence m Remove all outside lines from Hotline 2 7603 and Doorphone 604 605 extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them m f you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing a line make sure you restrict the line for that extension using Line Access Restriction 23302 even if the line is not assigned to that extension so it cannot be accessed using Direct Line Pickup m T
411. the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment from the network and not use it until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturer its authorized agents or by others who may be authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this equipment please contact the Lucent Technologies hotline at 1 800 628 2888 For warranty information see Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC C 2 FCC and IC Information Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service m Hearing Aid Compatibility All system phones are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC IC Notification and Repair Information The Indu
412. the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number If no destination extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Standard Phone To forward your calls 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 1 3 Dial your extension number 4 Dial the number of the extension at which you want your calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding 1 Liftthe handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press a 3 Dial your extension number twice Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 5 33 Call Park Description This feature allows you to park a call or put it on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any phone in the system Related Features m Use Call Pickup to retrieve parked calls m Whena callis parked the caller hears Music On Hold 21602 if it is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module regardless of the Ring on Transfer 41119 setting m If you frequently park calls and you have a system phone program your extension number on an Auto Dial button so you can park a call simply by pressing the button See Auto Dialing
413. the user hears the reorder tone Valid Entries 12 Touch Tone line v 2 Rotary line Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Dial Mode setting for a specific line 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program 4 2 0 1 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the first line to be programmed For example to program line 8 press 0 8 To change the dial mode press until the appropriate value displays To program another line press Next item or Prev tem until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all lines that you want to change Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 56 Dial Mode 201 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Description This feature allows users to access a ringing or held call or to join a call in progress on a specific outside line where LL is a line number from 01 15 This feature is useful for picking up a ringing or held call or for joining a call on a line that is not assigned to the phone Related Features If a line is idle users cannot access it with this feature they hear busy tone For information about accessing an idle line see Direct Line Pickup idle If Line Access Restriction 2302 is set to No Access or Out Only for a line assigned to an extensio
414. thout using expensive adapters or connectors Standard phones can do many of the things that system phones can do and you can save money by using them in certain situations when a system telephone is not needed Follow these guidelines when using standard phones m Use standard phones as power failure backups system phones will not work If you connect standard phones to the first two extensions on the PARTNER ACS processor module users can place and answer outside calls on the first two lines If you connect a standard phone to the first extension on each 206 module users can place and answer outside calls on the first line of each 206 module You can connect standard phones in combination with system phones at power failure extensions or you can simply keep spare standard phones at those extensions to serve as replacements in case of a power failure m To usea system feature press in place of used on system phones followed by its two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For features that use on system phones dial only the two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone Instructions for using these features on standard phones are included in Chapter 5 Feature m Touse a Speed Dial number press followed by its two or three digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For details see Speed Dial Numbers and System Speed Dial Numbers in Chapter 5 m fiCall Waiting 316 is assigned to an extension with a sta
415. ties can continue to talk Other inside parties can put their extensions on hold if there are outside parties on the conference call When the originator hangs up the conference is disconnected Conference calls cannot be transferred If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a conference calling feature that lets you connect multiple callers on a single PBX or Centrex line The number of callers you can connect depends on your PBX or Centrex system For more information about such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recalllfeature instead Outside parties may be harder to hear on a conference call than on a two party call depending on the number of parties and the outside lines connected to the system 5 48 Conference Calls Using System Phone i 5 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call You are connected with the first party Press Conf The first party is now on hold Set up the call to the second party You are connected with the second party If you are adding an inside party to a call you must wait until the party answers Press again to add the second party to the call You can now speak with the first and second parties Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add more p
416. tion Unlock Contact Closure 1 Contact Closure 2 System Release Status A 5 Slot carrier can provide a maximum of 32 extensions or a maximum of 15 lines a 2 Slot carrier can provide a maximum of 14 extensions or a maximum of 7 lines References in this guide are to 32 extensions and to 15 lines even though no system can be configured with both maximums simultaneously Your system does not have to be configured for the maximum of either extensions or lines F represents the button represents the button XX represents an extension number from 01 41 G represents a single digit group number and LL represents a line number from 01 15 Overview 5 3 AA Extensions 607 Description This System Programming procedure lets you identify extensions where auto attendants are connected to the system Doing so lets the system notify users with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the auto attendant This procedure applies only to auto attendants do not use it with the Automated Attendant Service of a voice messaging system Related Features m For each auto attendant extension use Transfer Return Extension 306 to identify the extension to which a call should be routed if the destination extension does not answer m Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Not Assigned for the auto attendant extension if you want to be able to intercept calls routed to the device Considerations
417. tion to intercom first If the problem is not solved call the hotline Standard Phone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light Possible Cause 1 The standard phone is part of a combination extension which includes a system phone that has Background Music on What to do Check to see if the system phone has Background Music on A standard phone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system phone m f Background Music is on turn it off If the standard phone s message waiting light lights properly the problem is solved m f Background Music is not on go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The standard phone s message waiting light is not compatible with the system What to do See Standard Telephones Jin Chapter 1 for a list of supported standard phones with message waiting lights Also check with your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out if there are others m Ifthe phone is not supported you can use it without message waiting capability m Ifthe phone is supported go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The standard phone is not connected to the proper module What to do Make sure the phone is connected to a PARTNER Advanced Communications System processor module or an R3 1 or later 206 module in a system with a PARTNER ASC processor module If the problem is not solved call the hotline n the continental U S help is available at 1 800
418. to activate a feature using a code Each PARTNER ACS processor module has two touch tone receivers each 206 module has one touch tone receiver each 400 module has two touch tone receivers The combination of modules in your system determines the number of standard devices that can dial simultaneously For example if you have one PARTNER ACS processor module two 206 modules and two 400 modules eight standard devices can dial out at the same time If nine standard devices try to Learning About Telephones 3 9 dial out simultaneously the ninth device will not get dial tone until one of the other eight finishes dialing PARTNER MAIL VS contains its own touch tone receivers and does not require any from the system Also because standard phones do not have system line buttons feature buttons or dedicated function buttons basic call handling procedures are sometimes different from those for system telephones In addition the following actions cannot be performed at a standard telephone You cannot enter programming mode Because there are no line buttons on standard phones users must use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line to select a specific line otherwise the system selects an idle line automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom dial tone For information about Automatic Line Selection see Chapter 5 Unless Call Waiting 316 is assigned to specific standard phone extensions there is no indication of a second c
419. to select line A last on all other extensions or remove line A from all other extensions if they should not use it to make outgoing calls 3 Set Line Ringing for line A on extension X to Immediate Ring On all other extensions set line A to Delayed Ring or No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned 4 16 Using Auxiliary Equipment 5 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 Tomonitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button Fax Line Saver If you do not use your fax machine enough to justify paying for its own outside line you can put the machine on its own extension With this setup you must transfer calls to it manually If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine eael Using mS EG Management cestbre earlier in this chapter Figure 4 9 shows the setup CONTROL UNIT Figure 4 9 Fax Line Saver Setup To Use When a person answers a call and hears a fax machine signaling on the other end the person can transfer the call to extension
420. to the system through extension jacks Both voice messaging systems offer your business complete call processing features Specifically they can m Insure that incoming calls are answered and directed to destination extensions correctly and efficiently using immediate or delayed call handling Immediate call handling sends calls directly to the voice messaging system while delayed call handling allows the receptionist to answer calls first m Answer and route calls during the day and after normal business hours m Alleviate the problem of inaccurate or incomplete messages by allowing callers to leave detailed confidential messages for subscribers m Allows subscribers to assign a password to their mailbox change their personal greeting and retrieve messages The PARTNER MAIL system also offers advanced voice mail features such as outcalling group lists broadcast messages and fax management For complete details contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer or refer to the documentation provided with the voice messaging system Delayed Call Handling shows a PARTNER MAIL VS system that provides delayed call handling This setup allows the receptionist at extension 10 to provide personalized service by answering calls during normal business hours The PARTNER MAIL VS system connected to extensions Z1 and Z2 handles calls when the receptionist is busy or not available so calls do not go unanswere
421. tomatic Line Selection and Extension Name Display which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display For standard touch tone or rotary phones or for any phone used mainly to call other extensions program the extension to select intercom first For combination extensions the automatic line selection for both devices including a standard device follows the automatic line selection for the extension You do not need to include all available lines for an extension only the ones you want the system to search through and connect automatically Valid Entries Outside lines 01 15 Left Intercom wv 5 20 Automatic Line Selection Examples System Phone With Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an idle outside line in numerical order starting with the lowest line number Then if all outside lines are busy the system searches for an idle intercom line This order can be changed however to accommodate your business needs For example a telemarketing firm with a WATS line line 5 to reduce telephone expenses would set Automatic Line Selection for all telemarketers extensions to 05 01 02 03 04 Intercom This way the WATS line would be selected first Standard Phone If a standard phone user intends to place inter
422. ton PRESS left 6 DIAL a Pickup Group number 1 4 p 5 93 LAST NUMBER REDIAL PRESS a programmable button PRESS p 5 106 OUDSPEAKER PAGING RESS a programmable button RESS left p 5 117 MANUAL SIGNALING RESS a programmable button RESS DIAL the two digit extension number to ring extension or DIAL plus the two digit extension number to voice signal the extension p 5 123 MESSAGE LIGHT OFF PRESS a programmable button PRESS DIAL optional two digit extension number p 5 125 V Factory setting X Button with lights required Button with lights recommended System Features Continued MESSAGE LIGHT ON PRESS a programmable button PRESS 9 DIAL optional two digit extension number p 5 127 PRIVACY p 5 145 PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 0 7 RECALL PRESS a programmable button PRESS p 5 146 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL PRESS a programmable button PRESS SIMULTANEOUS PAGING PRESS a programmable button PRESS left p 5 154 p 5 156 STATION LOCK p 5 165 PRESS a programmable button 7 PRESS TOUCH TONE ENABLE PRESS a programmable button PRESS p 5 180 VMS COVER p 5 188 PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 1 VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY TALK BACK PRESS a pro
423. trictions The following programming procedures provide ways to override all dialing restrictions provided the user has access to an outside line m Emergency Phone Number List 406 defines a list of up to ten numbers that can be dialed from any extension A typical number is 911 m Marked System Speed Dial Numbers are specially identified System Speed Dial numbers which a user can dial by pressing or on a standard phone followed by a three digit code m System Password 403 creates a password that can be entered at any PARTNER model or MLS model system phone to override dialing restrictions for the duration of a call To override all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction 302 and Night Service with System Password 403 use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create up to eight lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Then use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more of the lists to an extension Setting Up Groups of Extensions You can set up four types of extension groups m Pickup Group Extensions 2501 assigns extensions to one of four Pickup Groups A Pickup Group lets any user in the system answer outside calls for any extension in that group m Calling Group Extensions 4502 assigns extensions to one of four Calling Groups A Calling Group lets users ring or page all extensions in that group simultaneously or transfer calls into the group A
424. tronic door lock or an alert uses the following procedures Contact Closure Group 612 specifies which extensions can activate one or both of the Contact Closures on the Contact Closure Adjunct Contact Closure Operation Type 613 specifies the length of time that each Contact Closure remains active Contact Closure F41 and F42 can be programmed on feature buttons so that the Contact Closures can be activated by pressing the buttons m AA Extensions 4607 identifies an extension to which an auto attendant is connected This lets the system notify users with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the auto attendant Also Frantar Return Extension 306 llets you identify the extension to which a call transferred by the auto attendant should be routed if the destination extension does not answer 2 12 Programming The call reporting device uses the following procedures SMDR Record Type 608 specifies the type of calls that you want to record for call reporting either all calls or outgoing calls only SMDR Top of Page 609 notifies the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page SMDR Output Format 610 identifies whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report Account Code Entry lets users enter account codes for outside telephone calls incoming or outgoing if used the account codes a
425. tting remaining PRESS Feature buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or PRESS features DIAL the new extension s number NOTE Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display first AUTOMATIC LINE SELECTION EXTENSIONNAME DISPLAY PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS p 5 142 PRESS D 5 20 PRESS left p 5 76 PRESS DIALthe phone number up to 28 hem PRESS the line intercom buttons Enter the chara OQ Or in DIAL a two digit code Diali ding se gsp Lf lior 161 in the desired order Table 5 1 Character 80 99 igne Functions p S516 PRESS X Codes on p 9 6 Outside lines 01 15 left AUTO DIAL NUMBERS OUTSIDE AND INSIDE p 5 15 PRESS a programmable button To program an extension number To program an outside number PRESS left p 5 115 DIAL the phone number ug to 28 DIAL the extension number to ring PRESS each line button until the desired ringing option appears in the aat i TEN the extension or display plusthe extension number Immediate ring green steady v to voice signalthe extension Noring green fast flutter Delayed ring starts ringing after 20 seconds green slow flashing System Features ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY p 5 6 PRESS a programmable button PRESS CONFERENCE DROP p 5 50 GROUP CALLING RING PAGE p 5 87 PRESS a programmable button PRESS OA the group T PRESS 8 a programmable button PRESS left Intercom DIAL a Calling Group numbe
426. turb F01 5 69 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Description This System Programming procedure identifies up to 32 extensions that are to signal when a doorphone button is pressed When a person uses the doorphone it signals all alert extensions at the same time If the alert extension is a system phone the call signals with a unique ding dong sound to distinguish it from other calls Additionally if you have two doorphones they signal with different tones so you can distinguish between them Related Features m You must use Doorphone Extensions 604 and 605 to identify the extensions to which doorphones are connected m f Do Not Disturbjis active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled m f a Contact Closure on the Contact Closure Adjunct controls a door lock consider assigning the Doorphone Alert Extensions to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure Only extensions assigned to that Contact Closure Group can activate the door lock Considerations You cannot bridge two doorphones together Valid Entries 1 Not an Alert Extension W 2 Doorphone 1 Alert Extension 3 Doorphone 2 Alert Extension 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 Alert Extension Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify doorp
427. up Extensions 502 to identify the extensions in Calling Group 1 m Use Loudspeaker Paging to make announcements only over the loudspeaker paging system Considerations m You can program a Simultaneous Paging button on a system phone to access with one touch the loudspeaker paging system and idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 m Ifthe loudspeaker paging system or Calling Group 1 is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone m f someone answers a loudspeaker page from a system phone in Calling Group 1 the page becomes an intercom call m f some extensions in Calling Group 1 have standard MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phones those extensions are not included in the simultaneous page because they do not have built in speakers Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Simultaneous Paging button q Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left Intercom X 7 0 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode a fF wn 5 156 Simultaneous Paging I 70 Using System Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle
428. voice messaging system It is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user transfer a caller directly to a specific extension s voice mailbox in order for the caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension This feature is useful when a user knows that a co worker is away from his or her desk Related Features While a call is being transferred the caller hears ringing if 119 is Active If it is Not Active and Music On Hold 602 is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears music on hold while the call is being transferred to the voice mailbox If Music On Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears silence Considerations You can program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button on a system phone to transfer a caller directly to a voice mailbox by pressing the button then dialing the mailbox subscriber s extension number Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode a fF ON Using To t
429. w or disallow conferences with two outside parties 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program A 1 O 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 Toallow or disallow two outside parties on a conference call press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Outside Conference Denial 109 5 141 Personal Speed Dial Numbers Description This Telephone Programming procedure lets you store up to 20 frequently dialed numbers for each extension Personal Speed Dial numbers can be dialed quickly by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a standard phone and the two digit code from 80 through 99 The Personal Speed Dial numbers programmed for a particular extension are for use only at that extension Related Features Personal speed dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing three buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing a single button For instructions on entering special characters Such as Pause in a number see Special Dialing Functions You can use System Speed Dial Numbersjto create a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers available to all system users You can store account codes as Personal Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature External Hotline 311 uses Personal Speed Dial code 80 for the external hotline telephone number A Personal Speed Dial number can begin
430. wer Service of the voice messaging system after the specified number of rings factory setting is three rings Related Features m fiAutomatic VMS Cover 310 is Assigned to an extension that extension normally is covered by the voice messaging system For greater flexibility the user can use this feature to program a VMS Cover button to turn coverage on and off as needed Once a VMS Cover button is programmed the user must use the button to turn VMS Cover on and off even though Automatic VMS Cover 310 is Assigned m VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 m Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system m Ausercan turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing to send that call immediately to his or her voice mailbox See Send All Calls m Users with VMS Cover already turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox m If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the call forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system Considerations m This feature must be programmed on a button with lights m This feature does not apply to forwarded calls group calls parked calls transfer return calls Voice Interrupt
431. wering machine setup Figure 4 1 serves the entire system The answering machine is connected to its own extension and can cover all the lines in the system or as many lines as you assign to it You can install the answering machine on an extension by itself or combine it with a system phone or a standard phone on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide Telephone al CONTROL UNIT Figure 4 1 Single Answering Machine To Use m Goto the machine to manually play back messages m From any system extension make an intercom call to the answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code m From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code To Program 1 Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover 2 Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Immediate Ring Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 4 Adjust the answering machine to answer according to your needs For example set the machine to answer on the fourth ring during the day so someone has a chance to pick up the ca
432. with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting Considerations If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system Personal Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed onto Auto Dial buttons You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 A combined total of 576 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial numbers can be programmed Valid Entries Any phone number up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 9 and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Pause Stop Recall and Touch Tone Enable assigned to codes 80 through 99 No number assigned to any code v 5 142 Personal Speed Dial Numbers Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program Personal Speed Dial numbers 1 Press Feature 0 Q System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Select a two digit code by pressing and dialing two digits between 80 and 99 For example to select cod
433. ws is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation The SoundStation is a registered trademark of Polycom Inc Warranty Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty for this product Refer to Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability in Appendix B of this book Ordering Information The order number for this book is 518 456 054 To order additional books call 1 800 457 1235 or 1 317 361 5353 For information about ordering other system reference materials replacement parts accessories and other compatible equipment refer to Product Ordering Information in Appendix B Support Telephone Number In the continental U S Lucent Technologies provides a toll free customer hotline 24 hours a day Call the hotline at 1 800 628 2888 or your Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer if you need assistance when programming or using your system Consultation charges may apply Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Contents About This Guide V m Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services 2 7 m System Programming Options 2 8 m Using System Programming 2 15 m Telephone Programming Options 2 20 m Using Telephone Programming 2 23 3 Learning About Telephones 3 i m System Telephones 3 1 3 8 m Standard Telephones m Combination Extensions 3 12 m Using Telephones 3 14 Contents 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment 44
434. x transmissions Likewise with Night Service on calls on line B ring immediately at the modem extension Y NOTE If answering machines are connected to Night Service extensions you can join a call that was already answered by an answering machine from any system phone If you have a Lucent Technologies answering machine with the Call Intercept feature the answering machine drops off the call when you join it 4 22 Using Auxiliary Equipment Programming Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 1 Use Line Assignment 801 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X and for line B at extension Y to No Ring Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting 316 extensions Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 or Hunt Group Extensions 505 Assign a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Assign extensions X and Y to the Night Service Group 504 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 23 Voice Messaging Systems Two Lucent Technologies voice messaging systems are compatible with your system You can install one or the other depending on your business needs m The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System which physically resembles a 206 module resides in the control unit m The PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System is an auxiliary device that connects
435. y rotary lines and you are having trouble calling out on standard touch tone phones For example if users dial slowly and calls are not completed or are connected to wrong numbers lengthen the timeout Related Features Use this procedure only if the Dial Mode 201 for at least one outside line in the system is set to rotary Considerations Do not change this setting unless the system is experiencing problems Valid Entries 1 4 seconds 2 8seconds wv 3 12 seconds Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons Such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program 1 O 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 5 153 Save Number Redial F04 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature saves into temporary memory the last outside number up to 28 digits dialed from an extension with a system phone Users can use this feature to save a number before they hang up on a busy or unanswered call Once saved the number can be redialed at any time The number stays in memory until a different one is saved Related Features m Unlike lLast Number Redial this feature lets the user make
436. y device such as a door lock GL 2 Glossary Control unit Made up of a PARTNER ACS processor module and optionally a 2 Slot or a 5 Slot molded plastic carrier to hold additional system modules The 5 Slot carrier also has a cover The control unit connects lines coming into your building to the extensions in your system and also provides system features D DGC Group See Group Call Distribution and Doorphone A Lucent Technologies proprietary phone that can be wall mounted outside your office or in a lobby to allow visitors to alert any number of system extensions by pressing a button The doorphone includes a speaker and microphone to allow two way conversation between the doorphone and the phone that answers Do Not Disturb A feature that prevents incoming calls from ringing at an extension See also Send All Calls E Extension An endpoint in the system numbered 10 41 that connects telephones or standard devices which can be dialed using the button See also Extension jack The location on a PARTNER ACS processor module and 206 modules that allows you to connect extension wiring to the control unit for phones or other telecommunications devices Extension number The number assigned to each extension jack on a PARTNER ACS processor module or a 206 module Extension numbers run consecutively from 10 through 41 and are used for intercom calling Extension Name Display A feature that lets users a
437. y or using a button programmed to ring the Calling Group You can program a Group Calling button on a system phone to ring or page a specified Calling Group or to transfer a call to a Calling Group with one touch When a call is transferred to a Calling Group and the call is not answered it goes back to the specified Transfer Return Extension 306 The call must be ringing not a voice page Here are some useful applications for this feature Group page employees for general announcements this feature is an inexpensive alternative to a paging system Remember to install system phones with built in speakers all models except the MLC 6 and TransTalk 9000 series where you want employees to hear announcements Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G 5 87 m Put the extensions of people with similar responsibilities in a Calling Group so when a caller needs to talk with anyone in the group the receptionist can transfer the call to the group instead of making separate intercom calls For example a car dealership puts all extensions for the sales staff into Calling Group 1 To let a prospective customer talk to any salesperson the receptionist simply transfers the call to the group by dialing All phones in the group ring and the customer is connected to the first salesperson to answer Alternatively the receptionist can page the group through the speakers of their system phones by pressing 1 Programming See Figure
438. you have a Manual Signaling button press before pressing the Manual Signaling button While a call is being transferred the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer 119 lis Active If itis Not Active and Music On Hold 602 is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears music on hold while the call is being transferred to the destination extension If Music On Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears silence The system is factory set to return a transferred call after it rings four times at the destination extension to the extension that transferred it You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to change the number of rings for all system extensions You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to program a different extension to which unanswered calls from a particular extension should return If users transfer a call Caller ID information if it is available is passed to the destination extension If you have a voice messaging system you can use Voice Mailbox Transfer nsfer to transfer a caller directly to a subscriber s voice mailbox An extension programmed with Call Waiting 316 cannot transfer either of two active calls Considerations When you press ransfr the call is put on hold and its associated green light winks A transferred call appears on the destination extension s intercom button unless the destination extension has a line butt
439. you specify what callers hear while they are being transferred If Ring on Transfer is set to Active callers hear ringing as they are being transferred it it is set to Not Active callers hear silence unless Music On Hold is activated and an audio source is connected to the system If this is the case callers hear music while the call is being transferred to the destination extension Once there callers hear ringing until the call is answered or it is sent to the voice messaging system Related Features m f you have an audio source connected to the system set Music On Hold 602 to Active and Ring on Transfer to Not Active so callers hear music as they are being transferred to the destination extension m This procedure has no effect on Direct Extension Dial or Call Park Valid Entries 1 Active wv 2 Not Active Programming See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change Ring on Transfer 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 1 1 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 152 Ring on Transfer 119 Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Description This System Programming procedure changes the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout You may need to change the length of the timeout if you have an
440. ystem Speed Dial numbers For more information see Personal Speed Dial Numbers and System Speed Dial If a user lifts the handset before pressing a line button the system automatically selects the first available outside line or the intercom The order in which the system makes the selection is determined by the Automatic Line Selection for the extension On either a system phone or a standard phone users also can use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line to access a line for making an outside call Users can ring or page any of four Calling Groups For more information see Group Calling Ring Page Users can ring any of the seven Hunt Groups or voice signal Hunt Groups 1 6 For more information see Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal If Station Lock is used at an extension users cannot dial outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 If dialing restrictions are programmed for an extension the system may prevent a user at that extension from placing certain calls For example a user may not be allowed to dial 900 numbers from the extension Or an extension may be programmed to take incoming calls only so the user cannot dial out at all The following features provide dialing restrictions and The following features can be used to override dialing restrictions Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Marked System Speed Dia
441. ystem Time 103 jare set correctly so that the automatic backup occurs at the correct time These settings are not backed up m You can use Backup Programming Manual 7124 in place of or to supplement the automatic backups if desired m Once the system and telephone programming settings have been backed up to a PC Card you can use the Restore Programming 4125 procedure to restore the settings if they become corrupted You can also use Restore Programming 125 to verify the date on a backup file Considerations m To perform either automatic or manual backups purchase a Backup Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies m Before inserting the Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 power down the system After inserting the PC Card power up the system again For instructions see Inserting or Removing a PC Card in this section m Whenever the setting for Backup Programming Automatic is changed from Not Active to Active a backup will occur at the next occurrence of 2 00 a m After that backups will be done at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month until the setting is changed back to Not Active 5 26 Backup Programming Automatic 123 NOTE Although you can change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 123 without having a Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot you must have a PC Card in the slot before a backup can take place It is recommended that you leave the Backup Restore PC Card in PC
442. ystem display phone and must be done from extension 10 or 11 System Restore SeelRestore GL 6 Glossary T Talk Back See Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Telephone Programming Procedures that allow you to customize extensions to meet the needs of individual users including the assignment of features to programmable buttons Telephone Programming can be done either centrally or from the user s own extension See also Centralized Telephone Programming and Extension 200 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that has line jacks for connecting up to two outside lines to the control unit 206 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that contains jacks for connecting up to two outside lines and up to six extensions to the control unit V Verification of Account Codes See Forced Account Code Entry VMS Voice Messaging System See Voice messaging system VMS VMS Hunt Group Hunt Group 7 reserved by the system to identify extensions that are associated with the voice messaging system hardware See also Group Call Distribution and Voice Interrupt On Busy A special intercom call that lets a user interrupt and speak to another user who is busy on a call See also Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back A feature that lets the recipient of a voice interrupt on busy intercom call respond to the originator of that call See also Voice Interrupt On Bu

Partner ACS R1 Programming and Use

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents